R = r
P
r
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 The electric and magnetic elds generated at the point of ob
servation P at the time t depend upon the position, the veloc
ity, and the acceleration of the charged particle at the retarded
time t
R
= (t
R
c
) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 The xcomponent of the current density caused by a moving
charge distribution. The charge labelled Q is representative
of all charges passing through the xoriented element of area,
A per unit time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.5 Upper gure: Sketch of a hydrogen atom in zero applied elec
tric eld. The nuclear charge is Q = 1.6 10
19
Coulombs.
The timeaveraged electron charge, Q, is distributed in a
spherically symmetric cloud around the nucleus having a ra
dius of approximately 5 10
11
m. Lower gure: Sketch of a
hydrogen atom subjected to a uniform electric eld E
0
. The
displacement of the centroid of the electron charge density rel
ative to the nucleus has been exaggerated for the sake of clarity. 13
1.6 Two charges equal in magnitude but opposite in sign are sep
arated by the vector distance
d. By denition the dipole mo
ment of this pair of charges is p = q
d where
d is the vector
directed from the negative to the positive charge. u
x
, u
y
, and
u
z
are unit vectors directed along the x,y, and z axes. . . . . 14
vi
LIST OF FIGURES vii
1.7 The electric eld intensity at various positions around an elec
tric point dipole,
P. The electric eld distribution is cylindri
cally symmetric around the dipole as axis. . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8 The electric eld generated by a dipole oriented along the z
axis and expressed as spherical polar components. . . . . . . . 18
1.9 A particle carrying a charge of q Coulombs and following a
circular orbit of radius a meters with the speed v meters/sec
generates a magnetic dipole moment  m = qav/2 Ampm
2
. . . 19
1.10 The three commonly used coordinate systems. . . . . . . . . . 23
1.11 An application of Gauss Theorem to a volume V bounded by
a closed surface S.
A is a vector eld, and n is a unit vector
normal to the surface at the element of area dS. . . . . . . . . 24
1.12 An application of Stokes Theorem to a surface bounded by a
closed curve C.
dL is an element of length along curve C. n is
a unit vector normal to the element of surface area, dS. . . . . 25
2.1 Given a distribution of sources the electric eld at the posi
tion of the observer, (X,Y,Z), can be calculated as the sum
of the electric elds generated by dividing the source distribu
tion into small volume elements dV=dxdydz and treating the
charges or dipole moments in each volume element as a point
charge or as a point dipole moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2 A sphere of radius R
0
lled with a uniform charge density
0
.
The electric eld at the center of the sphere is zero because the
eld generated by element number 1 at (x,y,z) is cancelled by
the eld equal in magnitude but opposite in direction gener
ated by the equal volume element number 2 at (x,y,z). The
net eld generated by all such symmetry related pairs is zero. 33
2.3 Model for calculating the potential function for a point dipole.
The two charges are separated by the distance d. . . . . . . . 39
2.4 Application of Gauss Theorem to a pillbox straddling a sur
face of discontinuity between two materials. . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.5 A rectangular loop having sides dL long and dw wide used for
the application of Stokes Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.6 Calculation of the electric eld generated by a uniformly charged
plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
LIST OF FIGURES viii
2.7 The potential function (top) and the electric eld (bottom)
generated by a uniformly charged innite plane carrying a
charge density of Coulombs/m
2
. E
z
=
V
p
z
. . . . . . . . . 50
2.8 Geometry for the application of Gauss Theorem to calculate
the electric eld strength generated by an innite, plane, uni
formly charged sheet whose density is Coulombs/m
2
. The
magnitude of the resulting eld is E
0
= /(2
0
). . . . . . . . . 51
2.9 An electric double layer consists of two innite plane sheets
of charge densities + and Coulombs/m
2
separated by a
small distance. The electric eld is zero everywhere outside
the double layer, but is equal to E
z
 = /
0
between the two
charged sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.10 The electric eld distribution and the corresponding potential
function generated by an electrical double layer. The electric
eld intensity inside the double layer is E
0
= /
0
. The
jump in the potential across the double layer is V = 2d/
0
. 54
2.11 A uniformly polarized slab. The polarization density,
P
0
, is
directed along the normal to the slab. The discontinuities in
the normal component of the polarization produce eective
surface bound charge densities given by
b
= div(
P). . . . . 55
2.12 An innite slab that is uniformly polarized in plane, P
x
= P
0
. 57
2.13 The electric eld intensity generated by a spherically symmet
ric charge distribution. The electric eld has only a radial
component because the transverse components generated by
two equivalent charges, dq
1
and dq
2
, cancel by symmetry. . . . 58
2.14 The electric eld generated by a uniformly charged line lying
along the zaxis. The line charge density is
L
Coulombs/meter.
The electric eld is radial and has the value E
r
= (
L
/2
0
) (1/r)
Volts/m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.15 An innite line of uniformly distributed point dipoles can be
modelled by a uniformly charged positive line separated by a
small distance d from a uniformly charged negative line. Let
the charge density on the positive line be
L
, and let the charge
density on the negative line be
L
, then the dipole density,
a vector, is given by 
P
L
 =
L
d Coulombs, and
P
L
is directed
from the negative line to the positive line. . . . . . . . . . . . 61
LIST OF FIGURES ix
2.16 A uniformly polarized body having an irregular shape. The re
sulting surface bound charge distribution produces an electric
eld distribution that is nonuniform both inside and outside
the body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.17 A uniformly polarized ellipsoidal body; the polarization lies
along a principle axis of the ellipse. The resulting surface
bound charge distribution produces a uniform electric eld
inside the ellipse. The electric eld distribution outside the
ellipse is nonuniform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.18 Oblate ellipsoid of revolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.19 Cigar shaped ellipsoid of revolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.1 A charged conductor. The free charge on the conductor is
given by Q =
__
S
D
dS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.2 Two plane parallel, semiinnite metal electrodes separated
by a distance D. The electrode potentials are V
1
and V
2
. The
space between the electrodes is lled with a material having a
dielectric constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.3 The parallel plate capacitor problem with two dierent dielec
tric materials. The electric eld in each region is independent
of position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.4 Charge decay through a leaky capacitor. =
r
0
is the di
electric constant for the spacer material. is the conductivity
of the spacer material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.5 A uniform cylinder, innitely long in the zdirection, and im
mersed in a uniform electric eld E
x
= E
0
. The cylinder is
characterized by a dielectric constant
1
. It is situated in a
medium whose dielectric constant is
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.6 An uncharged dielectric sphere, dielectric constant
1
, situated
in a medium characterized by a dielectric constant,
2
, in the
presence of a uniform electric eld E
z
= E
0
. . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.7 Top gure: a point charge located a distance d in front of an
innite conducting metal plane. Bottom gure: The system
of charges whose electrostatic potential satises
2
V = 0 as
well as the boundary conditions for the problem posed in the
top gure. This solution is only valid in the vacuum region:
in the metal V = 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
LIST OF FIGURES x
3.8 (a) The real problem: a charge q located a distance d from
the interface between two uncharged dielectric media. (b) The
conguration of image charges that produce a potential that
satises
2
V = 0 and that can be used to satisfy the required
boundary conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.9 Equipotential surfaces for two line charges of equal strength
but of opposite sign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.10 The real problem of a point charge located a distance d from
the center of a metal sphere of radius R is shown in (a). In part
(b) the real problem has been replaced by two point charges
as shown in the gure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.11 Electrodes in the form of cylindrical hyperboloids. One pair
of electrodes is held at a potential U=1 Volt; the other pair
of electrodes is held at a potential U=+1 Volt. The potential
function in the space between the electrodes is given by U =
x
2
y
2
. The electric eld components in the space between
the electrodes are given by E
x
= 2x and E
y
= +2y. . . . . . 103
3.12 Electrodes of silver paint drawn on a sheet of conducting pa
per. The resistivity of the paper is much larger than that of the
silver paint electrodes.The equipotential lines can be mapped
out by means of a voltmeter connected to a pointed probe. . . 105
3.13 Charged conductors embedded in a linear dielectric medium.
The charges are a linear function of the potentials, see eqn.(3.61)
in the text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.14 A parallel plate capacitor. The two plates have an area A and
are separated by a distance z. The charge density on each
plate is
s
Coulombs/m
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.15 A plane parallel capacitor partially containing a slab of dielec
tric material d thick and w wide. The dielectric constant of
the slab is . The objective is to calculate the electric forces
acting on the slab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.16 Quinckes method for measuring the dielectric constant of a
uid. Upon the application of the voltage V to the capacitor
plates the dielectric uid is sucked up between the plates. In
equilibrium the electrical force on the uid just balances the
gravitational force. The gravitational force is proportional to
the level dierence h. The electrical force per unit area, t, is
given by t = gh where is the uid density. . . . . . . . . . 114
LIST OF FIGURES xi
3.17 The force acting on the matter contained within a volume V
can be obtained as the surface integral of a vector
T over a
surface S that encloses V. It is assumed that
D is everywhere
inside S proportional to the electric eld,
E. It is further
assumed that the surface S is immersed in a uid that can
support no shear stresses, and that
D and
E are parallel on
S. The force per unit area is given by  T =
E
D/2 and
the direction of the force per unit area is such that the angle
between
T and the surface normal is bisected by the direction
of the electric eld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.18 A point dipole p
a
is located at the center of an empty spherical
cavity of radius R cut out of an otherwise homogeneous di
electric material characterized by a dielectric constant . The
electric eld far from the cavity is E
0
Volts/m, and is uniform
and directed along the zaxis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.1 The geometry used to calculate the vector potential at the
point P(
J
T
(r). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2 A thin wire carrying a current of I Amps. The eld is to be
calculated at P, the point of observation. . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.3 Derivation of the law of BiotSavart from the elds generated
by a slowly moving point charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.4 A straight wire 2L meters long, and carrying a current of I
0
Amp`eres, used to calculate the vector potential and the mag
netic eld generated at a point P in the central plane. . . . . . 129
4.5 Geometry used to calculate the magnetic eld generated by a
long straight wire carrying a current of I
0
Amp`eres. . . . . . . 131
4.6 The magnetic eld generated along the axis of a circular cur
rent loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.7 The magnetic eld along the axis of a solenoid L meters long,
R meters in radius, and having N turns per meter. . . . . . . . 133
4.8 Diagram to illustrate the use of Stokes Theorem to show that
the eld outside an innite solenoid is zero. . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.9 Calculation of the vector potential generated by a current loop
of radius a carrying a current of I
0
Amps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.10 A long cylindrical rod magnetized along the axis. . . . . . . . 139
4.11 A uniformly magnetized disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
LIST OF FIGURES xii
4.12 A uniformly magnetized disc. The discontinuities in the nor
mal component of the magnetization generate an eective mag
netic surface charge density on the front and back surfaces of
the disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.13 A magnetic point dipole oriented along the zaxis. . . . . . . . 148
4.14 The calculation of the magnetic scalar potential for a given
distribution of magnetization density,
M(r), using superposi
tion and the potential function for a point magnetic dipole. . . 149
5.1 A circular loop of radius R carrying a current of I Amps and
lying in the xy plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.2 A permeable sphere placed in a uniform magnetic Held of
strength H
0
Amps/meter. The permeability of the sphere is
1
, and it is placed in a medium having a permeability
2
. . . 158
5.3 An innitely long permeable cylinder, radius R, placed in a
uniform transverse magnetic eld, H
0
Amps/meter. The axis
of the cylinder is oriented along the zaxis. The permeability
of the cylinder is
1
and the cylinder is immersed in a medium
whose permeability is
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
5.4 A ctitious magnetic point charge, q
m
, located outside the
plane boundary between two permeable materials. The per
meability to the left of the boundary is
1
. The permeability
on the right hand side of the boundary is
2
. The magnetic
charge is located a distance d from the interface. The other
two magnetic charges, q
m
and q
m
0
= m
0
_
2
+
1
_
. The image dipole used for calculating
elds on the right of the plane boundary is m
= 2m
0
_
1
2
+
1
_
.
(N.B. the dipole strength is given by m
0
= q
m
d where d is
the small separation between the plus and minus magnetic
charges, NOT the distance d between the dipole and the in
terface at z=0.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.6 The image problem for the case of a line current of I Amps run
ning parallel with the plane interface between two permeable
materials and located a distance d from the interface. . . . . . 164
LIST OF FIGURES xiii
5.7 N circuits embedded in a linear, isotropic medium. The mag
netic uxes,
k
are linear functions of the currents I
j
. The in
ductance coecients satisfy the symmetry relations L
MN
= L
NM
.168
5.8 A system consisting of a primary coil carrying a current I
p
and
a secondary coil consisting of a single turn of wire enclosing
an area A m
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.9 A change in ux through a circuit must be accompanied by
an applied emf e = d/dt in order to maintain the current
constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.10 A magnetic dipole located in an inhomogeneous magnetic eld.
The magnetic moment and the applied eld,
B, are both di
rected along the zaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.11 A loop of wire carrying a current I
2
Amps, and having an area
R
2
, is located in a uniform magnetic eld B
z
. The magnetic
eld is generated by a coil system carrying a current I
1
Amps:
B
z
= KI
1
. The eld exerts a torque on the loop given by
T
y
= B
z
msin Newtonmeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.12 A long cylindrical solenoid. The solenoid is L meters long and
has a radius of R meters. It is wound with N turns per meter. 180
5.13 The hoop stresses, T, acting on a cylindrical shell due to an
internal pressure of p
M
Newtons per m
2
. The hoop stresses T
exerted by the bottom halfcylinder on the top halfcylinder
are required to overcome the internal pressure forces. The
thickness of the shell has been exaggerated. . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.14 The magnetic force acting on the matter contained within a
volume V can be obtained as the integral of a vector
T
M
over
the closed surface S which encloses V. It is assumed that
B
is proportional to
H everywhere inside V, that
B and
H are
parallel on S, and that S is immersed in a uid that can support
no shear stresses. 
T
M
=
B
H
2
. The direction of the force per
unit area,
T
M
, is such that the angle between
T
M
and the
surface normal is bisected by the direction of the magnetic
eld
B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.1 The variation with temperature of the reduced magnetization
for pure iron. The Curie temperature is T
c
= 1044 K, and
the magnetization at T=0 K is M
s
(0) = 22.1 kOe= 1.76 10
7
Amps/m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
LIST OF FIGURES xiv
6.2 The domain structure at room temperature in a perfect iron
single crystal in which the edges of the crystal are accurately
parallel with the crystalline axes. The magnetization is uni
form along the zdirection (out of the paper). Simple domain
structures are observed only in single crystalline specimens. . . 188
6.3 A hysteresis loop for a polycrystalline specimen of pure iron.
The details of the BH loop are specimen sensitive. The satu
ration magnetization at room temperature is 2.14 Teslas. The
remanent eld is B
r
= 1.22 T, and the coercive eld is H
c
= 79
Amps/m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.4 The hysteresis loop for the soft ferromagnet 479 Permalloy
(79% Ni, 17% Fe, 4% Mo). The maximum eective perme
ability is 0.14 (the relative permeability is
R
= 1.1 10
5
),
and H
c
= 2.45 Amps/m. The saturation eld is B
s
= 0.87 Teslas.191
6.5 Examples of two minor hysteresis loops in 479 Permalloy (see
g.(6.4). For the lowest minor loop the eld was reduced af
ter having partially traversed the virgin magnetization curve.
For the upper minor loop the eld was reduced after having
traversed the major hysteresis curve cycle at least once. . . . . 193
6.6 The variation with internal magnetic eld, H, of the mag
netization at room temperature for a commercial Strontium
Ferrite. The coercive eld is 2.59 10
5
Amps/m. . . . . . . . 195
6.7 Device for measuring the axial magnetic eld, B, inside a cylin
der having a crosssectional area A. A coil of N turns is con
nected to a voltmeter V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.8 A plot of B inside a long iron rod vs the externally applied
magnetic eld H
0
= B
0
/
0
. The length to diameter ratio is 25
corresponding to a demagnetizing coecient N
z
= 0.00467. . . 197
6.9 A ring shaped specimen used to measure the intrinsic magnetic
properties of a soft magnetic material. The primary winding
of N
p
turns is used to generate the eld H. The secondary coil
of N
s
turns is used to measure the eld B in the ring. . . . . . 199
6.10 (a) A schematic representation of a hard disc write head. (b)
The coordinate system used to write the spatial dependence
of the write head eld in the Karlqvist approximation. . . . . 201
6.11 At the juncture between two regions of oppositely directed
magnetizations there is a large surface charge density, and
this gives rise to large fringing elds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
LIST OF FIGURES xv
6.12 Example of encoded data bits on a hard disc drive. . . . . . . 203
6.13 An electromagnet consisting of a soft ferromagnetic yoke wound
with N turns of wire and containing a gap of width g meters.
The length of the ferromagnetic yoke along its center line is L
meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.1 A space and time dependent source charge density (r, t) and
a space and time dependent source current density
J
T
(r, t)
generate time dependent electric and magnetic elds at the
position, P, of an observer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.2 A center fed linear radio antenna. The current forms a stand
ing wave with nodes at the wire ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
7.3 The coordinate system used to describe the elds generated
by an oscillating atomic or molecular electric dipole moment. . 218
7.4 A small blob of charge moving along the xaxis with a velocity
v
x
. The contribution to the potential at P at the time of
observation, t, comes from the position of the particle at the
retarded time t
R
= t r
0
/c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.1 The pattern of radiated power for an oscillating electric dipole.
There is no power radiated along the direction of the dipole,
p or m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8.2 The schematic diagram of a centerfed, linear, halfwave an
tenna oriented along the zaxis. The current is zero at the
ends of the antenna; these are located at z=L and at z=+L. . 234
8.3 The radiation pattern for a halfwave antenna compared with
the radiation pattern for an oscillating electric dipole. The
dipole pattern is indicated by the + symbols. . . . . . . . . . . 235
LIST OF FIGURES xvi
8.4 A schematic diagram of an Xray tube illustrating the pro
duction of the white Xray spectrum. The electrons undergo
a deacceleration upon striking the metal anode. This de
acceleration is of order a= 1024 m/sec
2
for a typical 20 keV
potential drop between the anode and the cathode: this as
sumes an electron stopping distance of 3510
10
m. During a
brief period, 10
16
seconds, the electron radiates at the rate
of 5.7 10
6
Watts, therefore each electron emits a pulse
of radiation containing 5.7 10
22
Joules. The number of
electrons that impinge on the anode per second for a beam
of 1 mAmp is 6.25 10
15
. The average power in the Xray
beam will be (6.25 10
15
)(5.7 10
22
) = 3.6 10
6
Watts.
This energy is distributed over a range of frequencies from
zero to 4.8 10
18
Hz (h
max
= e  V). This calculation does
not include the energy contained in the characteristic Xray
spectrum emitted from the target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
8.5 Schematic diagram of an atom in a time varying electric eld.
The atom develops a time varying dipole moment that scatters
the incident radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
8.6 The production of polarized light by means of scattering. Let
the incident light be unpolarized. The light scattered along the
yaxis will be completely linearly polarized because only the
component of the dipole moment along z can scatter radiation
into the ydirection (see eqn.(8.30)). The argument can be
generalized to show that for any direction in the yz plane the
scattered radiation will be linearly polarized. . . . . . . . . . . 243
9.1 A plane wave propagating along the direction specied by
k, where k
z
=
2
_
(cos t + sin t). . . . . . . . . . 257
9.8 The construction of a beam of radiation having a nite size
in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the beam
propagation. Such a beam can be constructed from the super
position of a large number of plane waves that are propagating
at small angles to the direction of the beam. . . . . . . . . . . 259
9.9 The variation of the phase across the xy plane for a spherical
wave is described by exp
_
ik
0
2R
(x
2
+ y
2
)
_
. The phase increases
with distance, r, in the plane because the distance from the
center of curvature to an oaxis point on the plane is larger
than the radius of curvature R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
10.1 A plane wave, E
x
= E
0
exp (i[kz t]) is incident from vac
uum on a material characterized by a dielectric constant at
the circular frequency . The wave falls upon the surface at
normal incidence. The amplitude of the reected wave is E
R
,
and the amplitude of the transmitted wave is E
T
. . . . . . . . 268
LIST OF FIGURES xviii
10.2 The Maxwell equation curl(
E) =
H) =
+ i
,
upon angle of incidence of the incident wave calculated for
copper at room temperature and for an incident wavelength
of = 0.5145 m. The normal component of the wavevector
in copper is given by k
z
=
_
c
_
(n
+ i
). At this wavelength
the relative dielectric constant for copper is
r
=(5.34+i6.19),
n=1.19, and =2.60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.9 The real and imaginary part of the reectivity of copper,
E
R
/E
0
, as a function of angle of incidence for a wavelength
= 0.5145 m and Spolarized radiation. Copper at room
temperature;
r
= (5.34 + i6.19), n=1.19, and =2.60. . . . . 294
10.10The absolute value of the reectivity of copper,  E
R
/E
0
, as
a function of angle of incidence for a wavelength = 0.5145
m and Spolarized radiation. Copper at room temperature;
r
=(5.34 + i6.19), n=1.19, and =2.60. . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
LIST OF FIGURES xix
10.11The real and imaginary parts of the complex ratio H
R
/H
0
for
copper as a function of angle of incidence for a wavelength
= 0.5145 m and for Ppolarized radiation. Copper at room
temperature;
r
=(5.34 + i6.19), n=1.19, and =2.60. . . . . . 296
10.12The absolute value of the reectivity of copper,  E
R
/E
0
, as a
function of angle of incidence for a wavelength = 0.5145 m
and for Ppolarized radiation. Copper at room temperature;
r
=(5.34 + i6.19), n=1.19, and =2.60. . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.13The reectivity, E
R
/E
0
, as a function of the angle of inci
dence for Crown glass at a wavelength = 0.5145 m and for
Spolarized radiation. The reectivity is real because the di
electric constant is real corresponding to very small losses in
the glass. n=1.525=
r
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
10.14The reectivity, H
R
/H
0
, as a function of the angle of inci
dence for Crown glass at a wavelength = 0.5145 m and for
Ppolarized radiation. The reectivity is real because the di
electric constant is real corresponding to very small losses in
the glass. n=1.525=
r
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
11.1 A plane wave propagating between two perfectly conducting
planes. E
x
= E
0
exp (i[kz t]), H
y
= (E
0
/Z
0
) exp (i[kz t]).308
11.2 A stripline. E
x
= E
0
, V = E
0
d. H
y
= E
0
/Z
0
, I=wJ
s
=w(E
0
/Z
0
).308
11.3 Crosssection through a coaxial cable. The electric eld has
a radial component, E
r
, and the magnetic eld has only the
component H
H) = J
s
. . . . . . . 366
LIST OF FIGURES xxi
12.7 A transmission line, characteristic impedance Z
0
Ohms, shunted
by a resistance of R Ohms. The incident wave amplitude is
V
0
Volts; the reected wave amplitude is V
R
Volts; the trans
mitted wave amplitude is V
T
Volts. The reection coecient
is R = V
R
/V
0
= (Z
0
/R)/ [2 + (Z
0
/R)]. The transmission
coecient is T = V
T
/V
0
= 2/ [2 + (Z
0
/R)]. . . . . . . . . . . . 368
12.8 A transmission line, characteristic impedance Z
0
Ohms, shunted
by an inductive impedance of Z
L
Ohms. The incident wave
amplitude is V
0
Volts; the reected wave amplitude is V
R
Volts; the transmitted wave amplitude is V
T
Volts. The re
ection coecient is R = V
R
/V
0
= i(Z
0
/L)/ [2 (iZ
0
/L)].
The transmission coecient is T = V
T
/V
0
= 2/ [2 (iZ
0
/L)]. 369
12.9 Thin, perfectly conducting metal diaphragms placed across a
waveguide and their equivalent shunt circuits placed across a
transmission line. Shaded areas are metal, unshaded areas are
unobstructed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
12.10A microwave cavity resonator. Resonance occurs when L =
n
g
/2 where
g
= 2/k
g
and n is an integer. . . . . . . . . . . 371
12.11The absolute value of the reection coecient as a function of
frequency for a microwave signal having an amplitude of E
0
Volts/m incident on a microwave cavity. The reected wave
amplitude is E
R
Volts/m. The quality factor of the cavity is
given by Q=f
0
/f where f is the frequency interval between
the frequencies for which the change in reectivity is 0.7 of the
maximum change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
12.12Electric and magnetic eld distributions for the TE
01
and
TM
01
modes in a circular waveguide. The dashed lines rep
resent the magnetic eld, the full lines the electric eld. . . . . 380
12.13Electric eld lines for the TE
11
mode in a cylindrical Wave
guide. The electric eld lines must be normal to the walls
at r=R, where R is the inner radius of the waveguide. The
magnetic eld lines are orthogonal to the electric eld lines,
and H
r
=0 at r=R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
List of Tables
3.1 Resistivities and time constants for some selected materials at
a temperature of 20C. (Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,
53
rd
Ed., CRC Press (1972). The dielectric constant has been
taken to be
0
for convenience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.2 The rst ve Legendre polynomials P
n
(x): see Schaums Out
line Series Mathematical Handbook by Murray R. Spiegel,
McGrawHill, N.Y.,1968. The multiplicative constant in front
of each polynomial has been chosen so that the polynomials
satisfy the condition
_
1
1
dxP
m
P
n
=
_
2
2n+1
_
mn
, where
mn
= 1
if m=n, and zero otherwise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.1 The magnetic susceptibility at room temperature for some
common nonmagnetic substances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.2 Magnetic properties of some soft magnetic materials. B =
eff
(H+M), where
eff
=
R
0
. One Tesla equals 10 kGauss,
and 79 Amps/m equals 1 Oersted. Permalloy is an alloy of 78.5
atomic % Ni and 21.5 atomic % Fe. Supermalloy is composed
of 79 atomic % Ni, 16 atomic % Fe, and 5 atomic % Mo. . . . 194
6.3 Magnetic properties of some commercial hard magnet materi
als. (See, for example, www.dextermag.com). . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.1 Optical constants for some selected materials at a wavelength
of 0.5145 microns ( 514.5 nm). This wavelength is a standard
Argon ion laser green line. It corresponds to a frequency of
f= 5.827 10
14
Hz. A time dependence exp (it) has been
assumed. (a) P.B. Johnson and R.W. Christy, Phys.Rev.B6,
4370 (1972). (b) P.B. Johnson and R.W. Christy, Phys.Rev.B9,
5056 (1974). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
xxii
LIST OF TABLES 1
11.1 Characteristics of some commonly used commercial coaxial
cables. The dielectric material between the conductors is polyethy
lene. The data was taken from the 1985/86 catalogue of RAE
Industrial Electronics Ltd., Vancouver, BC. . . . . . . . . . . . 344
11.2 Frequency dependence of the attenuation parameter for some
selected coaxial cables. V(z) = V
0
exp (z). Frequencies in
MHz. The data is taken from the 1985/86 catalogue of RAE
Industrial Electronics Ltd., Vancouver, BC. . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.1 Cuto frequencies for the lowest transverse electric (TE) modes
and the lowest transverse magnetic (TM) modes in Xband
waveguides (RG52/U or WR90 brass guides). The internal
dimensions of Xband waveguides are a= 0.900 inches = 2.286
cm, and b= 0.400 inches = 1.016 cm. The external dimensions
of the guide are 1.00 x 0.50 inches. The cuto frequencies were
calculated for
r
= 1 using
_
mn
c
_
2
=
_
m
a
_
2
+
_
n
b
_
2
. . . . . . . 365
12.2 The values of x corresponding to the roots of the equations
J
m
(x)=0 and
J
m
(x) =0 for the rst four Bessels functions. . . 379
Chapter 1
Maxwells Equations
1.1 Fundamental Postulates.
The properties of ordinary matter are a consequence of the forces acting
between charged particles. Extensive experimental investigations have es
tablished the following properties of electrical charges:
(1) There are two kinds of charges. These have been labelled positive
charge and negative charge.
(2) Electrical charge is quantized. All particles so far observed carry
charges which are integer multiples of the charge on an electron. In the MKS
system of units, the charge on an electron is e = 1.60x10
19
Coulombs.
By denition, the electron carries a negative charge and a proton carries a
positive charge; the charge on a proton is +1.60x10
19
Coulombs. No one
knows why charge comes in multiples of the electron charge.
(3) Equality of the positive and the negative charge quantum. The
quantum of positive charge and the quantum of negative charge are equal to
at least 1 part in 10
20
. This has been determined from experiments designed
to measure the net charge on neutral atoms.
(4) In any closed system charge is conserved. This means that the al
gebraic sum of all positive charges plus all negative charges does not change
with time. This does not mean that individual charged particles are con
served. For example, a positron, which carries a positive charge of 1.60x10
19
Coulombs, can interact with an electron, which carries a negative charge of
2
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 3
1.60x10
19
Coulombs, in such a way that the electron and positron disappear
and two neutral particles called photons are produced. The total charge be
fore and after this transformation occurs remains exactly the same, namely
zero. The individual charged particles have disappeared but the total charge
has been conserved.
(5) Charges generate electric and magnetic elds. Charged particles
set up a disturbance in space which can be described by two vector elds; an
electric eld,
E, and a magnetic eld,
B. The units of the electric eld are
Volts/meter; the units of the magnetic eld are Webers/m
2
. Since these are
vector elds they are characterized by a direction and a magnitude. Each
of these elds at any point in space can be described by its components
along three mutually perpendicular axes. For example, with respect to a
rectangular cartesian system of axes, xyz (see g.(1.1),
Figure 1.1: A cartesian coordinate system used to specify an electric vector
eld
the electric eld can be resolved into the three components E
x
(x, y, z, t),
E
y
(x, y, z, t), and E
z
(x, y, z, t) where the magnitude of the electric eld is
given by E =
_
E
2
x
+ E
2
y
+ E
2
z
. The components of these elds depend upon
the orientation of the coordinate system used to describe them, however
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 4
the magnitude of each eld must be independent of the orientation of the
coordinate system.
(6) The elds E and B are real physical objects. These elds can carry
energy, momentum, and angular momentum from one place to another.
(7) The electromagnetic forces on a charged particle, q, can be
obtained from a knowledge of the elds E, B generated at the
position of q by all other charges. The force in Newtons is given by
F = q[
E + (v
B)] (1.1)
where v is the particle velocity in meters/sec. (Notice that
B has the units
of an electric eld divided by a velocity). Formula (1.1) applies to a spinless
particle. In actual fact the situation is more complicated because most parti
cles carry an intrinsic magnetic moment associated with its intrinsic angular
momentum (spin). In the rest system of the particle its magnetic moment is
subject to a torque due to the presence of the eld
B, and to a force due to
spatial gradients of
B. These magnetic forces will be discussed later. For the
present we shall discuss only spinless charged particles, and we shall ignore
the fact that real charged particles are more complicated.
(8) Superposition. Electric and magnetic elds obey the rules of super
position. Given a system of charges which would by themselves produce the
elds
E
1
,
B
1
; given a second system of charges which would by themselves
produce the elds
E
2
,
B
2
; then together the two systems of charges produce
the total elds
E =
E
1
+
E
2
,
B =
B
1
+
B
2
. (1.2)
This rule enormously simplies the calculation of electric and magnetic elds
because it can be carried out particle by particle and the total eld obtained
as the vector sum of all the partial elds due to the individual charges.
(9) A Stationary Charged Particle. In the coordinate system in which
a charged particle is stationary with respect to the observer the electric and
magnetic elds which it generates are very simple:
E =
q
4
0
(
R
R
3
)
B = 0 (1.3)
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 5
Figure 1.2: The elds generated by a point charge of q Coulombs at r
q
that
is stationary with respect to the observer located at r
P
.
R = r
P
r
q
.
Equation (1.3) is called Coulombs law. See g.(1.2)
The electric eld strength is measured in Volts/meter. The amplitude of
the electric eld decreases with distance from the charge like the square of
the distance ie.
1
R
2
where the exponent is equal to two within 1 part in
10
10
. The MKS system of units has been used to write eqn(1.3) in which the
charge is measured in Coulombs. A current of 1 Amp`ere at some point in
a circuit consists of an amount of charge equal to 1 Coulomb passing that
point each second. Distances in (1.3) are measured in meters. The factor of
proportionality is
1
4
0
= 10
7
c
2
= 8.987 10
9
meters/farad (1.4)
where c = 2.997910
8
m/sec is the velocity of light in vacuum. The size
of
1
4
0
is purely the consequence of the historical denitions of the Volt and the
Amp`ere. A second system of units which is very commonly used in the cur
rent magnetism literature is the CGS system in which distances are measured
in centimeters, mass is measured in grams, and time is measured in seconds.
In the CGS system the unit of charge, the statcoulomb, has been chosen
to make Coulombs law very simple. In the CGS system the eld due to a
stationary point charge is given by
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 6
E = q
_
R
R
3
_
statvolts/cm and
B = 0 Gauss. (1.5)
The price that is paid for the simplicity of eqn.(1.5) is that the conventional
engineering units for the current and potential, Amp`eres and Volts, cannot
be used. The scaling factors between MKS and CGS electrical units involve
the numerical value of the velocity of light, c. For example, in the CGS
system the charge on a proton is e
p
= 4.803 10
10
esu whereas in the MKS
system it is e
p
= 1.602 10
19
Coulombs. The ratio of these two numbers is
e
p

esu
e
p

MKS
= 2.9979 10
9
. (1.6)
(10) The Fields generated by a Moving Charged Particle. Consider
a coordinate system in which a spinless charged particle moves with respect
to the observer with a constant velocity v which is much smaller than the
speed of light in vacuum, c : ie. (v/c) << 1. The electric and magnetic elds
generated by such a slowly moving charge are given by
E(
R, t) =
q
4
0
_
R
R
3
_
V/m
B(
R, t) =
1
c
2
_
v
E
_
Webers/m
2
.
(1.7)
These expressions are correct to order (v/c)
2
.
R is the vector drawn from
the position of the charged particle at the time of observation to the position
of the observer. Note that the moving charge generates both an electric and
a magnetic eld. The above elds can be used to calculate the force on a
particle q
2
located at
R:
F
2
(
R, t) = q
2
_
E(
R, t) +
_
v
2
(
R, t)
B(
R, t)
__
Newtons. (1.8)
The particle q of eqns.(1.7) generates the elds that exert forces on the par
ticle q
2
. Equations (1.7) are simplied versions of the general expressions for
the electric and magnetic elds generated by a spinless point charge moving
in an arbitrary fashion: see The Feynman Lectures on Physics, Volume
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 7
II, page 211 (R.P.Feynman, R.B.Leighton, and M.Sands, AddisonWesley,
Reading, Mass., 1964). These general expressions are
E(
R, t) =
q
4
0
_
(
R
R
3
) + (
R
c
)
d
dt
(
R
R
3
) +
1
c
2
d
2
dt
2
(
R
R
)
_
Retarded
(1.9)
c
B(
R, t) =
R
R
Retarded
E(
R, t). (1.10)
The label Retarded refers to the retarded time t
R
= t
R
c
. The distances
that appear in eqn.(1.9) and eqn.(1.10) are not evaluated at the time of
observation, t, but at the earlier time, the retarded time, in order to take
into account the nite speed of light. Any change in position requires the
minimum time R/c to reach the observer, where c is the speed of light in
vacuum. This corresponds to the requirement that changes in the motion of
the particle can not be communicated to the observer faster than is permitted
by the speed of light in vacuum, see g.(1.3).
For a slowly moving particle, the rst two terms of eqn.1.9 add together
to give Coulombs law in which the distance R is evaluated at the time of
observation rather than at the retarded time; in other words, one can ignore
time retardation if v/c is small. The last term in eqn.1.9 gives a eld that is
proportional to the component of acceleration perpendicular to the position
vector
R in the limit (v/c) << 1. This eld decreases with distance like 1/R
as opposed to the 1/R
2
decrease of Coulombs law. It is called the radiation
eld and is given by the expression
E
rad
=
q
4
0
_
a
R
_
R
c
2
R
3
t
R
c
(1.11)
c
B =
R
R
t
R
c
E
rad
, (1.12)
where a is the acceleration of the charge.
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 8
R(t )
R
P
Point of
observation at
time t
Position of the
particle at the
retarded time t
R
Position of the
particle at the
time of observation t
Trajectory
of the
particle
Figure 1.3: The electric and magnetic elds generated at the point of ob
servation P at the time t depend upon the position, the velocity, and the
acceleration of the charged particle at the retarded time t
R
= (t
R
c
)
1.2 Maxwells Equations.
In principle, given the positions of a collection of charged particles at each
instant of time one could calculate the electric and magnetic elds at each
point in space and at each time from eqns.(1.9) and (1.10). For ordinary
matter this is clearly an impossible task. Even a small volume of a solid
or a liquid contains enormous numbers of atoms. A cube one micron on a
side (10
6
m 10
6
m 10
6
m) contains 10
11
atoms, for example. Each
atom consists of a positively charged nucleus surrounded by many negatively
charged electrons, all of which are in motion and which will, therefore, gen
erate electric and magnetic elds that uctuate rapidly both in space and in
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 9
time. For most purposes one does not wish to know in great detail the space
and time variation of the elds. One usually wishes to know about the space
and time averaged electric and magnetic elds. For example, the magnitude
and direction of
E averaged over a time interval that is determined by the
instrument used to measure the eld. Typically this might be of order 10
6
seconds or more; a time that is very long compared with the time required
for an electron to complete an orbit around the atomic nucleus in an atom
(10
16
to 10
21
seconds). Moreover, one is usually interested in the value
of these elds averaged over a volume that is small compared with a cube
10
6
meters on a side but large compared with atomic dimensions, 10
10
meters in diameter. In 1864 J.C.Maxwell proposed a system of dierential
equations that can be used for calculating electric and magnetic eld distri
butions, and that automatically provide the space and time averaged elds
that are of practical interest. These Maxwells Equations for a macroscopic
medium are as follows:
curl
E =
B
t
(1.13)
div
B = 0 (1.14)
curl
B =
0
_
J
f
+curl
M +
P
t
_
+
0
E
t
(1.15)
div
E =
1
0
_
f
div
P
_
(1.16)
where
0
0
= 1/c
2
and c is the velocity of light in vacuum. These equa
tions underlie all of electrical engineering and much of physics and chem
istry. They should be committed to memory. In large part, this book
is devoted to working out the consequences of Maxwells equations for special
cases that provide the required background and guidance for solving practi
cal problems in electricity and magnetism. In eqns.(1.13 to 1.16)
0
is the
permativity of free space; it has already been introduced in connection with
Coulombs law, eqn.(1.3). The constant
0
is called the permeability of free
space. It has the dened value
0
= 4 10
7
Henries/m. (1.17)
Maxwells equations as written above contain four new quantities which
must be dened: they are
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 10
(1)
J
f
, the current density due to the charges which are free to move in
space, in units of Amp`eres/m
2
;
(2)
f
, the net density of charges in the material, in units of Coulombs/m
3
;
(3)
M, the density of magnetic dipoles per unit volume in units of
Amps/m;
(4)
P, the density of electric dipoles per unit volume in units of
Coulombs/m
2
.
In Maxwells scheme these four quantities become the sources that generate
the electric and magnetic elds. They are related to the space and time
averages of the position and velocities of the microscopic charges that make
up matter.
1.2.1 Denition of the Free Charge Density,
f
.
Construct a small volume element, V , around the particular point in space
specied by the position vector r. Add up all the charges contained in V
at a particular instant; let this amount of charge be Q(t). Average Q(t)
over a time interval short compared with the measuring time of interest, but
long compared with times characteristic of the motion of electrons around
the atomic nuclei; let the resulting time averaged charge be < Q(t) >.
Then the free charge density is dened to be
f
(r, t) =
< Q(t) >
V
Coulombs/m
3
. (1.18)
The dimensions of the volume element V is rather vague; it will depend
upon the scale of the spatial variation that is of interest for a particular
problem. It should be large compared with atomic dimensions but small
compared with the distance over which
f
changes appreciably.
1.2.2 Denition of the Free Current Density,
J
f
.
The free charge density, (r, t), will in general change with time as charge
ows from one place to the other; one need only think of charge owing along
a wire. The rate at which charge ows across an element of area is described
by the current density,
J
f
(r, t). It is a vector because the charge ow is
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 11
associated with a direction. The components of the current density vector
can be measured by counting the rate of charge ow across a small area A
located at the position specied by r, and whose normal is oriented parallel
with one of the coordinate axes; parallel with the xaxis, for example (see
g.(1.4).
Q
X
Y
Z
Element of area
centered at .
The normal is
directed along x.
r
Figure 1.4: The xcomponent of the current density caused by a moving
charge distribution. The charge labelled Q is representative of all charges
passing through the xoriented element of area, A per unit time.
Now at time t measure the net amount of charge, < Q >, that has passed
through A
x
in a small time interval, t: positive charge that ows in
the direction from +x to x is counted as a negative contribution; negative
charge that ows from x to +x also makes a negative contribution. The
xcomponent of the current density is given by
J
f

x
=
< Q >
tA
x
Amps/m
2
. (1.19)
The other two components of
J
f
are dened in a similar manner. The time
interval t, and the dimensions of the elements of area, A
x
, A
y
, and A
z
are supposed to be chosen so that they are large compared with atomic times
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 12
and atomic dimensions, but small compared with the time and length scales
appropriate for a particular problem. Free charge density can be visualized
as a kind of uid owing from place to place with a certain velocity. In terms
of this velocity the free current density is given by
J
f
(r, t) =
f
(r, t)v(r, t). (1.20)
In the process of charge ow electrical charge can neither be created nor
destroyed. Because charge is conserved, it follows that the rate at which
charge is carried into a volume must be related to the rate at which the net
charge in the volume increases with time. The mathematical expression of
this charge conservation law is
f
(r, t)
t
= div
J
f
(r, t). (1.21)
1.2.3 Point Dipoles.
In order to discuss the denitions of the two vector functions
P(r, t) and
E
+
=
q
4
0
_
r
r
3
_
.
The electric eld at P due to the negative charge is given by
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 14
Figure 1.6: Two charges equal in magnitude but opposite in sign are sepa
rated by the vector distance
d. By denition the dipole moment of this pair
of charges is p = q
d where
d is the vector directed from the negative to the
positive charge. u
x
, u
y
, and u
z
are unit vectors directed along the x,y, and z
axes.
=
q
4
0
_
r +
d
(r +
d
3
).
_
Referring to g.1.6 one has
r = x u
x
+y u
y
+z u
z
,
and
r =
_
x
2
+y
2
+z
2
.
For
d oriented along the zaxis as shown in g.1.6,
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 15
(r +
d) = x u
x
+y u
y
+ (z +d) u
z
so that
r +
d =
_
x
2
+y
2
+ (z +d)
2
)
1/2
or
r +
d =
_
x
2
+y
2
+z
2
+ 2zd +d
2
1/2
.
Upon dividing out r
2
this gives
r +
d = r
_
1 + (
2zd +d
2
r
2
)
_
1/2
.
From this expression one has
1
r +
d
3
=
1
r
3
_
1 +
(2zd +d
2
)
r
2
_
3/2
.
This is so far exact. Now make use of the fact that (d/r) is very small and
use the binomial theorem to expand the radical. It is sucient to keep only
terms linear in (d/r). The result is
1
r +
d
3
=
1
r
3
3zd
r
5
.
Use this result to calculate the total electric eld at the point of observation,
P, correct to terms of order (d/r). The terms proportional to
_
1
r
2
_
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 16
cancel leaving the eld
E
d
=
E
+
+
E
=
1
4
0
_
(3zqd)r
r
5
q
d
r
3
_
.
By denition the dipole moment of the pair of point charges is given by
p = q
E
d
=
1
4
0
_
3(p r)r
r
5
p
r
3
_
. (1.22)
Although this expression has been obtained for the particular case in which p
is oriented along the zaxis, the result stated in eqn.1.22 is perfectly general
and is valid for any orientation of the dipole moment p.
Formula 1.22 is so fundamental that it should be committed to
memory along with Coulombs law. The eld distribution around a
point dipole is illustrated in g.1.7. The magnetic eld generated by a sta
tionary point dipole is zero; magnetic elds are generated by charges moving
with respect to the observer.
It is useful to write the dipole electric eld in terms of its components
with respect to a spherical polar coordinate system in which the dipole is
aligned along the zaxis, see g.(1.8). These components are
E
r
=
2p
4
0
cos()
r
3
(1.23)
E
=
p
4
0
sin()
r
3
(1.24)
The Point Magnetic Dipole.
Atoms and molecules often carry a magnetic moment. These magnetic mo
ments can arise as a result of the motion of electrons around the nucleus
of an atom or around the nuclei in a molecule (see below). In addition,
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 17
Figure 1.7: The electric eld intensity at various positions around an electric
point dipole,
P. The electric eld distribution is cylindrically symmetric
around the dipole as axis.
electrons and nuclei carry intrinsic point magnetic moments that are related
to their intrinsic angular momentum (spin). Atomic or molecular magnetic
moments generate magnetic elds. When these magnetic elds are observed
at distances from the atom or molecule that are much larger than atomic
or molecular dimensions, and when these elds are averaged over times long
compared with atomic or molecular orbital times, the resulting time averaged
eld can be described by
B =
0
4
_
3( m r)r
r
5
m
r
3
_
. (1.25)
where
0
is the constant of eqn.(1.17) and m is the magnetic moment. In
addition to the magnetic eld created by a magnetic moment, the atom or
molecule, if charged, will generate an electric eld given by Coulombs law,
eqn.(1.3).
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 18
Figure 1.8: The electric eld generated by a dipole oriented along the zaxis
and expressed as spherical polar components.
The generation of a magnetic eld due to the orbital motion of a charged
particle can be understood using the simple model illustrated in g.(1.9).
Let a spinless charged particle, charge= q Coulombs, revolve in a circular
orbit of radius a meters with the speed v meters/sec, where
v
c
1. One
can use eqn.(1.7) to calculate the electric and magnetic elds that would
be measured by an observer whose distance from the center of the current
loop is much greater than the orbit radius a. It can be shown that the time
averaged electric eld is given by coulombs law
E =
q
4
0
_
r
r
3
_
V olts/m.
This result is obtained by using a binomial expansion in the small quantity
a/r and keeping only the lowest order terms; the lowest order correction
term upon taking the time average is proportional to (a/r)
2
, see problem
(1.8). The magnetic eld can be calculated using eqn.(1.7). The velocity of
the particle is proportional to the orbit radius, and therefore when the time
averages are worked out the lowest order nonvanishing term is proportional
to (a/r)
2
; see problem (1.8). The timeaveraged magnetic eld turns out
to be given by eqn.(1.25). Notice that this expression has exactly the same
form as eqn.(1.22) for the electric eld distribution around an electric dipole
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 19
Figure 1.9: A particle carrying a charge of q Coulombs and following a
circular orbit of radius a meters with the speed v meters/sec generates a
magnetic dipole moment  m = qav/2 Ampm
2
.
moment p. Here the vector m is called the orbital magnetic dipole moment
associated with the current loop, and is given by
m =
qa
2
2
_
d
dt
_
u
z
Coulomb meters
2
/sec. (1.26)
Note that  m = IA where I= qv/2a is the current in the loop, and A = a
2
is the area of the loop. Since the speed of the particle is given by v =
a (d/dt), the magnitude of the magnetic moment can also be written in
terms of the angular momentum of the circulating charge:
 m =
qav
2
=
_
q
2m
p
_
(m
p
av) .
where the mass of the charged particle is m
p
and it carries an angular mo
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 20
mentum L= m
p
av. Thus the angular momentum m is related to the particle
angular momentum
L by the relation
m =
_
q
2m
p
_
L. (1.27)
For an electron q=  1.60 10
19
Coulombs =  e so that the magnetic
moment and the angular momentum are oppositely directed. The angular
momentum is quantized in units of , therefore the magnetic moment of an
orbiting particle is also quantized. The quantum of magnetization for an
orbiting electron is called the Bohr magneton,
B
. It has the value
B
=
e
2m
e
= 9.27 10
24
Coulomb m
2
/sec.
(The units of
B
can also be expressed as Ampm
2
or as Joules/Tesla).
In addition to their orbital angular momentum, charged particles possess
intrinsic or spin angular momentum,
S. There is also a magnetic moment
associated with the spin. The magnetic moment due to spin is usually written
m
s
= g
_
q
2m
p
_
S. (1.28)
For an electron q = e, and g = 2.00. The spin of an electron has the
magnitude 
i
p
i
. This moment
will uctuate with time, so it is necessary to perform a time average over an
interval that is long compared with atomic uctuations but short compared
with times of experimental interest; let this time average be
i
p
i
. Then
the electric dipole density is given by
P(r, t) =
i
p
i
V
Coulombs/m
2
. (1.29)
The shape and size of V are unimportant: the volume of V should
be large compared with an atom, but small compared with the distance over
which
P varies in space. In a real material the atoms are not generally xed
in position. In a solid they jiggle about more or less xed sites. In liquids
and gasses they may, in addition, take part in mass ow as matter ows
from one place to another. This atomic motion considerably complicates the
calculation of the electric dipole density because the eective electric dipole
on an atom or molecule that is moving with respect to the observer includes a
small contribution due to any magnetic dipole moment that might be carried
by that atom or molecule. However these correction terms are very small and
may be neglected in the limit
v
c
1.
The Denition of the Magnetic Dipole Density,
M.
This vector quantity is dened in a manner that is similar to the denition
of the electric dipole moment per unit volume:
M(r, t) =
i
m
i
V
Amps/meter. (1.30)
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 22
i
m
i
is a suitable time average over the atomic magnetic moments con
tained in a small volume element, V , at time t and centered at the position
specied by r. It is assumed that the atoms are stationary. If they are not,
the magnetization density contains contributions which are proportional the
velocities of the various atomic electric dipole moments; these velocities are
measured with respect to the observer. We shall not be concerned with this
correction which is very small if
v
c
1. As above, the volume element V is
supposed to be large compared with an atomic dimension but small compared
with the length scale over which
M varies in space.
1.3 Return to Maxwells Equations.
Maxwells equations (1.13,1.14,1.15,1.16) form a system of dierential equa
tions that can be solved for the vector elds
E and
B given the space and
time variation of the four source terms
f
(r, t),
J
f
(r, t),
P(r, t), and
M(r, t).
In order to solve Maxwells equations for a specic problem it is usually
convenient to specify each vector eld in terms of components in one of the
three major coordinate systems: (a) cartesian coordinates (x,y,z), g.(1.10);
(b) cylindrical polar coordinates (r, , z), g.(1.10); and (c) spherical polar
coordinates (, , ), g.(1.10).
It is also necessary to be able to calculate the scalar eld generated
by the divergence of a vector eld in each of the above three coordinate
systems. In addition, one must be able to calculate the three components
of the curl in the above three coordinate systems. Vector derivatives are
reviewed by M.R. Spiegel, Mathematical Handbook of Formulas and Tables,
Schaums Outline Series, McGrawHill, New York, 1968, chapter 22. It is
also worthwhile reading the discussion contained in The Feynman Lectures
on Physics, by R.P. Feynman, R.B. Leighton, and M. Sands, AddisonWesley,
Reading, Mass., 1964, Volume II, chapters 2 and 3.
The following four vector theorems should be read, understood,
and committed to memory because they will be used over and over
again in the course of solving Maxwells equations.
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 23
Figure 1.10: The three commonly used coordinate systems.
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 24
1.3.1 The curl of any gradient function is zero.
1.3.2 The divergence of any curl is zero.
1.3.3 Gauss Theorem.
Figure 1.11: An application of Gauss Theorem to a volume V bounded by
a closed surface S.
A is a vector eld, and n is a unit vector normal to the
surface at the element of area dS.
Consider a volume V bounded by a closed surface S, see g.(1.11). An
element of area on the surface S can be specied by the vector
dS = ndS
where dS is the magnitude of the element of area and n is a unit vector
directed along the outward normal to the surface at the element dS. Let
A(r, t) be a vector eld that in general may depend upon position and upon
time. Then Gauss Theorem states that
_ _
S
(
A n)dS =
_ _ _
V
div(
A)d
where d is an element of volume. The integrations are to be carried out at
a xed time.
1.3.4 Stokes Theorem.
Consider a surface S bounded by a closed curve C, see g.(1.12).
A(r, t) is
any vector eld that may in general depend upon position and upon time. At
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 25
Figure 1.12: An application of Stokes Theorem to a surface bounded by a
closed curve C.
dL is an element of length along curve C. n is a unit vector
normal to the element of surface area, dS.
a xed time calculate the line integral of
A around the curve C; the element
of length along the line C is
dL. Then Stokes Theorem states that
_
C
A
dL =
_ _
S
curl(
A) ndS
where n is a unit vector normal to the surface element dS whose direction
is related to the direction of traversal around the curve C by the right hand
rule.
1.4 The Auxiliary Fields
D and
H.
It is sometimes useful to rewrite Maxwells equations (1.13 to 1.16) in terms
of
E,
B, and two new vector elds
D and
H. These two new vectors are
constructed as follows:
D =
0
E +
P
and
B =
0
(
H +
M).
When written using these two new elds Maxwells equations become
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 26
curl(
E) =
B
t
(1.31)
div(
B) = 0 (1.32)
curl(
H) =
J
f
+
D
t
(1.33)
div(
D) =
f
(1.34)
Maxwells equations have a simpler form when written in this way, and
may in consequence be easier to remember. Their physical content is, of
course, unaltered by the introduction of the two new auxiliary elds
D and
H.
1.5 The Force Density and Torque Density in
Matter.
The presence of an electric eld,
E, and a magnetic eld,
B, in matter results
in a force density if the matter is charged and in a torque density if the
matter carries electric and magnetic dipole densities. In addition, if the
electric eld varies in space (the usual case) then a force density is created
that is proportional to the electric dipole density and to the electric eld
gradients. Similarly, if the magnetic eld varies in space then a force density
is exerted on the matter that is proportional to the magnetic dipole density
and to the magnetic eld gradients. These force and torque densities are
stated below; their proof is left for the problem sets.
1.5.1 The Force Density in Charged and Polarized Mat
ter.
There is a force density that is the direct analogue of eqn.(1.8), the force act
ing on a charged particle moving with the velocity v in electric and magnetic
elds, ie
f = q
_
E + [v
B]
_
.
If this force acting on each charged particle is averaged in time over periods
longer than characteristic atomic or molecular orbital times and summed
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 27
over the particles contained in a volume, V , where V is large compared
with atomic or molecular dimensions, then one can divide this total averaged
force by V to obtain the force density
F =
f
E + (
J
f
B) Newtons/m
3
. (1.35)
If the electric eld in matter varies from place to place there is generated
a force density proportional to the dipole moment per unit volume,
P, given
by
F
E
= (
P E
x
) u
x
+ (
P E
y
) u
y
+ (
P E
z
) u
z
Newtons/m
3
. (1.36)
In addition, if the magnetic eld,
B, varies from place to place there will
be generated a force density proportional to the magnetic dipole density,
M,
given by
F
B
= (
M B
x
) u
x
+ (
M B
y
) u
y
+ (
M B
z
) u
z
Newtons/m
3
. (1.37)
The nabla operator denotes the operation of calculating the gradient of a
scalar function (r). In cartesian coordinates
=
x
u
x
+
y
u
y
+
z
u
z
.
1.5.2 The Torque Densities in Polarized Matter.
It can be shown that an electric eld exerts a torque on polarized matter.
The torque density is given by
T
E
=
P
E Newtons/m
2
. (1.38)
The magnetic eld also exerts a torque on magnetized matter. This
torque density is given by
T
B
=
M
B Newtons/m
2
. (1.39)
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 28
1.6 The CGS System of Units.
The CGS system of units is still used by many scientists and they are com
monly used in many older articles and books dealing with topics in electricity
and magnetism. For that reason it is useful for reference purposes to explic
itly display Maxwells equations written using the CGS system of units.
curl(
E) =
1
c
B
t
(1.40)
div(
B) = 0 (1.41)
curl(
B) =
4
c
_
J
f
+c curl(
M) +
P
t
_
+
1
c
E
t
(1.42)
div(
E) = 4
_
f
div(
P)
_
(1.43)
In this system of units c = 2.998 10
10
cm/sec. and
E and
B have the
same units (statVolts/cm). However, for historical reasons, the units of
B are
known as Gauss. 10
4
Gauss are equal to 1 Weber/m
2
: the unit 1 Weber/m
2
is also called a Tesla. The electric eld is measured in statVolts/cm where 1
statVolt is equal to 299.8 Volts; (yes, these are the same signicant gures as
occur in the speed of light!). An electric eld of 1 statVolt/cm (sometimes
stated as 1 esu/cm) is approximately equal to 30,000 Volts/m.
If auxillary vector elds
D and
H are introduced through the relations
D =
E + 4
P ,
and
B =
H + 4
M,
then equations (1.42 and 1.43) become
curl(
H) =
4
c
J
f
+
1
c
D
t
, (1.44)
div(
D) = 4
f
. (1.45)
The rst two equations, eqns.(1.40,1.41), remain the same. The vector
D has
the same units as
E, and the vector
H has the same units as
B, although for
historical reasons the units of
H are called Oersteds.
CHAPTER 1. MAXWELLS EQUATIONS 29
The relation between charge density and current density in the MKS
and the CGS systems can be deduced from the ratio of the proton charge as
measured in both sets of units. This ratio is
e
p

esu
e
p

MKS
= 2.9979 10
9
.
It follows from this ratio that 2998 esu/cm
3
is equal to 1 Coulomb/m
3
.
Similarly, a current density of 1 Amp`ere/m
2
is equal to 2.998 10
5
esu/cm
2
.
The conversion from MKS to CGS magnetic units is easy to remember
since the earths magnetic eld is approximately 1 Oersted which is equal to
10
4
Tesla (Webers/m
2
).
Chapter 2
Electrostatic Field (I)
The Calculation of the Electrostatic Field Given a Timeindependent
Source Distribution.
2.1 Introduction.
The electrostatic limit is the ideal case in which nothing changes with time.
All source distributions are stationary, ie
t
is zero. Therefore Maxwells
equations reduce to
curl(
E) = 0 (2.1)
div(
B) = 0 (2.2)
curl(
B) =
0
_
J
f
+curl(
M)
_
(2.3)
div(
E) =
1
0
_
f
div(
P)
_
. (2.4)
Notice that the magnetic eld has become totally uncoupled from the electric
eld. As far as the static electric eld is concerned the magnetic properties
of matter are irrelevant. The calculation of the static magnetic eld from its
sources will be the subject of Chapter(4).
Notice that div(
dE =
1
4
0
dQ
(
R r)

R r
3
,
where
R is the vector that species the position of the observer and r is the
vector that species the location of the volume element, dV (see g.(2.1).
The total electric eld at the position of the observer can be calculated as
the vector sum of the electric eld contributions from all volume elements:
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 32
E(X, Y, Z) =
1
4
0
___
AllSpace
dxdydz (x, y, z)
(
R r)

R r
3
. (2.5)
It is very seldom that the above integral can be carried out analytically. In
all but a few special cases the integral must be calculated using a computer
and small but nite volume elements. Equation (2.5) is valid even when
the point of observation is located within the charge distribution so that the
distance 
E(X, Y, Z) =
1
4
0
___
Space
dxdydz
_
3[
P(x, y, z) (
R r)](
R r)

R r
5
P(x, y, z)

R r
3
_
.
(2.6)
This complex formula can be seldom evaluated exactly. Usually it must
be evaluated approximately by means of a computer. Eqn.(2.6) is valid for
points of observation both inside and outside the electric dipole density dis
tribution. If the observation point lies inside the dipole density distribution
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 34
one must surround it by a small sphere of radius R
0
and carry out the summa
tions implied by eqn.(2.6) for the space outside the sphere. This is required
in order to avoid the divergence obtained when
R =r. The radius R
0
must
be chosen so small that variations of the dipole density,
P, within the sphere
can be neglected. After having calculated the contribution to the electric
eld generated by the dipole density distribution from points outside the
sphere, one must add an electric eld contribution from the dipoles inside
the sphere. It is not clear at this point how to calculate this contribution,
but later it will be shown that the electric eld at the center of a uniformly
polarized sphere, polarization density
P
0
, is given by
E
0
=
P
0
3
0
.
This eld
E
0
must be added to the electric eld generated by the dipole
sources outside the sphere of radius R
0
in order to obtain the total electric
eld strength at the position of the observer.
The procedure outlined above is very complicated due to the complex
form of the electric eld generated by a point dipole. A second, simpler ap
proach, is suggested by the Maxwell eqn.(2.4). Namely, one can use eqn.(2.5)
with the charge density given by
(x, y, z) = div
P(x, y, z) . (2.7)
It is clear from eqn.(2.7) that a spatially uniform dipole moment density
distribution does not generate an electric eld. However, one must be careful:
any dipole distribution conned to a nite region of space must vary rapidly
at its surfaces. This rapid variation of the dipole density produces an eective
charge density distribution that may become very large and is localized near
those surfaces. These surface charge density distributions must be taken into
account when calculating the electric eld.
2.2 The Scalar Potential Function.
The direct calculation of the electric eld using Coulombs law as in eqn.(2.5)
is usually inconvenient because of the vector character of the electric eld:
eqn.(2.5) is actually three equations, one for each electric eld component
E
x
,
E
y
, and
E
z
. It turns out that the electrostatic eld can be obtained from
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 35
a single scalar function, V(x,y,z), called the potential function. Usually it is
easier to calculate the potential function than it is to calculate the electric
eld directly. The eld
E can be obtained from the potential function by
dierentiation:
R) =
q
4
0
1

R r
, (2.9)
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 36
or
V (X, Y, Z) =
q
4
0
1
[(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
]
1/2
.
That this is an appropriate potential function can be veried by direct dif
ferentiation using
E
x
=
V
X
,
E
y
=
V
Y
,
and
E
z
=
V
Z
.
These electric eld components can be compared with Coulombs law, eqn.(1.3).
The potential function eqn.(2.9) can be used to construct the potential
function for any charge distribution by using superposition. Consider an
arbitrary, but nite, charge distribution, (r), such as that illustrated in
g.(2.1). The charge distribution can be divided into a large number of very
small volumes. A typical volume element, dV, is shown in the gure. The
charge contained in the volume element dV is dq = (r)dV Coulombs. The
volume element is supposed to be so small that all the charge contained in
it is located at the same distance from the point of observation at
R. The
charges contained in dV may be treated like a point charge; they therefore
contribute an amount to the total potential at P given by
dV
p
=
(r)dV
4
0
1

R r
or
dV
p
=
(x, y, z)dxdydz
4
0
1
[(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
] + (Z z)
2
]
1/2
.
(Do not confuse the element of volume, dV, with the element of potential,
dV
p
.) The total potential as measured by the observer at (X,Y,Z) is obtained
by summing the above expression over the entire charge distribution.
V
p
(X, Y, Z) =
1
4
0
___
All Space
(x, y, z)dxdydz
[(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
]
1/2
.
(2.10)
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 37
Of course, one need not use cartesian coordinates. In symbolic notation the
above expression, eqn.(2.10), can be written
V
p
(
R) =
1
4
0
_
Space
(r)dV

R r
. (2.11)
This formula, eqn.(2.11), works even when the point at which the potential
is required is located within the charge distribution. It is not obvious that it
should work; the proof is based upon Greens theorem (see Electromagnetic
Theory by Julius Adams Stratton, McGrawHill, NY, 1941, section 3.3). It
should also be noted that the total charge density distribution is made up
partly of free charges,
f
, and partly of the eective charges due to a spatial
variation of the dipole density,
b
= div(
P), where
b
is the socalled bound
charge density: the total charge density is given by
=
f
+
b
.
One can understand why the potential function remains nite even though
the integrand in eqn.(2.11) diverges in the limit asr
R. Surround the point
of observation at
R by a small sphere of radius R
0
. R
0
is taken to be so small
that variations of the charge density inside the sphere may be neglected.
The integral in eqn.(2.11) remains nite at all points outside the sphere and
therefore, in principle, the integral can be carried out without problems. Let
the resulting contribution to the potential be V
0
. Inside the sphere the charge
density can be taken to be constant, (r) =
0
, and can therefore be removed
from under the integral sign. The remaining integrand in eqn.(2.11) is spher
ically symmetric and can be written in spherical polar coordinates for which
dV = 4r
2
dr. The contribution to the potential at the center of the sphere
due to the charge contained within the sphere becomes
V =
0
4
0
_
R
0
0
4r
2
dr
r
=
0
R
2
0
0
2
.
Thus the total potential at the point of observation,
R, is nite and has the
value V (
R) = V
0
+
0
R
2
0
2
0
.
Substitute the expression eqn.(2.8) into the Maxwell eqn.(2.4) to obtain
div(gradV ) =
2
V =
1
0
_
f
div(
P)
_
. (2.12)
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 38
Eqn.(2.12) is a dierential equation for the potential function, V, given the
charge density distribution. This dierential equation has been much studied
and is called Poissons equation.
The divergence of a gradient is called the LaPlace operator, div(gradV ) =
2
V . In cartesian coordinates one has
2
V (x, y, z) =
2
V
x
2
+
2
V
y
2
+
2
V
z
2
.
The form of the LaPlace operator should be committed to memory for the
three major coordinate systems: (1) cartesian coordinates; (2) plane polar
coordinates; (3) spherical polar coordinates. The LaPlace operator in each
of these three systems will keep cropping up over and over again in this book.
2.2.1 The Particular Solution for the Potential Func
tion given the Total Charge Distribution.
We have already written down the potential function which is generated by
a given distribution of charge; eqn.(2.11). From this equation it follows that
the particular solution of the dierential equation (2.12), Poissons equation,
is given by
V (
R) =
1
4
0
_
Space
_
f
(r) div(
P(r))
_
dV

R r
. (2.13)
Eqn.(2.13) is called a particular solution of Poissons equation (eqn.(2.12))
because it is generated by a particular, local, distribution of charges. Notice
that any solution of LaPlaces equation,
2
V = 0, can be added to (2.13)
and Poissons equation will still be satised: this freedom can be exploited
to satisfy boundary conditions for problems that will be treated later.
2.2.2 The Potential Function for a Point Dipole.
As pointed out above, the potential function generated by an electric dipole
distribution can be calculated from an eective charge density distribution
b
= div(
1
r
_
1 +
zd
r
2
_
to rst order in the small distance d. Also 1/r
= 1/r so that
V
dip
=
q
4
0
1
r
+
q
4
0
1
r
qzd
4
0
1
r
3
.
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 40
But p = q
d and
z
r
= cos() so that V
dip
is just given by eqn.(2.14).
The point dipole potential, eqn.(2.14), can be used to calculate the po
tential at the point of observation,
R, by superposition of contributions from
small volume elements, dV, at r, each of which acts like a point dipole
p =
PdV . The result is
V
dip
(
R) =
1
4
0
_
Space
dV
P (
R r)

R r
3
. (2.15)
Formula (2.15) gives the same value for the potential function as does eqn.(2.13)
in which the free charge density,
f
, has been set equal to zero. These two
ways of calculating the potential due to a distribution of dipoles can be shown
to be mathematically equivalent, see Appendix (2A).
2.3 General Theorems.
A number of rules, or theorems, can be deduced from Maxwells equations
(2.1) and (2.4).
2.3.1 Application of Gauss Theorem
From Maxwells equations one has
div(
E) =
t
0
where
t
=
f
+
b
, and
b
= div(
E) =
1
0
___
V
dV
t
=
Q
t
0
.
But from Gauss Theorem, section(1.3.3)
___
V
dV div(
E) =
__
S
dS(
E n) ,
where S is the surface bounding the volume V, and n is a unit vector normal
to the element of surface area, dS, and directed from inside the volume to the
outside. Thus the total charge Q
t
=
___
V
dV
t
contained within the volume
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 41
V can be calculated from a knowledge of the electric eld everywhere on the
surface S bounding the volume V:
Q
t
=
0
__
S
dS(
E n) . (2.16)
It is often useful to rewrite eqn.(2.4) in terms of the displacement vector
D =
0
E +
P. Notice that
D and
P have the same units, Coulombs/m
2
, and
these units are dierent from the electric eld units of Volts/m. Using the
above denition of
D the fourth Maxwell equation becomes
div(
D) =
f
, (2.17)
where
f
is the density of free charges. Integrate eqn.(2.17) over a volume
V and apply Gauss Theorem to obtain
___
V
dV div(
D) =
__
S
dS(
D n) =
___
V
dV
f
.
It follows from this that the total free charge within a volume V can be
calculated from a knowledge of the displacement vector,
D, over the surface
S bounding the volume V:
Q
f
=
__
S
dS(
D n) . (2.18)
2.3.2 Boundary Condition on
D.
Gauss theorem in the form of eqn.(2.18) can be used to show that the
normal component of the displacement vector,
D, must be continuous at
the boundary between two dierent materials if that boundary contains no
free surface charges. Refer to g.(2.4). Let SS be the surface that sepa
rates region (1) from region (2). Apply eqn.(2.18) to a pillbox that straddles
the bounding surface SS. The surface area of the pillbox is S and it is dL
thick: the thickness dL will be taken to be small compared with the lateral
dimensions of the pillbox,
D
1
,
D
2
parallel with the surface SS, the tangential components, will be very
nearly constant over the dimensions of the pillbox and so as the outward
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 42
Figure 2.4: Application of Gauss Theorem to a pillbox straddling a surface
of discontinuity between two materials.
normal changes direction by 360 degrees around the pillbox perimeter the
positive and negative contributions to the surface integral will cancel. Thus
in the limit as dL 0 and A 0 the surface integral taken over the
pillbox surface will be given by
__
Pillbox
dS(
D n) = (
D
2
n
2
)A + (
D
1
n
1
)A .
But
D
2
n
2
= +D
2n
and
D
1
n
1
= D
n1
where D
2n
, D
1n
are the components
of
D
2
,
D
1
normal to the bounding surface SS. It follows from Gauss theorem,
eqn.(2.18), that if there are no free charge densities in the two materials then
the total charge contained in the pillbox is zero and therefore D
2n
D
1n
= 0,
so that the normal component of D must be continuous across the bounding
surface SS. This result remains valid even if the volume density of free charges
is not zero because the total charge contained in the pillbox of g.(2.4) goes
to zero as the pillbox volume goes to zero with the pillbox thickness, dL. The
normal component of
D can only be discontinuous if the surface SS carries
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 43
a surface charge density. If the bounding surface SS carries a surface charge
density of
f
Coulombs/m
2
the total charge contained within the pillbox of
g.(2.4) is
f
A Coulombs, and eqn.(2.18) gives
D
2n
A D
1n
A =
f
A
since the charge contained within the pillbox,
f
A, is independent of dL,
and does not vanish as dL 0. It follows that any discontinuity in the nor
mal component of the displacement vector D is an indication and a measure
of the presence of a surface charge density:
f
= D
2n
D
1n
. (2.19)
2.3.3 Discontinuity in the Normal Component of the
Polarization Vector.
Gauss theorem can be used to show that a discontinuity in the normal com
ponent of the electrical polarization vector,
P, produces a surface density of
bound charges,
b
. Consider a surface that separates regions having dier
ent material properties such as that shown in g.(2.4), and in particular two
regions having dierent polarization densities
P
1
and
P
2
. Let there be no
free charge distributions, and let there be no free charges on the surface of
discontinuity, SS. For this situation eqn.(2.4) becomes
div(
E) =
1
0
div(
P) =
b
0
.
Apply Gauss theorem to this equation for a pillbox straddling the boundary
SS such as that illustrated in g.(2.4). In the limit as dL 0 and A 0
the surface integral over the pillbox of the electric eld gives
__
Pillbox
dS(
E n) = (
E
2
n
2
)A + (
E
1
n
1
)A .
But
E
2
n
2
= E
2n
, and
E
1
n
1
= E
1n
where E
2n
and E
1n
are the components
of the electric eld normal to the bounding surface SS. Thus
___
Pillbox
dV div(
E) =
1
0
___
Pillbox
dV
b
=
Q
b
0
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 44
and Gauss Theorem gives
__
Pillbox
dS(
E n) = (E
2n
E
1n
)A =
Q
b
0
.
Q
b
is the total bound charge contained in the pillbox. As the thickness of
the pillbox shrinks to zero the only bound charges left in the pillbox will be
due to surface bound charges,
b
, and therefore Q
b
=
b
A. It follows that
b
=
0
(E
2n
E
1n
) . (2.20)
This equation (2.20) is the analog of eqn.(2.19) and the derivations of
these two equations are similar. In the present case it has been assumed that
there are no free surface charges on the interface surface SS so that from
eqn.(2.19) one has (D
2n
D
1n
) = 0 and therefore from the denition of
D
D
2n
D
1n
= (
0
E
2n
+P
2n
) (
0
E
1n
+P
1n
) = 0 .
Using eqn.(2.20) gives
b
= (P
2n
P
1n
) . (2.21)
Any discontinuity in the normal component of the Polarization
vector generates a surface density of bound charges. These bound
charges generate electric elds and must be explicitly taken into account
when the electric eld is calculated from its sources using eqn.(2.5), (the
direct application of Coulombs law), or when eqn.(2.13) is used to calculate
the potential function for a distribution of free and bound charges.
2.4 The Tangential Components of
E.
It follows from the rst Maxwell equation, eqn.(2.1) curl(
E) = 0, that the
tangential components of the electric eld vector must be continu
ous across any surface. Consider a loop dL long and dw wide that spans
a surface SS: the loop has one side in region (1) and the other side in region
(2) as shown in g.(2.5); the sides dw are chosen to be perpendicular to the
surface SS. E
t1
and E
t2
are the electric eld components parallel with the
surface SS  the tangential electric eld components. From Stokes theorem,
Section (1.3.4), one has
__
Loop
dS( n curl(
E)) =
_
Loop
E
dL .
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 45
Figure 2.5: A rectangular loop having sides dL long and dw wide used for
the application of Stokes Theorem.
But curl(
E
dL = 0 .
In calculating the line integral one can take the limit as dw becomes very
small so that contributions from the electric eld components parallel with
dw and therefore normal to the surface can be made negligibly small. In this
limit the line integral becomes
_
Loop
E
dL = E
t1
dL E
t2
dL .
The negative sign arises because in Region(2) the loop is traversed in the
direction opposite to the direction of E
t2
. It follows from the fact that the
line integral must vanish that
E
t2
= E
t1
, (2.22)
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 46
or in other words the tangential components of
E must be continuous
across the surface SS. Since SS is an arbitrary surface it follows that the
tangential components of the electric eld must be continuous across any
surface.
2.5 A Conducting Body.
The electrostatic eld must be zero inside a conducting body. A nonzero
eld would act on mobile charges in the body and so produce currents that
would cause the charge distribution to change with time. Any time variation
of the eld sources must generate timevarying elds in contradiction with
the assumption of the electrostatic limit in which nothing changes with time.
Since the electrostatic eld is zero everywhere inside a conducting body, it
follows from eqn.(2.22) that the electric eld just outside a conducting body
can have no components parallel with the surface. The electric eld just
outside a conducting body must be normal to the surface of that body. Fi
nally, it follows from an application of Gauss Theorem to a pillbox spanning
the surface of the conducting body that the electric eld just outside that
conducting body is given by
E
n
= 
E =
t
0
=
1
0
(
f
+
b
) , (2.23)
where
f
is a free surface charge density on the conducting body, and
b
=
P
n
is a bound surface charge density due to a discontinuity in the normal
component of
P if the conductor is in contact with a dielectric material.
2.6 Continuity of the Potential Function.
The potential function must be continuous at any point in space (with the
exception noted below) since a discontinuous jump in its value would corre
spond to an unphysical innite electric eld strength:
E
r
=
dV
dr
,
where Er is the component of the electric eld along the direction specied
by dr. The exception referred to above occurs at a layer of dipoles; see the
example problem discussed below. Let a surface carry a density of dipoles
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 47
P
d
per unit area (dimensions of Coulombs/m) oriented such that the dipole
density is perpendicular to the plane. Such an electrical dipole layer, or elec
trical double layer, generates no external electric eld, but it does generate
a jump in potential given by
V = 
P
d
/
0
. (2.24)
Electrical double layers are common in nature. The potential dier
ence that is observed to exist between the uid inside a living cell and the
surrounding uid is maintained by an electrical double layer on the cell mem
brane. A double layer is also formed whenever a metal electrode is placed
in an electrolytic solution. The potential dierence across the double layer
is called the electrode potential. The potential dierence that is observed at
the electrodes of a battery is the dierence between the electrode potentials
of two dissimilar conductors immersed in an electrolyte.
2.7 Example Problems.
2.7.1 Plane Symmetry.
(1) A Uniformly Charged Plane.
Consider a plane which is innite in extent and uniformly charged with a
density of Coulombs/m
2
; the normal to the plane lies in the zdirection,
g.(2.6). The charge plane is located at z=0. It is clear from symmetry that
the electric eld can have only a component normal to the plane since for
every charge element at x,y there is an exactly similar charge element at x,y
such that the transverse eld components at the point of observation cancel.
All of the charges on a ring of radius r produce the same zcomponent of
electric eld at the point of observation, P; they may therefore be lumped
together to obtain
dE
p

z
=
dq
4
0
cos()
R
2
=
2rdr
4
0
z
R
3
,
therefore
E
z
=
_
2
0
_
z
_
0
rdr
(z
2
+r
2
)
3/2
.
Upon carrying out the integration one obtains an electric eld that is inde
pendent of z and, for positive z, has the value /2
0
:
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 48
Figure 2.6: Calculation of the electric eld generated by a uniformly charged
plane.
E
z
=
2
0
. (2.25)
Note that for points to the left of the charge plane the electric eld points
along z: ie. E
z
= /2
0
. There is a discontinuity of magnitude /
0
in
the zcomponent of the electric eld at the charge plane.
(2) The Potential Function for a Uniformly Charged Plane.
It is interesting to calculate the potential function from a direct application of
eqn.(2.11) for the potential generated by a charge distribution. Referring to
g.(2.6) one can calculate the contribution to the potential at the observation
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 49
point P:
dV
p
=
dq
4
0
1
R
=
2rdr
4
0
1
r
2
+z
2
and therefore for z>0
V
p
=
2
0
_
0
rdr
r
2
+z
2
=
2
0
_
z
.
This is an example of an integration that does not converge. In order to
obtain a proper integral one can use a trick. Suppose that the charged plane
was not innite in extent, but that it was in the form of a large, but nite,
disc having a radius D. There would then be no problem; one would have
V
p
=
D
2
0
z
2
0
= constant
z
2
0
.
One is always free to subtract a constant from the potential without changing
the value of the corresponding electric eld distribution. One can simply
subtract the constant from the above equation to obtain
V
p
=
z
2
0
, for z > 0 .
Notice that V
p
does not change sign for z less than zero because the inte
gration involves the square root of z
2
. Thus the complete expression for the
potential function, valid for all values of z, is given by
V
p
=
2
0
z , (2.26)
see g.(2.7). In eqn.(2.26) the zero for the potential function has been chosen
so that the potential is zero on the plane. The potential function is continuous
as the eld point P moves through the plane from left to right in g.(2.7):
the electric eld component normal to the plane undergoes a discontinuity.
(3) The Field of a Uniformly Charged Plane Using Gauss Theorem.
We could have deduced that
E is independent of position, except at the charge
plane, directly from the fourth Maxwell equation div(
E) = (1/
0
)
_
f
div(
P)
_
.
In this application there is no electric dipole density since
P = 0 everywhere.
Consequently, also div(
E) =
E
z
z
= 0
except at z=0 since the charge density is zero everywhere except at z=0.
Thus E
z
= constant everywhere except at z=0. Moreover, it is obvious from
Coulombs law and symmetry that the magnitude of the electric eld for
z < 0 must have the same value as the magnitude of the electric eld for
z > 0, although the direction of the eld switches 180 degrees upon passage
through the charge plane. For this very symmetric case one can obtain the
magnitude of the electric eld directly from Gauss Theorem.
___
V
dV div(
E) =
__
S
dS
_
E n
_
=
Q
0
,
where V is the volume bounded by the closed surface S and Q is the total
charge contained in the volume. Apply this theorem to a parallelepiped
having its edges oriented along the coordinate axes as shown in g.(2.8).
The box shown in the gure contains an amount of charge A
z
Coulombs
since the area of the side of the box whose normal lies along z is just A
z
.
Now calculate the surface integral of the electric eld over the surface of the
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 52
parallelepiped. This integral is easy to carry out because the electric eld is
constant in magnitude and in direction. Over four sides of the box shown
in g.(2.8) the direction of the electric eld is parallel with the surface, thus
perpendicular to the surface normals, and the scalar product of the electric
eld and the normal to the surface, n, vanishes so that these sides contribute
nothing to the surface integral. Over the two ends of the box the electric
eld is parallel with the surface normal so that the scalar product
E n just
becomes an ordinary product, and the contribution to the surface integral
from each end is E
0
A
z
: notice that at each end the electric eld is parallel
with the direction of the outward normal because the eld reverses direction
from one side of the charge sheet to the other. The surface integral in Gauss
theorem is given by
__
S
dS(
E n) = 2E
0
A
z
.
But the total charge contained in the box is A
z
, so that the electric eld
must have the magnitude E
0
= /(2
0
) in agreement with eqn.(2.25).
(4) An Electric Double Layer.
Consider two oppositely charged uniform charge sheets separated by a dis
tance of 2d meters, as illustrated in g.(2.9). The electric eld generated
by each charge sheet is uniform, independent of z, and directed normal to
the planes of charge. In the regions outside the charged planes,ie. z > d or
z < d, the electric eld is zero because the elds generated by the oppositely
charged planes have opposite directions and therefore cancel. Between the
two charged planes the elds due to the two planes have the same orientation
and therefore add to produce the total eld E
z
= /
0
. A plot of E
z
vs
z exhibits discontinuities at z= d, g.(2.10). The potential function outside
the double layer is constant corresponding to zero electric eld. However,
the potential on the right hand side of the double layer is dierent from the
potential on the left hand side. The step in the potential is related to the
strength of the double layer:
V =
2d
0
= P
d
/
0
,
where P
d
is the dipole moment per unit area in Coulombs/meter.
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 53
Figure 2.9: An electric double layer consists of two innite plane sheets of
charge densities + and Coulombs/m
2
separated by a small distance.
The electric eld is zero everywhere outside the double layer, but is equal to
E
z
 = /
0
between the two charged sheets.
(5) A Uniformly Polarized Slab.
Consider a slab that is uniformly polarized along the zaxis as shown in
g.(2.11). The strength of the polarization density is P
0
, and there are no
free charges anywhere. One can dene a bound charge density from the
relation
b
= div(
P) = 0 and therefore
b
= 0. One might be misled by the fact
that the bound charge density vanishes both inside and outside the slab into
thinking that the bound charge density is zero everywhere. However, the
bound charge density does not vanish on the slab surfaces. The
derivative P
z
/z is singular at z=0 and at z=d ie. on the faces of the slab.
This singularity is integrable: if one integrates the derivative from z = to
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 54
Figure 2.10: The electric eld distribution and the corresponding potential
function generated by an electrical double layer. The electric eld intensity
inside the double layer is E
0
= /
0
. The jump in the potential across the
double layer is V = 2d/
0
.
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 55
Figure 2.11: A uniformly polarized slab. The polarization density,
P
0
, is di
rected along the normal to the slab. The discontinuities in the normal com
ponent of the polarization produce eective surface bound charge densities
given by
b
= div(
P).
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 56
z = +, for example, the result is
_
+
_
P
z
z
_
dz = P
z
(+) P
z
() = P
0
,
because P
z
() = 0 and P
z
(+) = P
0
. Notice that the value of the integral is
independent of the small interval , and, in particular, it remains nite even in
the limit as 0. The integrand has the character of a Dirac function:
P
z
/z = P
0
(z), where the function (z) is a strongly peaked function
having zero width but innite amplitude in such a way that its integral is
just equal to unity. But this means that the charge density on the surface at
z=0,
b
= P
z
/z, is a very sharply peaked integrable function of z: it is in
fact a surface charge density of strength P
0
Coulombs/meter
2
. Similarly,
there will be a surface charge density of strength +P
0
Coulombs/meter
2
on
the surface at z=d. The electric eld distribution produced by a uniformly
polarized slab in which the polarization density lies parallel with the slab
normal is exactly the same as that which would be produced by two uniformly
charged planes carrying charge densities of = P
0
, see g.(2.9). Outside
the uniformly polarized slab the electric eld is zero. Inside the slab there
is a uniform electric eld, E
z
= P
0
/
0
, whose direction is opposite to the
direction of the polarization density; it is called a depolarizing eld because
it tends to act so as to reduce the polarization density. The potential outside
the slab will be constant, both on the left and on the right, but the potential
on the right will be larger than that on the left by the amount V = P
0
d/
0
Volts. It is interesting to examine the auxiliary eld
D =
0
E +
P. Outside
the slab both
E and
P are zero so that
D must also be zero. Inside the slab
P) = P
x
/x = 0 everywhere. There
is no bound charge density anywhere, and there is no free charge density, by
supposition, so that there are no sources for the electric eld. A uniformly
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 57
Figure 2.12: An innite slab that is uniformly polarized in plane, P
x
= P
0
.
polarized slab in which the polarization lies in the slab plane generates no
macroscopic electric eld.
It is a general rule that a spatial variation of the polarization density,
P,
produces an eective volume charge density
b
= div(
b
= (P
2n
P
1n
) .
These bound volume and surface charge densities must be used, along with
the free charge distributions, to calculate the electric eld and potential dis
tributions.
2.7.2 A Spherically Symmetric Charge Distribution.
Consider a charge distribution that is spherically symmetric but one in which
the charge distribution (r) may have an arbitrary dependence upon the
coordinate r, see g.(2.13). In this case the electric eld can have only a
radial component by symmetry. The magnitude of this radial component, E
r
,
cannot depend on position on the surface of a spherical surface centered on
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 58
Figure 2.13: The electric eld intensity generated by a spherically symmetric
charge distribution. The electric eld has only a radial component because
the transverse components generated by two equivalent charges, dq
1
and dq
2
,
cancel by symmetry.
the center of symmetry of the charges because any rotation of the distribution
around the center of symmetry leaves the charge distribution unaltered. It
follows that the surface integral of the electric eld over the surface of a
sphere of radius R is just 4R
2
E
r
so that from Gauss theorem
E
r
=
1
4
0
_
1
R
2
_ _
R
0
dr(r)4r
2
.
Thus for the electric eld outside the charge distribution one has
4R
2
E
r
=
1
0
_
Sphere
(r)dV ol =
Q
0
. (2.27)
Here Q is the total charge contained in the distribution. The electric eld
outside a spherically symmetric charge distribution looks like the
eld of a point charge!
The potential function generated by any symmetric charge distribution
must be independent of the spherical polar coordinates , because E
and
E
are both zero. The potential function can be calculated from V/r =
E
r
. Note that the potential must be a continuous function of r even if
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 59
Figure 2.14: The electric eld generated by a uniformly charged line lying
along the zaxis. The line charge density is
L
Coulombs/meter. The electric
eld is radial and has the value E
r
= (
L
/2
0
) (1/r) Volts/m.
the charge density distribution, (r), contains discontinuities. The potential
function is continuous everywhere except on a surface containing an electrical
double layer.
2.7.3 Cylindrical Symmetry.
(1) A uniformly Charged Line.
Let charges be distributed uniformly along the zaxis with a charge density of
L
Coulombs/meter as shown in g.(2.14). It is easy to see, using Coulombs
law, that the electric eld generated by this distribution can have only a
radial component; the transverse components generated by equivalent charge
elements symmetrically disposed around the origin at +z and at z cancel each
other out. Furthermore, the radial electric eld strength,E
r
, cannot depend
upon the angle because the line charge exhibits rotational symmetry; ie. the
charge distribution remains unaltered by a rotation through any angle around
the zaxis. E
r
also cannot depend upon position along z since the line is taken
to be innitely long. Apply Gauss theorem to a cylindrical surface centered
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 60
on the line charge, and 1 meter long and having a radius of r meters. The
charge contained within this cylinder is
L
Coulombs. The surface integral
of the electric eld is easy to carry out because the electric eld is parallel
with the surface normal at every point on the cylinder surface; on the end
surfaces the electric eld contributes nothing to the surface integral because
it lies in the surface, i.e.
E u
n
=0, where u
n
is the unit normal to the surface.
It follows from Gauss Theorem that
2r E
r
=
L
0
,
and therefore
E
r
=
L
2
0
_
1
r
_
V olts/m .
Since the electric eld has only a radial component it follows that the
corresponding potential function, V, cannot depend upon the coordinates
z,. But E
r
= V/r, so that one can use
V(r) =
_
L
2
0
_
ln(r)
as the potential function for a uniformly charged line. The logarithmic varia
tion of V(r) with r can also be deduced from a direct application of Poissons
equation, eqn.(2.12). In this application the free charge density
f
= 0 ev
erywhere except at the origin, r=0. There is assumed to be no electric dipole
distribution anywhere so that
P = 0 and
b
= div(
P) = 0 everywhere.
Thus
2
V = 0. But in cylindrical polar coordinates, and in the absence of
any variation of V with angle or with displacement along z
2
V =
r
_
r
V
r
_
= 0 .
It follows from this that rV/r = constant = a, and therefore V = a ln(r)+
constant in agreement with the above expression for V(r): remember that one
can add or subtract a constant from the potential function without changing
the electric eld calculated from it.
(2) A Line of Dipoles.
Consider a line of dipoles uniformly distributed along the zaxis with a density
of P
L
Coulombs; the dipoles are supposed to be oriented along the xdirection
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 61
Figure 2.15: An innite line of uniformly distributed point dipoles can be
modelled by a uniformly charged positive line separated by a small distance
d from a uniformly charged negative line. Let the charge density on the
positive line be
L
, and let the charge density on the negative line be
L
,
then the dipole density, a vector, is given by 
P
L
 =
L
d Coulombs, and
P
L
is directed from the negative line to the positive line.
as shown in g.(2.15). The line of dipoles can be modelled by two line charges
separated by a very small distance d, as shown in g.(2.15). The resulting
potential function at P, the point of observation, written in cylindrical polar
coordinates can be calculated as follows using the potential function for a
uniformly charged line:
V
P
=
L
2
0
ln(r
+
) +
L
2
0
ln(r
) =
L
2
0
ln(r
/r
+
) .
But r
= r
+
+d cos() so that
V
P
=
L
2
0
ln
_
1 +
d cos()
r
+
_
and
lim
d0
V
P
=
L
d
2
0
cos()
r
=
1
2
0
P
L
r
r
2
,
where P
L
is the line density of dipoles. The electric eld components are
E
r
=
V
P
r
=
P
L
2
0
cos()
r
2
,
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 62
E
=
1
r
V
P
=
P
L
2
0
sin()
r
2
,
E
z
= 0 .
A crosssection through the electric eld distribution in a plane normal
to the line of dipoles looks similar to the eld distribution around a point
dipole. The electric eld at = 0 is directed along the +x direction and so
is the eld at = : both elds have the strength P
L
/(2
0
r
2
). The electric
elds at = /2, 3/2 are directed along the x direction, and have the
strength E
= P
L
/(2
0
r
2
).
2.7.4 A Uniformly Polarized Ellipsoidal Body.
Figure 2.16: A uniformly polarized body having an irregular shape. The
resulting surface bound charge distribution produces an electric eld distri
bution that is nonuniform both inside and outside the body.
Consider a uniformly polarized body of arbitrary shape that is immersed
in vacuum. The bound volume charge density associated with a uniform po
larization density is zero since div(
0
, (2.29)
E
y
= N
y
P
y
0
,
E
z
= N
z
P
z
0
.
The depolarization coecients N
x
, N
y
, and N
z
are pure numbers that
depend upon the parameters of the ellipsoid (a,b,c of eqn.(2.28)). They can
be calculated using elliptic integrals. The depolarization coecients obey a
sum rule:
N
x
+ N
y
+ N
z
= 1 . (2.30)
This sum rule makes it very easy to deduce values for the depolarization
coecients for very symmetrical bodies. Consider the following examples:
(a) Sphere. By symmetry N
x
= N
y
= N
z
. Therefore from the sum rule each
must be equal to 1/3.
(b) Cylinder. This is the limiting case in which one dimension of the ellip
soid, the z dimension say, becomes very long. The two transverse depolarizing
factors must be equal by symmetry. On the other hand, if the cylinder is
polarized along its length any surface bound charge density can only be as
sociated with the ends; but the ends are innitely far away and consequently
any charges on them produce an innitely small electric eld. This means
that a cylinder that is uniformly polarized along its length will produce no
electric eld. It can be concluded that for such a cylinder N
z
= 0. It follows
from the sum rule that if N
x
= N
y
then each must be equal to 1/2.
(c) A Thin Flat Disc. Think of an ellipsoid of revolution which is thin along
the zdirection but which has a very large radius R in the xy plane. By sym
metry N
x
= N
y
. If the edges of the disc are very far from its center, ie.
R , then the electric eld near the center of the disc due to surface
charges on the disc edges must become vanishingly small ( remember that
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 65
Figure 2.18: Oblate ellipsoid of revolution.
Figure 2.19: Cigar shaped ellipsoid of revolution.
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 66
the eld due to an element of charge decreases like 1/R
2
). It follows that
N
x
= N
y
0 in the limit as R . From the sum rule eqn.(2.30) one
can conclude that N
z
1. The eld inside an innite disc that is polarized
parallel with its axis of symmetry has the value E
z
= P
z
/
0
in agreement
with the result previously deduced for a transversely polarized slab, section
(5) above, and g.(2.11).
Two commonly encountered special cases of ellipsoids of revolution are
shown in gs.(2.18 and 2.19). In each case one need only specify the depo
larizing coecient for the axis of revolution, the zaxis. The other two depo
larizing factors are equal and can be calculated from the sum rule eqn.(2.30).
Case(a) is a pancake shaped ellipsoid, g.(2.18). For this case
N
z
=
R
2
d
(R
2
d
2
)
3/2
_
R
2
d
2
d
arctan
_
R
2
d
2
d
__
, where (d/R) < 1 .
(2.31)
In the limit d/R 0 the depolarizing factor is given approximately by
N
z
= 1
2
_
d
R
_
. (2.32)
Case(b) is a cigar shaped ellipsoid, g.(2.19). For this case
N
z
=
(1
2
)
3
_
1
2
ln
_
1 +
1
_
_
, where =
_
1 (R/d)
2
. (2.33)
In the limit as the cigar becomes very long, (d/R) the demagnetizing
coecient can be expressed as
N
z
=
_
R
d
_
2
_
ln
_
2d
R
_
1
_
. (2.34)
For a general ellipsoid it can be shown that
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 67
N
x
=
_
abc
2
__
0
ds
(s +a
2
)R
s
, (2.35)
N
y
=
_
abc
2
__
0
ds
(s +b
2
)R
s
,
N
z
=
_
abc
2
__
0
ds
(s +c
2
)R
s
,
where R
s
= ([s +a
2
][s +b
2
][s +c
2
])
1/2
.
(See J.A. Stratton, Electromagnetic Theory, McGrawHill, N.Y., 1941.
Section 3.27.)
2.8 Appendix 2A.
It was pointed out in sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 above that the potential func
tion, V(
R) =
1
4
0
___
Space
dV
vol
(div(
P))

R r
. (2.36)
This equation for the potential function is calculated from the distribution of
bound charges,
b
= div(
R) =
1
4
0
___
Space
dV
vol
P (
R r)

R r
3
. (2.37)
These two formulae, eqns.(2.36 and 2.37), give the same potential function
apart from a possible constant that has no eect on the resulting electric
eld. This statement can be proved by applying Gauss Theorem to the
function
div
_
P

R r
_
= div
_
P
_
[X x]
2
+ [Y y]
2
+ [Z z]
2
_
.
CHAPTER 2. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (I) 68
The divergence is calculated with respect to the coordinates of the source
point, (x,y,z):
div
_
P

R r
_
=
x
_
P
x

R r
_
+
y
_
P
y

R r
_
+
z
_
P
z

R r
_
.
By direct dierentiation one can readily show that
div
_
P

R r
_
=
div(
P)

R r
+
P (
R r)

R r
3
.
Remember that the dierentiations are with respect to the coordinates of
r, (x,y,z), and not with respect to the observer coordinates
R, (X,Y,Z).
Integrate the above equation over a volume, V
vol
, bounded by a surface S
and apply Gauss Theorem, section 1.3.3, to the term on the left. The result
is
__
S
dS (
P n)

R r
=
___
V
vol
dV
vol
div(
P)

R r
+
___
V
vol
dV
vol
P (
R r)

R r
3
.
Now let the volume V
vol
become very large so that the surface S recedes to
innity. If the polarization distribution is limited to a nite region of space,
as we shall assume, the surface integral must vanish because the polarization
density on the surface, S, is zero. We are left with the identity
___
V
vol
dV
vol
div(
P)

R r
=
___
V
vol
dV
vol
P (
R r)

R r
3
. (2.38)
Upon multiplying both sides of eqn.(2.38) by 1/(4
0
) one obtains the inte
gral of eqn.(2.36) on the left and the integral of eqn.(2.37) on the right. It
follows that the same value for the potential will be obtained, aside from a
possible unimportant constant, whether one uses the formulation based upon
the potential for a point charge or the formulation based upon the potential
function for a point dipole.
Chapter 3
Electrostatic Field (II)
Electrostatic Boundary Value Problems for an Isotropic, Linear,
Dielectric Material.
3.1 Introduction.
Chapter(2) demonstrated that the electrostatic eld could be calculated ev
erywhere in space from a knowledge of the spatial distribution of free charges
and a knowledge of the spatial distribution of the electric dipole moment den
sity. However, in most cases of interest one does not initially know the free
charge and dipole moment distributions. In a typical problem one is given
two or more metal electrodes embedded in a material medium, in which the
electrode potentials are specied. In this kind of problem the free charge
and dipole moment distributions must be determined as part of the problem
solution. In order to solve such problems it is necessary to know the relation
between the electric eld in a material and the dipole density that is induced
in that material by the electric eld. In general such problems are extremely
dicult unless the dipole density,
P(r), at a point r in the material is linearly
related to the electric eld at that same point,
E(r). In this chapter we shall
assume that we have to do with linear, isotropic, media such that
P(r) =
0
E(r) , (3.1)
where is a pure number called the static dielectric susceptibility. is sup
posed to be independent of position within a given material; it will exhibit
discontinuous jumps at the boundary between two dierent materials. For
69
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 70
a dielectric material characterized by Maxwells equations for the electro
static eld become (no variation with time)
curl(
E) = 0 , (3.2)
div(
E) =
1
0
_
f
div(
P)
_
=
1
0
_
f
0
div(
E)
_
.
This last equation can be written
0
(1 +) div(
E) =
f
. But
0
(1 +) is
independent of position within a given dielectric material so that
div
_
(1 +)
0
E
_
=
f
= div(
D) , (3.3)
since
D =
0
E +
P = (1 +)
0
E . (3.4)
The number (1 + ) is called the relative dielectric constant,
r
. Thus
for a linear isotropic material
D =
r
E =
E , (3.5)
and
div(
D) =
f
or div(
E) =
f
/ . (3.6)
Equation(3.5) denes the dielectric constant which has the same units as
0
, namely Farads/meter or Coulombs/Volt meter.
As in Chapter(2) one can introduce a potential function, V(r), such that
2
V (r) =
1
f
(r) . (3.8)
The dierential equation, eqn.(3.8), is called Poissons equation. It is similar
in form to eqn.(2.12) of Chapter(2) for
P = 0 except that
0
is replaced by
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 71
. It follows by analogy with eqn.(2.13) of Chapter(2) that the particular
solution of eqn.(3.8) is
V (r) =
1
4
___
Space
dV
vol
f
(r)

R r
. (3.9)
Unfortunately, eqn.(3.9) is seldom helpful because one does not usually know
a priori the free charge distribution,
f
(r). The usual problem involves a
number of conducting electrodes embedded in a dielectric medium: either
the potential or the total charge on each electrode is specied as a boundary
condition. Generally the dielectric medium is taken to be either charge free,
f
= 0, or else slightly conducting where the current density at any point in
the medium is proportional to the electric eld strength at that point
J
f
=
E . (3.10)
For the chargefree case Poissons equation, eqn.(3.8), becomes
2
V = 0 . (3.11)
This is called LaPlaces equation. For a conducting medium the charge den
sity will not generally be zero. However, any distribution of charges must
be time independent because, by hypothesis, we are dealing with static eld
distributions which are independent of the time. It is a consequence of charge
conservation that the current density,
J
f
, and the charge density,
f
, must
satisfy the equation
div(
J
f
(r)) +
f
(r)
t
= 0 , (3.12)
so that if the charge distribution does not depend upon time the current
density must be divergence free;
div(
J
f
) = 0 . (3.13)
But if the current density is proportional to the electric eld, eqn.(3.10), it
follows that a divergence free current density must be paired with a diver
gence free electric eld,
div(
E) = 0 , (3.14)
and therefore that the potential function must satisfy LaPlaces equation,
eqn.(3.11),
2
V = 0. The timeindependent problem associated with con
ductors having a specied potential embedded in a linear, isotropic, charge
free dielectric medium has exactly the same potential distribution as the
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 72
Figure 3.1: A charged conductor. The free charge on the conductor is given
by Q =
__
S
D
dS.
problem of the same conductors embedded in an isotropic, conducting, lin
ear dielectric medium. In either case one requires a potential distribution
that satises LaPlaces equation, eqn. (3.11), and for which the potential on
each conducting electrode either reduces to a specied value, or else the total
charge on each conductor calculated from the potential distribution gives a
specied value. A conductor must have the same potential throughout by
denition because the electric eld within a conductor is zero; a zero electric
eld means that the potential function has no dependence upon position.
The electric eld within a conductor must be zero because otherwise mobile
charges within the conductor would ow to its surface and build up time de
pendent electric elds in contradiction with the original assumption that the
electric elds were time independent. It is a general rule that the tangential
components of the electrostatic eld must be continuous across any surface
(see sections 2.4 and 2.5). Therefore, if
E = 0 inside the conducting body it
follows that the tangential components of the electrostatic eld must be zero
just outside the conductor surface. In other words, the electrostatic eld
must be normal to the surface of a conductor.
The total charge on a conductor, which must be located entirely on the
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 73
surface of the conductor, can be calculated by means of an application of
Gauss theorem to eqn.(3.6): see g.(3.1).
Q =
__
Surface
dS
D =
__
Surface
dS
E ,
where the integral is evaluated on a surface that lies just outside the actual
conductor surface. The electric eld just outside the conductor is normal
to the surface and has the magnitude E
n
= V/n, where V/n is the
gradient of the potential at the surface of the conductor. The total charge
contained on the conductor is therefore related to the normal gradient of the
potential function at the conductor
Q =
__
Surface
dS
_
V
n
_
. (3.15)
It can be proved mathematically, and it makes sense physically, that
there is only one solution of LaPlaces equation,
2
V = 0, which satises the
given boundary conditions. In other words, a solution of LaPlaces equation
that satises the boundary conditions is unique; it is the solution. The
boundary conditions may be of three dierent types: (1) the potential on each
conductor is specied; (2) the total charge on each conductor is specied; (3)
the potential on some of the conductors is specied and the total charge on
the remaining conductors is specied. In addition, the elds very far from
any charges must fall to zero at least as fast as 1/R
2
. This requirement
follows from the fact that any collection of charges when viewed from very
far away must look very nearly like a point charge, and hence the potential
function must fall o like 1/R where R is the mean distance to the group of
charges.
In general it is very dicult to nd a solution of LaPlaces equation that
satises the boundary conditions imposed by a particular problem. Usually
it is necessary to resort to numerical or approximate techniques in order
to nd a suitable solution. In the following sections a number of standard
problems are posed and their solutions are discussed. The solutions of these
standard problems enable one to build up, by analogy, a picture of how the
electrostatic eld should behave given a problem whose parameters lie outside
those corresponding to one of the categories discussed below.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 74
3.2 Soluble Problems.
3.2.1 (1) Orthogonal Systems.
The only problems that can be solved analytically are those for which the con
ducting electrodes can be described by u1=const., or u2=const., or u3=const.
where u1, u2, u3 form a system of orthogonal coordinates. Stratton discusses
eight such orthogonal systems ( Electromagnetic Theory by Julius Adams
Stratton, McGrawHill, New York, 1941). We shall be interested only in the
three most commonly used systems (1) cartesian coordinates, (2) cylindrical
polar coordinates, and (3) spherical polar coordinates.
(a) Cartesian Coordinates.
In the Cartesian coordinate system LaPlaces equation becomes
2
V
x
2
+
2
V
y
2
+
2
V
z
2
= 0 .
Let the surfaces of two semiinnite electrodes lie at z=0 and at z=D, g.(3.2).
In this case the potential function must be independent of x and y by sym
metry: the potential on any plane z=constant must be featureless because
there are no edges with which to locate oneself in the plane. In other words,
any shift of the electrodes in the xy plane does not change the geometry of
the problem. Thus LaPlaces equation is reduced to
2
V
z
2
= 0 .
This simple equation has the general solution
V(z) = A +Bz, (3.16)
where A,B are constants that must be determined from the boundary condi
tions. For z=0 the potential is required to be V
1
and therefore A = V
1
. For
z=D the potential must equal V
2
and therefore B = (V
2
V
1
)/D. Thus the
required potential function for this problem is given by
V(z) = V
1
+
(V
2
V
1
)z
D
,
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 75
Figure 3.2: Two plane parallel, semiinnite metal electrodes separated by a
distance D. The electrode potentials are V
1
and V
2
. The space between the
electrodes is lled with a material having a dielectric constant .
and this solution is unique. It corresponds to an electric eld whose compo
nents are:
E
x
= 0 ,
E
y
= 0 ,
and E
z
=
(V
1
V
2
)
D
V olts/m .
The electric eld is forced to be uniform simply because the potential function
has no spatial variation along x or y.
The surface charge density on each electrode must also be independent of
x and y, and the charge density on the two electrodes are equal in magnitude
but opposite in sign. They may be calculated by means of Gauss theorem.
Consider a small pillbox that spans an electrode surface such as that shown
in g.(3.2). According to Gauss Theorem the surface integral of the normal
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 76
component of D over the pillbox is equal to the total free charge contained
within the pillbox:
Q =
s
dS =
__
Pillbox
dS
D .
But
D =
s
=
(V
1
V
2
)
D
.
This expression can be used to estimate the relation between total charge
and voltage dierence on a parallel plate capacitor. Consider two parallel
plate electrodes each having an area of A meters
2
, and let the charge on one
plate be Q Coulombs and on the other plate be Q Coulombs. If edge eects
are neglected, and if it is assumed that the charge density is uniform, one
can write
s
= Q/A. It follows that
Q =
_
A
D
_
(V
1
V
2
) ,
or writing (V
1
V
2
) = V,
C =
Q
V
=
_
A
D
_
Farads.
C is the capacitance of the parallel plate system.
Variations of this problem involve two regions having dierent dielectric
constants, see g.(3.3).
The potential function in each region must satisfy Laplaces equation
(3.11), and therefore in the innite plate approximation
2
V
z
2
= 0 ,
since the potential function can not depend upon the coordinates x and y.
It follows from E
z
= dV/dz that the electric eld in each region must be
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 77
Figure 3.3: The parallel plate capacitor problem with two dierent dielectric
materials. The electric eld in each region is independent of position.
independent of position. The magnitude of the electric eld in each region
depends upon whether or not the dielectric material is, or is not, conducting.
There are two main limiting cases: (1) the conductivity, in each region
is zero; and (2) each region is conducting with a current density given by
J =
E.
Case(1). If the conductivities are zero there can be no free charges any
where in the dielectric materials. As a consequence it follows from Maxwells
equation(2.17) that
D must be divergence free, ie div(
D) = 0. This in turn
means that the normal component of
D must be continuous across the inter
face between the two dielectrics, or D
1
= D
2
. This implies that
1
E
1
=
2
E
2
. (3.17)
But also
d
1
E
1
+d
2
E
2
= (V
1
V
2
) = V . (3.18)
These two equations, eqns.(3.17 and 3.18) can be solved to obtain the
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 78
electric eld strengths in each region of the dielectric insulators. The charge
density on each electrode has the magnitude
s
= D
1
= D
2
.
Case(2). If the dielectric materials are conducting the current density
in each region must be the same in the steady state in order to prevent a
time dependent build up of charge at the interface between the two dielectric
slabs. But J
1
=
1
E
1
and J
2
=
2
E
2
so that
1
E
1
=
2
E
2
. (3.19)
Equation(3.19) replaces eqn.(3.17) which is only valid providing that there
is no charge ow through the dielectric slabs. Eqns.(3.18 and 3.19) form a
system of two equations that may be solved for the two unknowns E
1
and
E
2
. Notice that for this case of conducting materials the displacement vector
will have a dierent value in each of the two regions:
D
1
=
1
E
1
=
1
_
1
_
E
2
,
and
D
2
=
2
E
2
.
Notice that the free surface charge density on each electrode will be dierent
in magnitude because
s
= D
1
for the positive electrode and
s
= D
2
for the
negative electrode. The surface free charge density at the interface between
the two dielectric slabs is given by
s
= (D
2
D
1
.
(b) A Leaky Capacitor.
The potential function for a leaky capacitor is the same as the potential
function for a nonleaky capacitor because in both cases the potential must
satisfy eqn.(3.11),
2
V = 0, and in both cases the potential must satisfy
the same boundary conditions. In the innite electrode approximation in
which edge eects are neglected the plane symmetry requires that the po
tential function have the form V = a + bz, eqn.(3.16), where a and b are
constants. This means that E
z
= (V/z) must be independent of posi
tion. If the potential dierence between the electrodes is V, see g.(3.4),
the electric eld strength is E = V/d, and the corresponding strength of
the displacement vector is D = E = V/d. But from Gauss Theorem
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 79
Figure 3.4: Charge decay through a leaky capacitor. =
r
0
is the dielectric
constant for the spacer material. is the conductivity of the spacer material.
applied to div(
D) =
f
it follows that the surface charge density on the pos
itive electrode is given by
f
= D = V/d = Q/A, where Q is the total
charge on the electrode and A is the electrode area. (Do not confuse the free
charge density,
f
, with the conductivity, ). The capacitance is dened by
C = Q/V so
C =
A
d
Farads ,
exactly the same formula as for a nonleaky capacitor! However, there is a
ow of charge between the two electrodes of a leaky capacitor. The current
density is given by
J = E =
V
d
=
Q
A
.
The total current is
I = JA =
Q
Amps .
Unless the current is maintained by some external source such as a battery
this current ow must deplete the electrodes of charge. For an isolated ca
pacitor the charge on the positive electrode must change with time according
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 80
to the equation of charge conservation:
dQ
dt
= I =
Q
.
The solution of this dierential equation is
Q(t) = Q
0
exp t/ . (3.20)
Thus the charge on a leaky capacitor dies away exponentially with a time
constant, , given by
=
= seconds , (3.21)
where is the resistivity of the material between the conducting electrodes
(not the charge density!), see g.(3.4). Whether or not a capacitor should
be treated as leaky depends entirely upon the time scale associated with the
problem. For most materials the relative dielectric constant,
r
, lies between 1
and 10, so that dierences in the intrinsic time constant, , from one material
to another are determined primarily by the resistivity. Resistivities for some
selected materials are listed in Table(3.1). The most striking feature of this
Table is the wide range of resistivities exhibited by these solid materials. It
is clear that the best candidates for an insulating dielectric material listed in
the Table are yellow sulphur and paran wax.
(c) Cylindrical Coordinates.
Consider a problem that exhibits cylindrical symmetry so that the poten
tial function does not depend upon the z coordinate. LaPlaces equation
becomes
1
r
r
_
r
V
r
_
+
1
r
2
2
V
2
= 0 . (3.22)
The general solution of this equation can be written
V(r, ) = a +b ln r +
n=1
_
a
n
r
n
+
b
n
r
n
_
cos n +
n=1
_
c
n
r
n
+
d
n
r
n
_
sin n ,
(3.23)
where a
n
, b
n
, c
n
, and d
n
are arbitrary constants. The series (3.23) satises the
equation
2
V = 0 term by term as can be veried by direct dierentiation.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 81
Material (Ohm m)
0
=
0
(seconds)
Copper 1.67 10
8
1.48 10
19
Intrinsic Ge 0.46 4.1 10
12
Boron 1.8 10
4
1.6 10
7
Yellow Sulpher 2 10
15
1.8 10
4
= 4.9 hours
Pyrex 7060 1.3 10
5
1.2 10
6
Pyrex 1710 2.5 10
7
2 10
4
Fused Silica 10
8
9 10
4
Beeswax 10
13
89
Paran 10
13
10
17
89 8.9 10
5
(up to 247
hours)
Wet Ground 10
2
10
3
10
9
10
8
Table 3.1: Resistivities and time constants for some selected materials at a
temperature of 20C. (Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 53
rd
Ed., CRC
Press (1972). The dielectric constant has been taken to be
0
for convenience.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 82
The constants in (3.23) have to be chosen so as to satisfy the boundary con
ditions for a particular problem. The term b ln r corresponds to the potential
generated by an innite line charge, see Section (2.7.3) of Chpt.(2). A line
charge of strength
L
Coulombs/meter in free space generates the potential
V(r) =
_
L
2
0
_
ln r . (3.24)
If the line charge is immersed in a medium of dielectric constant then
0
must be replaced by in eqn.(3.24).
The term V
1
= (b
1
/r) cos corresponds to a line of dipoles in which the
dipole moment is oriented along the xaxis, see Chpt.(2), Section (2.7.3). The
potential generated by a line of dipoles in free space and having a strength
of P
x
Coulombs is given by
V
x
(r, ) =
P
x
cos
2
0
r
.
If the dipole moments are oriented along the yaxis the potential is given by
V
y
(r, ) =
P
y
sin
2
0
r
:
this is one of the terms proportional to sin in eqn.(3.23).
The terms a
1
r cos() and c
1
r sin() in (3.23) correspond to uniform elds
along x and y. This can be seen by using the substitutions
x = r cos ,
and
y = r sin ,
to obtain V
x
= a
1
x, corresponding to an electric eld E
x
= a
1
, and V
y
=
c
1
y, corresponding to the electric eld E
y
= c
1
. Such terms are appropriate
for discussing the problem of a uniform dielectric cylinder immersed in a
uniform applied electric eld, g.(3.5). If the applied electric eld, E
0
, is
taken to lie along the xdirection it is clear from the symmetry of the problem
that the potential function must be symmetric in y: a reection of the system
through the xz plane gives one exactly the same problem. This implies that
the potential for and for must be the same. This being the case, the
amplitudes of all the sin n terms in the expansion (3.23) must be zero for
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 83
Figure 3.5: A uniform cylinder, innitely long in the zdirection, and im
mersed in a uniform electric eld E
x
= E
0
. The cylinder is characterized by
a dielectric constant
1
. It is situated in a medium whose dielectric constant
is
2
.
each n because sin n is an odd function of its argument. Furthermore, the
cylinder is uncharged and therefore the amplitude, b, of the ln(r) term in the
expansion must be zero because b is proportional to the strength of the line
charge,
L
, which generates this term in the potential. A second argument
requires this term to be absent in the potential function for this problem:
the potential function inside the cylinder is required to remain nite at r=0,
and ln(r) diverges at r=0. In addition, the potential function in the region
outside the cylinder is required to approach the value corresponding to a
uniform electric eld, V(r, ) = E
0
r cos , for very large distances r, whereas
ln(r) diverges at large r much more slowly. On the basis of these arguments
one may conclude that the potential function required for the problem of a
cylinder immersed in a uniform electric eld must have the form
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 84
V(r, ) = a +a
1
r cos +
b
1
cos
r
+a
2
r
2
cos 2 +
b
2
cos 2
r
2
+ (3.25)
In the limit as r the potential function outside the cylinder, V
0
, must
converge to the potential corresponding to a uniform electric eld, E
0
, along
the x direction. That is
lim
r
V
0
E
0
r cos .
This condition requires all the terms a
n
to vanish for n > 1. It also requires
a
1
= E
0
.
Inside the cylinder the potential function, V
i
, must remain nite in the limit
as r 0: there are no charges inside the cylinder to produce any singularity
in the potential. Thus inside the cylinder all the terms proportional to 1/r
n
must vanish for all n. These considerations now leave the following possibil
ities for the potential functions inside and outside the cylinder:
Inside(r R)
V
i
(r, ) = a +a
1
r cos +a
2
r
2
cos 2 +a
3
r
3
cos 3
Outside(r R)
V
0
(r, ) = A E
0
r cos +
b
1
cos
r
+
b
2
cos 2
r
2
+
b
3
cos 3
r
3
+
These two series for the potential functions inside and outside the cylinder
must be matched on the surface of the cylinder in order to satisfy two con
ditions: (1) the tangential component of
E must be continuous across the
interface (from curl
D) =
f
). Condition (1) will obviously be satised if the potential
function is forced to be continuous at r=R,
V
i
(R, ) = V
0
(R, ) .
Condition (2) requires that
1
_
V
i
r
_
r=R
=
2
_
V
0
r
_
r=R
.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 85
These two conditions must be satised for every angle , and this means that
they must be separately satised for each term cos n in the above two series.
For example:
n=0
a = A
n=1
a
1
Rcos =
_
E
0
R +
b
1
R
_
cos ,
and
1
a
1
cos =
2
_
E
0
+
b
1
R
2
_
cos .
These last two equations can be solved to give
a
1
=
2
2
E
0
(
1
+
2
)
, (3.26)
b
1
R
2
=
_
1
+
2
_
E
0
. (3.27)
n=2
a
2
R
2
cos 2 =
b
2
R
2
cos 2 ,
and
2
1
a
2
Rcos 2 =
2
2
b
2
R
3
cos 2 .
The latter two equations have only the solution a
2
= b
2
= 0. These pro
cedures can be continued for all n with the result that all coecients for
n 2 are zero. The potential function for the problem of an innite cylinder
subjected to a uniform applied eld turns out to be rather simple:
Inside the cylinder (r R)
V
i
(r, ) = a
2
2
E
0
r cos
(
1
+
2
)
. (3.28)
Outside the cylinder (r R)
V
0
(r, ) = a E
0
r cos + R
2
_
1
+
2
_
E
0
cos
r
. (3.29)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 86
The constant a has no physical signicance and could just as well have been
set equal to zero. The potential function inside the cylinder corresponds to
a uniform electric eld along the xdirection:
E
x
=
2
2
(
1
+
2
)
E
0
. (3.30)
This means that the material inside the cylinder is uniformly polarized along
the xdirection. This is an example of the depolarizing coecients discussed
in Section (2.7.4) of Chpt.(2). In order to make contact with the treatment
of Chpt.(2), consider the problem of a cylinder characterized by a dielectric
constant , surrounded by free space (
2
=
0
), and located in a uniform
external eld E
x
= E
0
. A uniform polarization density transverse to the
cylinder axis, P
x
, produces an internal eld given by
E
x
=
P
x
2
0
,
because the depolarization coecient for this geometry is 1/2. When this
eld is added to the applied eld the total electric eld along the xdirection
inside the cylinder is given by
E
x
= E
0
P
x
2
0
. (3.31)
It is this total eld that polarizes the material of the cylinder. By denition
D
x
= E
x
=
0
E
x
+ P
x
; ,
therefore
P
x
= (
0
)E
x
.
Now substitute eqn.(3.31) for the electric eld to obtain
P
x
= (
0
)
_
E
0
P
x
2
0
_
.
Solving for P
x
this gives
P
x
= 2
0
E
0
_
0
+
0
_
. (3.32)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 87
From eqn.(3.31) the total electric eld inside the cylinder is
E
x
=
2
0
+
0
E
0
,
in agreement with eqn.(3.30) deduced from the potential function for the case
2
=
0
and
1
= .
The potential function outside the cylinder corresponds to the uniform ap
plied electric eld, E
0
, plus the potential due to a line of dipoles whose dipole
moment per unit length is given by
P
Lx
= (R
2
)2
0
E
0
_
0
+
0
_
(by comparison of eqn.(3.29) with the expression for the potential function
for a line of dipoles given in Section(2.7.3)). This is equivalent to a dipole
moment per unit volume
P
x
=
P
Lx
R
2
= 2
0
E
0
_
0
+
0
_
,
in agreement with eqn.(3.32).
This problem has been treated in detail because it is the prototype for all
problems in cylindrical polar coordinates that involve boundaries describable
by the form r= constant. At each surface of discontinuity one must require
the potential function to be continuous through the surface. In addition the
normal component of the displacement vector,
D, is required to be continuous
through the surface if that surface contains no surface free charge density.
These conditions, together with the requirement that the potential function
behave properly in the limits as r approaches zero and as r approaches innity,
serve to determine the coecients in the expansions eqn.(3.23). The solution
so found is guaranteed to be the solution apart from an additive constant.
(d) Spherical Polar Coordinates.
LaPlaces equation written in spherical polar coordinates is
1
r
2
r
_
r
2
V
r
_
+
1
r
2
sin
_
sin
V
_
+
1
r
2
sin
2
2
V
2
_
= 0 . (3.33)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 88
Figure 3.6: An uncharged dielectric sphere, dielectric constant
1
, situated
in a medium characterized by a dielectric constant,
2
, in the presence of a
uniform electric eld E
z
= E
0
.
For simplicity consider problems that are symmetric around the zaxis so
that the potential function does not depend upon the angle variable . The
general solution of LaPlaces equation for that case is
V(r, ) =
n=
n=0
_
a
n
r
n
+
b
n
r
n+1
_
P
n
(cos ) . (3.34)
The angular functions P
n
(cos ) are called Legendre polynomials: the rst
few of them are listed in Table(3.2). The coecients a
n
, b
n
must be chosen
to satisfy the boundary conditions for a particular problem. As an example,
consider a dielectric sphere having a dielectric constant
1
surrounded by a
medium characterized by a dielectric constant
2
and immersed in a uniform
applied eld, E
z
= E
0
, see g.(3.6). The electric eld is directed along the
zaxis, and is supposed to be produced by sources that are very far removed
from the position of the sphere. Far from the sphere the potential function
must have the form
V(r, ) E
0
r cos ,
corresponding to a uniform eld E
0
. This suggests that the potential both
inside and outside the sphere should be proportional to the Legendre poly
nomial P
1
= cos . One is therefore led to try
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 89
P
0
= 1
P
1
= x
P
2
=
1
2
(3x
2
1)
P
3
=
1
2
(5x
3
3x)
P
4
=
1
8
(35x
4
30x
2
+ 3)
P
5
=
1
8
(63x
5
70x
3
+ 15x)
Table 3.2: The rst ve Legendre polynomials P
n
(x): see Schaums Out
line Series Mathematical Handbook by Murray R. Spiegel, McGrawHill,
N.Y.,1968. The multiplicative constant in front of each polynomial has
been chosen so that the polynomials satisfy the condition
_
1
1
dxP
m
P
n
=
_
2
2n+1
_
mn
, where
mn
= 1 if m=n, and zero otherwise.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 90
Inside.
V
i
= Ar cos .
There is no term b
1
/r
2
term because there is no charge at r=0 that would
cause the potential function to be singular at the origin.
Outside.
V
o
=
_
ar +
b
r
2
_
cos ,
where a = E
0
in order that the potential reduce to that corresponding to
a uniform eld of strength E
0
at distances far from the sphere.
On the surface of the sphere the potential must be continuous on passing
from the inside to the outside the sphere; this continuity of the potential func
tion guarantees that the tangential component of E will be continuous across
the surface of the sphere as is required by the Maxwell equation curl(
E) = 0.
One nds, for r=R,
AR = E
0
R +
b
R
2
,
or
A = E
0
+
b
R
3
. (3.35)
On the surface of the sphere the normal component of
D must be continuous.
This condition gives
1
A =
2
_
E
0
+
2b
R
3
_
. (3.36)
Equations (3.35) and (3.36) can be solved for A and b. The result of the
calculation is
A =
_
3
2
1
+ 2
2
_
E
0
,
and
b =
_
1
1
+ 2
2
_
R
3
E
0
.
The function
V
i
(r, ) =
3
2
E
0
r cos
(
1
+ 2
2
)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 91
satises
2
V = 0 everywhere in the region inside the sphere. The function
V
o
(r, ) = E
0
r cos +
_
1
1
+ 2
2
_
R
3
E
0
cos
r
2
satises
2
V = 0 everywhere in the region outside the sphere. Moreover,
these two functions satisfy all of the boundary conditions for this problem.
The uniqueness theorem guarantees that this is the solution of the problem
of an uncharged dielectric sphere subject to a uniform applied electrostatic
eld.
For the particular case in which an uncharged dielectric sphere charac
terized by a dielectric constant is located in free space, dielectric constant
0
, the above result reduces to
V
i
(r, ) =
_
3E
0
2 +
r
_
r cos , (3.37)
and
V
o
(r, ) = E
0
r cos +
_
r
1
2 +
r
_
R
3
E
0
cos
r
2
, (3.38)
where the relative dielectric constant is
r
= (
2
/
0
). These expressions
are consistent with the results of Chpt.(2), Section(2.7.4) in which it was
stated that the depolarization factor for a sphere is 1/3. The second term
in eqn.(3.38) corresponds to the potential generated by a point dipole at the
center of the sphere having the strength
p
z
= 4
0
_
r
1
2 +
r
_
R
3
E
0
.
This moment corresponds to a polarization per unit volume directed along z
and having the value
P = p
z
/
4R
3
3
= 3
0
_
r
1
2 +
r
_
E
0
Coulombs/m
2
. (3.39)
This uniform polarization would produce a depolarizing eld within the
sphere given by
E
z
=
_
r
1
2 +
r
_
E
0
V olts/m .
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 92
When this is combined with the applied eld, E
0
, the total eld within the
dielectric sphere becomes
E
i
=
3E
0
2 +
r
V olts/m
in agreement with the inner eld calculated from the potential function
eqn.(3.37)
3.2.2 The Method of Images.
(a) A Charge Located Near a Plane Interface.
This is a very specialized technique for solving electrostatic problems that
involves setting up a distribution of nonexistent charges in such a way that
the boundary conditions on the real problem are satised. For example,
consider a point charge, q, located in vacuum and at a distance d in front of
an innite conducting plane, g.(3.7). In the region to the left of the interface
the potential function must satisfy
2
V = 0. The boundary conditions are:
(1) Very near the position of the charge the potential function must have the
form required for a point charge q, i.e.
V(r) =
1
4
0
_
q
r
_
.
(2) The conducting surface must be an equipotential surface, i.e. V=const.
These two boundary conditions are satised by the system of two charges
shown in the bottom diagram of g.(3.7). The real problem involving a
conducting surface has been replaced by an image problem which just involves
two charges in free space. The potential at any point in space for the image
problem is
V =
1
4
0
_
q
r
1
q
r
2
_
.
On the symmetry plane r
1
= r
2
and therefore V=0, and is constant, every
where on the symmetry plane. Moreover, this potential function satises
2
V = 0 everywhere, except right at the two charges, because it is the sum
of two point charge potentials each of which separately satises LaPlaces
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 93
Figure 3.7: Top gure: a point charge located a distance d in front of an
innite conducting metal plane. Bottom gure: The system of charges whose
electrostatic potential satises
2
V = 0 as well as the boundary conditions
for the problem posed in the top gure. This solution is only valid in the
vacuum region: in the metal V = 0.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 94
equation. This potential function obviously approaches the limit
1
4
0
_
q
r
1
_
as r
1
0. Therefore the potential function for the image problem of g.(3.7)
is also the potential function which satises all the requirements for the prob
lem shown in the top diagram of g.(3.7) in the region outside the conductor,
(z 0). According to the uniqueness theorem, this is therefore the required
solution. Of course this solution is only valid for the region outside the
conductor: inside the conductor the potential is constant and equal to zero.
This image problem can be easily generalized to the problem in which
the space outside the conducting plane is lled with a dielectric material
simply by replacing
0
with .
(b) A Charged Particle Located Near an Interface between Two
Dielectric Materials.
The problem of a point charge outside a plane interface of discontinuity in
the dielectric constant can also be solved by the method of images, although
in this case the required image charge distribution is not so obvious. Refer
to g.(3.8). Let the potential function in Region(1) be that due to the real
charge q plus an image charge q
1
symmetrically placed with respect to the
interface, see g.(3.8). If space were homogeneously lled with material char
acterized by a dielectric constant
1
the resulting potential would be given
by
V
L
=
1
4
1
_
q
r
1
+
q
1
r
2
_
. (3.40)
Let the potential to the right of the interface be the same as that due to an
image charge q
2
located at the position of the real charge, but a charge that is
immersed in a homogeneous dielectric material characterized by a dielectric
constant
2
:
V
R
=
1
4
2
_
q
2
r
1
_
. (3.41)
Clearly both V
L
and V
R
satisfy LaPlaces equation. The trick now is to
choose the image charges q
1
, q
2
so as to satisfy the boundary conditions
(1) V
L
= V
R
on the interface between the two dielectrics; and
(2) the normal component of
D must be continuous across the interface
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 95
between the two dielectrics, ie.
1
_
V
L
n
_
=
2
_
V
R
n
_
.
Boundary condition (1) gives
1
4
1
_
q
r
0
+
q
1
r
0
_
=
1
4
2
_
q
2
r
0
_
, (3.42)
where r
1
= r
2
= r
0
on the boundary between the two dielectrics. Boundary
condition (2) gives
qd
r
3
0
+
q
1
d
r
3
0
=
q
2
d
r
3
0
. (3.43)
Equation(3.43) is the consequence of the relation
n
_
1
r
1
_
=
z
_
1
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ (z + d)
2
_
=
(z + d)
(x
2
+ y
2
+ (z + d)
2
)
3/2
.
When this expression is evaluated on the interface, ie. at z = 0, the result is
z
_
1
r
1
_
=
d
r
3
0
.
Similarly
z
_
1
r
2
_
=
+d
r
3
0
.
The boundary condition eqn.(3.43) requires
q q
1
= q
2
.
When this is combined with the rst boundary condition, eqn.(3.42), one
obtains
q
1
=
_
2
1
_
_
2
+ 1
_ q (3.44)
and
q
2
=
2q
_
2
+ 1
_ . (3.45)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 96
Figure 3.8: (a) The real problem: a charge q located a distance d from the
interface between two uncharged dielectric media. (b) The conguration of
image charges that produce a potential that satises
2
V = 0 and that can
be used to satisfy the required boundary conditions.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 97
Figure 3.9: Equipotential surfaces for two line charges of equal strength but
of opposite sign.
The solution of the original problem illustrated in part (a) of g.(3.8) is given
by eqn.(3.40), valid for region(1) characterized by
1
, and by eqn.(3.41) in
region(2) characterized by
2
, where q
1
and q
2
are given by eqns.(3.44 and
3.45). The force acting on the real charge q is just q multiplied by the electric
eld generated at the position of q by the image charge q
1
: ie. the electric
eld
E = grad(V
L
). It follows that if
2
>
1
the charge q is attracted to
the interface, but if
2
<
1
then the charge q is repelled by the interface.
(c) Parallel Conducting Cylinders.
Let two line charges of strengths and + Coulombs/m be separated by
the distance 2b along the xaxis as shown in g.(3.9). In the rst instance
let these line charges be immersed in vacuum. The potential generated by a
line charge of strength is given by
V(r) =
_
2
0
_
ln(r) ,
(see Section(2.7.3)). If r
1
is the distance from to an observer at P , and
if r
2
is the distance from the line charge + to the observer at P, then the
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 98
potential at P is given by
V
P
=
2
0
ln(r
1
/r
2
) .
Let (r
1
/r
2
) = k, a constant, so that
V =
2
0
ln(k) V olts .
This is the potential on all points that satisfy the condition r
1
= kr
2
, or
r
2
1
= k
2
r
2
2
. This last condition can be written out explicitly in cartesian
coordinates:
(x + b)
2
+ y
2
= k
2
_
(x b)
2
+ y
2
_
.
With the application of some tedious algebra this last expression may be put
in the form:
_
x + b
_
1 + k
2
1 k
2
__
2
+ y
2
=
4b
2
k
2
(1 k
2
)
2
. (3.46)
Equation (3.46) describes a circle centered at
x
0
= b
_
1 + k
2
1 k
2
_
, (3.47)
with a radius
R =
2bk
1 k
2

. (3.48)
Notice that k
0
= b
_
1 + k
2
1 k
2
_
= x
0
,
and having the same radius R as the equipotential surface corresponding to
k and centered at x
0
. Equipotential surfaces for k and 1/k are illustrated
in g.(3.9). The two equipotential surfaces shown correspond to dierent
potentials. The cylinder on the left corresponds to r
1
/r
2
= k; the cylinder
on the right corresponds to r
1
/r
2
= 1/k. It follows that the potential of
the cylinder on the right is equal in magnitude but opposite in sign to the
potential of the cylinder on the left.
These families of displaced equipotential cylindrical surfaces can be used
to solve a number of parallel conducting cylinder problems. The same treat
ment works if the cylinders are immersed in a dielectric medium; one has
only to replace
0
by the dielectric constant for the medium, .
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 99
(d) A Point Charge Outside a Conducting Sphere.
The problem of the potential function generated by a point charge located
outside a conducting sphere can also be solved using the method of images.
Consider the geometry shown in g.(3.10). The potential everywhere outside
the conducting sphere is the same as the potential generated by two point
charges: (1) the original point charge q; and (2) an image charge q
1
. (The
minus sign has been introduced for convenience; it makes sense that the
charges induced on the sphere should have a sign that is opposite to that
of the charge q.) The assertion is that if the position of the charge q
1
as
well as its magnitude are properly chosen then these two charges will create
a potential that is constant on the surface of the sphere. This assertion is
by no means obvious, but let us see how this comes about. The potential
generated at the point of observation, P, is given by
V
p
=
1
4
0
_
q
r
q
1
r
1
_
,
where
r =
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ (z d)
2
and
r
1
=
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ (z e)
2
.
It is now obvious from the form of the above potential that the potential will
be zero on all points such that
q
r
=
q
1
r
1
.
So let qr
1
= q
1
r, or more conveniently let q
2
r
2
1
= q
2
1
r
2
. Write out this last
equation explicitly in cartesian coordinates:
x
2
+ y
2
+ (z e)
2
=
_
q
1
q
_
2
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ (z d)
2
,
or
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
2ez + e
2
=
_
q
1
q
_
2
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
2zd + d
2
.
Gather terms to obtain
_
1
_
q
1
q
_
2
_
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
_
2z
_
e
_
q
1
q
_
2
d
_
=
_
q
1
q
_
2
(d
2
) e
2
.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 100
Figure 3.10: The real problem of a point charge located a distance d from
the center of a metal sphere of radius R is shown in (a). In part (b) the real
problem has been replaced by two point charges as shown in the gure.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 101
Note that if
e =
_
q
1
q
_
2
d
then the potential V = 0 at all points such that
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
=
_
q
1
q
_
2
d
2
e
2
_
1
_
q
1
q
_
2
_ ,
or using
e =
_
q
1
q
_
2
d
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
=
_
q
1
d
q
_
2
. (3.49)
This means that the spherical equipotential surface corresponding to V = 0
will coincide with the surface of the metal sphere if
q
1
= q
_
R
d
_
, (3.50)
and
e =
_
R
2
d
_
. (3.51)
So if eqns.(3.50 and 3.51) are satised then the potential everywhere outside
the metal sphere will satisfy
2
V = 0 because the potential is the sum of
two point charge potentials each of which satises the LaPlace equation.
Moreover, this potential function satises the boundary condition that the
surface of the sphere be an equipotential surface. This solution corresponds
to the special case in which charge is allowed to ow onto the sphere as the
driving charge q is brought up from innity. It can be shown using Gauss
theorem that the charge induced on the sphere is just q
1
. The problem
of an isolated sphere such that the net charge on it is zero can be solved
by adding a third charge of strength +q
1
to the position of the center of
the sphere in the image problem of g.(3.10(b)).The potential in the region
outside the sphere is now given by
V(x, y, z) =
1
4
0
_
q
1
r
2
+
q
r
q
1
r
1
_
, (3.52)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 102
where
r
2
=
_
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
.
The potential function eqn.(3.52) satises the LaPlace equation,
2
V = 0,
the surface of the sphere is an equipotential surface, and it corresponds to a
net charge of zero on the sphere. The potential of the sphere is just
V
s
=
1
4
0
_
q
1
R
_
=
1
4
0
_
q
d
_
,
because the last two terms in eqn.(3.52) cancel each other, by construction,
on the surface of the sphere.
3.2.3 Twodimensional Problems.
(a) The Theory of Complex Variables.
The theory of complex variables may be useful for solving problems in which
the potential function does not depend upon one coordinate the z co
ordinate, say. Let z=x+iy represent a complex number, and let F(z)=
U(x,y)+iV(x,y) be an analytic function of the complex variable z. In or
der for F(z) to exhibit a welldened derivative it can be shown that the
CauchyRiemann equations must be satised:
U
x
=
V
y
,
and
U
y
=
V
x
.
See, for example, Schaums Outline Series: Complex Variables by Murray
R. Spiegel, McGrawHill, N.Y.,1964. It follows from the CauchyRiemann
relations by direct dierentiation that
2
U
x
2
+
2
U
y
2
= 0 ,
and
2
V
x
2
+
2
V
y
2
= 0 .
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 103
Figure 3.11: Electrodes in the form of cylindrical hyperboloids. One pair of
electrodes is held at a potential U=1 Volt; the other pair of electrodes is
held at a potential U=+1 Volt. The potential function in the space between
the electrodes is given by U = x
2
y
2
. The electric eld components in the
space between the electrodes are given by E
x
= 2x and E
y
= +2y.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 104
That is, both of the functions U(x,y) and V(x,y) satisfy LaPlaces equation.
Both U and V are therefore candidates for the solution of some problem in
electrostatics. Consider, for example, the analytic function
F(z) = z
2
= (x
2
y
2
) + 2ixy . (3.53)
In this case
U(x, y) = x
2
y
2
and
V(x, y) = 2xy .
The families of curves U= const. and V= const. are orthogonal to each
other. If the equipotential surfaces are represented by U(x,y)= const. (see
g.(3.11)) then the curves V(x,y)= const represent the electric eld lines:
electric eld lines are constructed so that their tangent at each point is par
allel with the direction of the electric eld. Conversely, if the equipotential
surfaces are described by the curves V(x,y)= const. then the curves U(x,y)=
const. represent the eld lines. Other examples are described in the Feyn
man Lectures on Physics,Vol.(II), section 72. In principle, the technique of
conformal mapping (described in Schaums Outline Series: Complex Vari
ables, loc.cit.) can be used to determine the potential distribution around
electrodes whose shape can be represented by a polygon.
(b) Analogue Solution Using Conducting Paper.
Two dimensional problems can also be solved by means of a kind of analogue
computer. The desired electrode conguration is painted on conducting pa
per using a metallic conducting paint, eg. silver dag, see g.(3.12). The
silver paint electrodes portrayed in this gure would represent an innitely
long metal, circular, cylinder placed between two innitely long parallel metal
plates. The electrodes are held at xed potentials V
1
, V
2
, and V
3
. The cur
rents which ow in the conducting paper must be such that there is no charge
buildup anywhere; they must, therefore, satisfy the equation
div(J) = 0 .
But in a conducting medium one has
J = E
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 105
Figure 3.12: Electrodes of silver paint drawn on a sheet of conducting paper.
The resistivity of the paper is much larger than that of the silver paint
electrodes.The equipotential lines can be mapped out by means of a voltmeter
connected to a pointed probe.
so that
div(E) = 0 .
From this last equation it follows that the potential distribution in the con
ducting paper must satisfy
2
V = 0 because E = gradV. The equipoten
tial lines corresponding to a desired potential value can be traced out on the
conducting paper by means of a high input impedance voltmeter connected
to a sharply pointed probe. The electric eld can, of course, be obtained
from the known potential distribution via a numerical dierentiation.
3.3 Electrostatic Field Energy.
It will be shown in Chapter(8) that it costs energy to set up an electric
eld. As the electric eld increases from zero the energy density stored in
the electrostatic eld, W
E
, increases according to
W
E
t
=
E
D
t
.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 106
For the particular case in which the electric eld is set up in a dielectric
medium that can be described by a dielectric constant so that
D =
E, this
expression can be written
W
E
t
=
E
t
=
2
E
2
t
. (3.54)
Eqn.(3.54) can be integrated immediately to obtain
W
E
=
E
2
2
=
1
2
D Joules/m
3
. (3.55)
In the above expressions the zero of energy has been chosen to be zero when
the electrostatic eld is everywhere zero. The total energy stored in the
electrostatic eld is obtained as an integral of W
E
over all space. This total
energy, U
E
, can be expressed in terms of the potentials and charges on the
electrodes that created the electric eld. This can be shown by starting from
the vector identity
div(V
D) = Vdiv(
D) +
D grad(V) , (3.56)
where
D is any vector eld and V is a scalar function. This identity can be
proved by writing out the divergence in cartesian coordinates and by carrying
out the dierentiations. But from Maxwells equations div(
D) =
f
, and by
denition
E = grad(V), so that
___
V olume
div(V
D) d(Vol) =
___
V olume
_
f
V
D
_
d(Vol) . (3.57)
The volume integral on the left can be replaced by a surface integral by using
Gauss theorem:
___
V olume
div(V
D) d(Vol) =
__
Surface
V
D
dS .
As the volume becomes very large and the surface S recedes to innity, the
surface integral becomes very small. Very far from all charges the potential
V must decrease at least as fast as 1/R (the potential due to a point charge)
and 
f
V d(Vol) =
___
V olume
_
D
_
d(Vol) ,
and therefore
U
E
=
___
Space
W
E
d(Vol) =
1
2
___
Space
f
V d(Vol) . (3.58)
For a collection of conductors embedded in a nonconducting dielectric
medium all of the charges are on the conductor surfaces and the charges on
a given conductor are all at the same potential. In that case the integrals in
eqn.(3.58) simply give the product of electrode potential and the total charge
on the electrode:
U
E
=
1
2
n
Q
n
V
n
. (3.59)
3.3.1 Generalized Capacitance Coecients.
Maxwells equations are linear, therefore the potentials associated with elec
trodes embedded in a material that obeys linear response must obey the
principle of superposition. The potential distribution that is generated by
a particular charge is proportional to the quantity of that charge. It fol
lows from superposition that for any collection of charges the potential at
any point must be a linear function of the charge strengths. The converse
must also be true. Given a collection of conducting electrodes embedded in
a linear dielectric medium the charge on each of the electrodes must be a
linear function of the electrode potentials: if the potentials are doubled then
so must the charge on each electrode be doubled and vice versa.
This linear dependence of the charge on potentials can be expressed as
follows (see g.(3.13):
Q
1
= C
11
V
1
+ C
12
V
2
+. . . + C
1n
V
n
(3.60)
Q
2
= C
21
V
1
+ C
22
V
2
+. . . + C
2n
V
n
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q
n
= C
n1
V
1
+ C
n2
V
2
+. . . + C
nn
V
n
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 108
Figure 3.13: Charged conductors embedded in a linear dielectric medium.
The charges are a linear function of the potentials, see eqn.(3.61) in the text.
The factors of proportionality, C
mn
, are called capacitance coecients;
they have the units of Farads. These equations express the observation that
a change in the potential of one electrode causes a change in the amount of
charge stored on every electrode, not just on the electrode whose potential
was altered. The energy stored in the electric eld, which can be calculated
from eqn.(3.59), must be independent of how the charging process was carried
out. It must not matter, for example, whether electrode (1) is rst charged,
then electrode (2), then electrode (3), and so on, or whether (3) is charged
rst, then (2), then (1), then (4), and so on. The energy contained in the
nal state of the system must be independent of the way in which that nal
state was reached: in order that this be so, it can be shown that
C
mn
= C
nm
.
Instead of N
2
independent capacitance coecients there are only N(N+1)/2
of them. Notice that these capacitance coecients are geometry dependent.
Any change in the shape of any electrode, or a change in the position of
any electrode, will result in a change in all of the capacitance coecients.
It follows also that the energy stored in the electric eld must change. This
change in eld energy can, in principle, be used to calculate the electrostatic
forces on the conductors or on the dielectric medium.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 109
Figure 3.14: A parallel plate capacitor. The two plates have an area A
and are separated by a distance z. The charge density on each plate is
s
Coulombs/m
2
.
3.3.2 Electrostatic Forces.
Case(1) The Charges are Fixed.
The charges on each conductor are held xed, and one of the conductors is
allowed to undergo a slight displacement
r. During this displacement the
electric forces will do an amount of work
w =
F
r .
This work can only be done at the expense of the energy stored in the electric
eld since there are no other energy sources. Consequently
F
E
r = U
E
.
The energy stored in the electric eld acts like a potential function for the
electrical forces. As an example, consider the parallel plate capacitor of
g.(3.14). It is convenient in this case to work with a unit area of electrode
surface, and to take metal plates that are so large that edge eects can be
neglected. For a xed surface charge density on each electrode the electric
eld strength between the plates is independent of the electrode spacing,
z. The energy stored in the electric eld per unit area of electrode can be
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 110
calculated from the energy density eqn.(3.55); the result of the calculation is
U
E
=
_
2
s
2
0
_
z
since the electric eld strength is given by E =
s
/
0
. Let the plates be
moved apart by a small increment dz. The work done on the displaced plate
by the electrical force per unit area is given by Fdz. This work must be done
at the cost of the stored electrical energy, therefore
Fdz =
_
2
s
2
0
_
dz ,
or
F =
_
2
s
2
0
_
=
1
2
s
E newtons/m
2
. (3.61)
The electric forces act in such a way as to pull the electrodes together. This
is the expected result because one plate carries a positive charge and the
other plate carries a negative charge. As a guess, one might have thought
that the force per unit area on a given electrode would just be given by the
charge density multiplied by the electric eld at the surface of the electrode,
i.e.
s
E. The result eqn.(3.61) shows that the average eld acting on the
charges must be used to calculate the force ( remember that E=0 inside the
conductor).
Although the above result for the force on a conductor has been derived
for a plane parallel plate, it turns out to be valid for the electric force per
unit area acting on the surface of any conductor facing vacuum. There is a
negative pressure acting on the conductor surface that depends only upon
the local values of the eld strength and the surface charge density. This
negative pressure, or tension t
E
, is given by
t
E
=
s
E
2
=
0
2
E
2
Newtons/m
2
.
For a conducting surface immersed in a uid characterized by a dielectric
constant it is easy to show that this tension becomes
t
E
=
1
2
D =
2
E
2
Newtons/m
2
. (3.62)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 111
Case(2) The Potentials are Fixed.
In many instances it is convenient to investigate the electrical force distri
bution under circumstances in which the electrode potentials are held xed.
Any change in the electrode conguration at xed potentials that results in a
change in the capacitance coecients will also lead to a change in the amount
of charge carried by each conductor. If the change in the charge carried by
a particular electrode is Q
M
, the work required to add this charge to the
conductor is W
B
= V
M
Q
M
and this energy is provided by the source of
emf that is attached to conductor M, i.e. by the battery which is used to
maintain the constant potential. The change in energy stored in the electric
eld can be calculated from eqn.(3.59); the result for constant potentials is
U
E
=
1
2
N
V
N
Q
N
. (3.63)
The energy provided by the batteries that hold the potentials V
N
constant
is given by
W
B
=
N
V
N
Q
N
. (3.64)
The energy supplied from the batteries is exactly twice the increase in the
energy stored in the electric eld. The work done by the electrical forces in
moving an electrode is
F
E
dr. Conservation of energy now gives
F
E
dr +U
E
= W
B
,
or
F
E
dr = U
E
=
1
2
N
V
N
Q
N
, (3.65)
since W
B
= 2U
E
. For this case the increase in electrical energy stored in
the eld is exactly equal to the external work done by the electrical forces in
changing the electrode geometry.
As an example, consider the conguration shown in g.(3.15). A slab
of dielectric material characterized by a dielectric constant , lies with one
end near the center of a plane parallel capacitor and the other end lies well
outside the capacitor. The slab has a thickness d meters and a width w
meters. The specimen is so long that the electric eld at the end that lies
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 112
Figure 3.15: A plane parallel capacitor partially containing a slab of dielectric
material d thick and w wide. The dielectric constant of the slab is . The
objective is to calculate the electric forces acting on the slab.
outside the capacitor is nearly zero and may be neglected. An uncomplicated
but tedious calculation gives (refer to g.(3.15)):
E
1
=
V
_
d
1
+
_
1
_
d
V olts/m ;
E
2
=
_
_
V
_
d
1
+
_
1
_
d
V olts/m ;
and
E
0
=
V
d
1
V olts/m .
E
1
is the eld in the vacuum in a region occupied by the dielectric slab,
but far enough from the end of the slab so that inhomogeneities in the eld
can be neglected: in practice, this means that one is considering a position
several slab thicknesses, d, from the end. The quantity E
2
is the electric eld
strength in the dielectric slab, but at a position several d removed from its
end. E
0
is the electric eld strength in the region of the capacitor where there
is no slab, and far enough from the end of the slab so that fringing elds can
be neglected. Now let the slab be inserted x farther between the capacitor
plates. The change in energy stored in the electric eld will just be that
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 113
corresponding to removing a volume (d
1
w) x of dielectricfree space where
the eld is E
0
Volts/m and replacing it with the volume (wd) x of dielectric
material subject to the eld E
2
plus the vacuum volume w(d
1
d) x subject
to the eld E
1
. This change in energy will be independent of the exact shape
of the end of the slab providing that the extent of the nonuniform eld
region around the end of the slab is very small compared with the lateral
dimensions, D, of the capacitor plates, i.e. providing that d/D 1. The
change in stored electrostatic energy for a small displacement x is given by
U
E
= wd x
_
E
2
2
2
+
0
E
2
1
2
_
d
1
d
1
__
(wd
1
x)
0
E
2
0
2
.
After some algebra this may be written
U
E
= (wx)
_
0
V
2
2d
1
_
_
1
0
1 +
d
1
d
_
.
In general the dielectric constant is greater than
0
so that the electrostatic
energy stored in the eld increases if the dielectric slab moves farther into the
capacitor. For constant applied voltage this means that the electric forces
are such as to pull the slab further between the capacitor plates: at constant
applied potential the geometry tends to change so as to maximize the energy
stored in the eld. The force on the slab is given by
F
x
= w
_
0
V
2
2d
1
_
_
1
0
1 +
d
1
d
_
Newtons . (3.66)
The force on a dielectric slab may be measured and used to obtain the di
electric constant for the slab material, . A variant of this method is often
used to measure the dielectric constant of a uid, see g.(3.16). Eqn.(3.66)
becomes much simpler if the thickness of the dielectric slab is the same, or
nearly the same, as the spacing between the capacitor plates. When d = d
1
one nds
F
x
= w
_
0
V
2
2d
__
0
1
_
= w
_
0
V
2
2d
_
e
, (3.67)
where
e
is the electrical susceptibility dened by =
0
(1 +
e
). In the
opposite limit, d/d
1
1, the force is given by
F
x
= w d
_
0
V
2
2d
2
1
__
0
_
= w d
_
0
V
2
2d
2
1
__
e
1 +
e
_
Newtons .
(3.68)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 114
Figure 3.16: Quinckes method for measuring the dielectric constant of a
uid. Upon the application of the voltage V to the capacitor plates the
dielectric uid is sucked up between the plates. In equilibrium the electrical
force on the uid just balances the gravitational force. The gravitational
force is proportional to the level dierence h. The electrical force per unit
area, t, is given by t = gh where is the uid density.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 115
Figure 3.17: The force acting on the matter contained within a volume V
can be obtained as the surface integral of a vector
T over a surface S that
encloses V. It is assumed that
D is everywhere inside S proportional to the
electric eld,
E. It is further assumed that the surface S is immersed in a
uid that can support no shear stresses, and that
D and
E are parallel on S.
The force per unit area is given by  T =
E
F
E
=
__
S
TdS . (3.69)
In this integral
T is a vector whose magnitude is given by 
T = (
D)/2
and whose direction is given by the construction shown in g.(3.17). Note
that the element of area, dS, in eqn.(3.69) is not represented by a vector; it
is simply a scalar quantity. When the electric eld, E, is directed parallel
with the outward normal to the surface element the force contribution is a
tension, but when E lies in the surface the contribution to the force is a
pressure. It is an interesting exercise to show that the force between two
charges in vacuum is given by (q
1
q
2
/4
0
R
2
) if one integrates the vector
T
over a suitably chosen surface that completely surrounds one of the charges.
3.4 The Field Energy as Minimum.
Consider a group of conductors embedded in a dielectric medium as shown
in g.(3.13). Let the actual potential distribution be V corresponding to
the electric eld
E = grad(V); the potential function V satises LaPlaces
equation,
2
V = 0, and it satises the boundary conditions. Now consider a
second potential distribution, V
e
, that is not the correct one: V
e
= V + V,
where V = 0 on the conductors. This situation might arise, for example, if
one tried to guess the potential distribution given the potential on each of the
conductors. The eld energy calculated using the wrong potential function
V
e
would be
U
1
E
=
___
Space
(dVol)
2
_
E +
E
_
E +
E
_
,
where
E = grad(V) and E = grad(V). Upon multiplying out the
factors under the integral sign one obtains
U
1
E
=
___
Space
(dVol)
_
E
2
2
+
E +
2
(
E)
2
_
. (3.70)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 117
But
div
_
DV
_
= V div(
D) +
D grad(V) =
f
(V)
E .
If div(
DV) =
__
Surface
dS
DV =
___
Space
(dVol)
f
V
___
Space
(dVol)
V .
(3.71)
The surface integral in eqn.(3.71) goes to zero for the usual reasons as the
surface S becomes innitely large. Namely, very far from any sources 
D 
goes to zero at least as fast as 1/R
2
and the surface area increases like R
2
so
that the surface integral contribution must vanish providing that the product

D  V goes to zero at least as fast as 1/R
3
, ie. V must go to zero at least
as fast as 1/R. Also by hypothesis the charge density,
f
, vanishes every
where except on the surfaces of the conductors where V = 0, by hypothesis.
Consequently, eqn.(3.71) gives the result
___
Space
(dVol)
D
E =
___
Space
(dVol)
E
E = 0 .
It follows from this and from eqn.(3.70) that the incorrect energy U
1
E
exceeds
the correct energy U
E
, where
U
E
=
___
Space
(dVol)
2
E
2
,
by a positive denite amount:
U
E
= U
1
E
U
E
=
___
Space
(dVol)
2
_
E
_
2
. (3.72)
This demonstrates that the electric eld energy is a minimum for the cor
rect eld distribution. This fact can be made the basis for an approximate
method for solving electrostatic eld problems: one guesses at the form of the
potential using a reasonable function that contains a number of adjustable
constants a,b,c etc. These constants are adjusted so as to obtain the min
imum electrostatic energy. The solution so obtained represents the given
functional form that most closely approximates the exact solution. This
method has been illustrated in the last part of Chpt.(19) of the Feynman
Lectures on Physics, Vol.(II), using a cylindrical capacitor as an example.
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 118
Figure 3.18: A point dipole p
a
is located at the center of an empty spherical
cavity of radius R cut out of an otherwise homogeneous dielectric material
characterized by a dielectric constant . The electric eld far from the cavity
is E
0
Volts/m, and is uniform and directed along the zaxis.
3.5 Appendix(A). The Onsager Problem.
An interesting variant of the problem of a sphere in a uniform eld has
been discussed by Onsager in connection with the calculation of the di
electric constant of a material from its atomic polarizability; L.Onsager,
J.Amer.Chem.Soc.58, 14861493 (1936). When an isolated atom is placed
in a uniform external electric eld it develops a dipole moment, p
a
, that is
proportional to the applied eld E
0
;
p
a
=
0
E
0
,
where the polarizability has the dimensions of a volume, and can in prin
ciple be calculated using quantum mechanics. In a solid or a liquid the atom
is not isolated, but its electric moment is inuenced by the electric elds due
to its neighbours. As a crude approximation one may imagine that the atom
plus its associated electric moment is located at the center of a spherical
cavity of radius R cut out of an otherwise homogeneous dielectric material
characterized by a dielectric constant , see g.(3.18). Far from the cavity
the electric eld is E
0
and directed along the zaxis corresponding to the
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 119
potential function
V = E
0
z = E
0
r cos ,
where r and are spherical polar coordinates. The problem is to determine
the eld inside the cavity that acts to polarize the atom. The externally
applied electric eld is derived from a potential function whose angular de
pendence is proportional to cos ; one is therefore motivated to seek a solution
of this problem that corresponds to the use of the terms proportional to cos
in the expansion for the potential, eqn.(3.34). Inside the cavity the potential
near r=0 must be dominated by the dipole potential
p
a
4
0
cos
r
2
.
One is therefore led to try
Inside: r<R
V
i
(r, ) =
_
p
a
cos
4
0
_
1
r
2
Ar cos . (3.73)
and
Outside: r>R
V
o
(r, ) = E
0
r cos +
b cos
r
2
. (3.74)
The requirements that the potential function and the normal components
of
D be continuous across the surface of the sphere, r=R, lead to the two
equations
A +
b
R
3
=
_
p
a
4
0
_
1
R
3
+ E
0
A +
2
r
b
R
3
=
_
2p
a
4
0
_
1
R
3
r
E
0
,
where
r
= /
0
. From these two equations one nds
A =
_
3
r
2
r
+ 1
_
E
0
+
_
r
1
2
r
+ 1
_
2p
a
4
0
R
3
, (3.75)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 120
and
b
R
3
=
_
1
r
2
r
+ 1
_
E
0
+
_
3
2
r
+ 1
_
p
a
4
0
R
3
. (3.76)
But A is just the value of the uniform eld inside the cavity that is responsible
for the induced dipole moment on the atom, therefore from the denition of
the polarizability one has
p
a
=
0
A . (3.77)
This value can be substituted into eqn.(3.75) for the constant A to obtain
A =
_
3
r
2
r
+ 1
_
E
0
+
_
r
1
2
r
+ 1
_
2A
4R
3
. (3.78)
Eqn.(3.78) can be solved for A in terms of the applied electric eld E
0
, and
this result can be used in eqn.(3.77) to calculate the atomic dipole moment
p
a
:
p
a
=
_
3
r
0
2
r
+ 1
_
2
4R
3
_
(
r
1)
_
E
0
. (3.79)
But the dipole moment per atom can be used to calculate the dipole moment
per unit volume,
P:

P = P = Np
a
, (3.80)
where N is the number of atoms per unit volume. From the denition
D =
0
E
0
+ P
one has
P = (
r
1)
0
E
0
. (3.81)
(Notice that one can drop the vector signs on D, E
0
, and P because all of
these vectors are parallel with the zaxis). Using eqns.(3.81,3.80, and 3.79)
one can obtain a relation between the relative dielectric constant,
r
and the
polarizability :
r
1 =
_
3
r
2
r
+ 1 (
r
1)
_
2R
3
_
_
N .
The latter expression can be solved to obtain the polarizability in terms of
the relative dielectric constant,
r
:
=
(2
r
+ 1)
_
r
1 +
_
3
r
r
1
_
2NR
3
_ 2R
3
. (3.82)
CHAPTER 3. ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (II) 121
Eqn.(3.82) can be used to calculate the atomic polarizability from measured
values of the relative dielectric constant,
r
. These values of can then be
compared with values calculated from atomic theory.
Chapter 4
The Magnetostatic Field (I)
The Calculation of Magnetic Fields Given a Timeindependent Dis
tribution of Sources.
4.1 Introduction.
If nothing changes with time Maxwells equations become:
curl
E = 0 (4.1)
div
B = 0 (4.2)
curl
B =
0
_
J
f
+curl
M
_
(4.3)
div
E =
1
0
_
f
div
P
_
. (4.4)
The magnetic eld has become completely uncoupled from the electric eld.
The magnetostatic eld, B, is generated by current ow and by a spatial
variation of the magnetization density, M. It is customary to introduce a
vector potential function
A through the relation
B(r) = curl
A(r) , (4.5)
where r is the position vector corresponding to some point in space. The
divergence of any curl of a vector eld is zero, therefore eqn.(4.5) automat
ically guarantees that the equation div
A) =
0
_
J
f
+curl(
M)
_
. (4.6)
The free current density,
J
f
, and the function curl(
J
M
= curl(
M) ,
and a total current density by
J
T
=
J
f
+
J
M
. (4.7)
The total current density is just the sum of the current density due to the
motion of charges and the eective current density due to a spatial variation
of the magnetization density,
M. With this notation, eqn.(4.6) becomes
curl curl(
A) =
0
J
T
. (4.8)
The vector operator curl curl has a particularly simple form when written
out in cartesian coordinates:
curl curl(
A) =
_
2
A
x
u
x
+
2
A
y
u
y
+
2
A
z
u
z
_
+grad(div
A) , (4.9)
where
2
=
2
x
2
+
2
y
2
+
2
z
2
is the LaPlacian operator, and u
x
, u
y
, and u
z
are unit vectors. Eqn.(4.8) is
actually three equations when written in cartesian coordinates: one equation
for each of the three components.
2
A
x
+
x
(div
A) =
0
J
T
)
x
(4.10)
2
A
y
+
y
(div
A) =
0
J
T
)
y
2
A
z
+
z
(div
A) =
0
J
T
)
z
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 124
At this point the vector eld
A has not been uniquely dened because so far
all that has been specied is its curl through the requirement that curl(
A) =
=
A +grad(F) (4.11)
where F is any scalar function of position. Both
A
and
A give exactly the
same eld,
B, because the curl of any gradient is zero. This property of
the curl was used in Chapter(2) in order to introduce the electrical potential
function. The arbitrariness in the vector potential
A illustrated by eqn.(4.11)
means that one can choose the vector potential so that its divergence has a
convenient value. It turns out that div(
2
A
x
=
0
J
T
)
x
, (4.12)
2
A
y
=
0
J
T
)
y
,
2
A
z
=
0
J
T
)
z
.
Each of these equations has exactly the form as eqn.(2.12) encountered
in Chapter(2) for the electrostatic potential. The particular solutions for
eqns.(4.12) can therefore be written down immediately by analogy with
eqn.(2.13) of Chapter(2):
A
x
(
R) =
0
4
___
Space
d
J
T
)
x
(r)

R r 
,
A
y
(
R) =
0
4
___
Space
d
J
T
)
y
(r)

R r 
,
A
z
(
R) =
0
4
___
Space
d
J
T
)
z
(r)

R r 
,
where d is the element of volume.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 125
Figure 4.1: The geometry used to calculate the vector potential at the point
P(
A(
R) =
0
4
___
Space
d
_
J
f
+curl(
M)
_

R r 
. (4.13)
It is instructive to rewrite this equation explicitly in terms of the coordinates
that specify the point of observation,
R = X u
x
+ Y u
y
+ Z u
z
and the co
ordinates that specify the position of the source element of volume r = x u
x
+
y u
y
+ z u
z
, see g.(4.1):
A(X, Y, Z) =
0
4
___
Space
dxdydz
J
T
(x, y, z)
_
(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
. (4.14)
The particular solution, eqn.(4.14), corresponds to the choice div(
A) = 0.
Derivatives of the components of
A with respect to the eld coordinates
(X,Y,Z) can be calculated using eqn.(4.14) by dierentiating under the inte
gral sign. For example,
A
x
Y
=
0
4
___
Space
dxdydz
J
T
)
x
(x, y, z) (Y y)
[(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
]
3/2
.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 126
Figure 4.2: A thin wire carrying a current of I Amps. The eld is to be
calculated at P, the point of observation.
Carrying out the dierentiations term by term one can show that
B(
R) = curl(
A) =
0
4
___
Space
d
_
J
T
(
R r)
_

R r 
3
., (4.15)
where d is the element of volume.
4.2 The Law of BiotSavart.
It often happens that the current density is conned to a relatively small
crosssection. Consider, for example, the case of a thin wire carrying a cur
rent, see g.(4.2). For this case the current density is I/S inside the wire,
where S is the crosssectional area of the wire, and the current density is zero
outside the wire. If the thickness of the wire is very small compared with the
distance to the point of observation, one can neglect the very small varia
tions of 
Rr =
_
(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
for the various elements
across the wire section, so that when integrated over the wire crosssection
eqns.(4.14) and (4.15) become line integrals:
A
P
=
0
I
4
_
Wire
dL
 r 
, (4.16)
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 127
Figure 4.3: Derivation of the law of BiotSavart from the elds generated by
a slowly moving point charge.
and
B
P
=
0
I
4
_
Wire
_
dL r
_
 r 
3
. (4.17)
Equation (4.17) is called the law of BiotSavart. Notice that the magnetic
eldstrength falls o like 1/r
2
with distance from a small element of current.
The law of BiotSavart can also be deduced directly from the expression for
the magnetic eld generated by a slowly moving point charge, Chapter(1),
eqn.(1.7). Consider a small element of a wire containing N charges q per unit
volume that are moving along the wire with a velocity v, see g.(4.3). The
charge density contributed by the mobile charge carriers are supposed to be
exactly compensated by an equal number density of xed charges of opposite
sign. The current owing through the wire is numerically equal to the charge
contained in a cylinder of area S and equal in length to the velocity, v: all of
the mobile charges in such a cylinder will pass through a given crosssection
in 1 second,
I = NSqv Amp`eres . (4.18)
The electric eld due to the mobile charge carriers contained in a piece of
wire dL long is just given by
dE
P
=
1
4
0
NSqdL
r
 r 
3
.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 128
These charges produce a magnetic eld because of their motion
dB
P
=
1
c
2
_
v
dE
P
_
=
1
4
0
c
2
NSqdL
[v r]
 r 
3
.
The compensating stationary charges produce no magnetic eld because their
velocity relative to the observer is zero. They do, however, produce an electric
eld that cancels the electric eld due to the mobile charges. Now use the
fact that v and
dL are parallel, along with eqn.(4.18), to obtain
dB
P
=
I
4
0
c
2
_
dL r
_
 r 
3
.
This leads directly to the integral expression eqn.(4.17) for the law of Biot
and Savart since c
2
= 1/
0
0
.
4.3 Standard Problems.
4.3.1 A Long Straight Wire.
Each element of the wire,
dL, is directed along z, and therefore A has only a
zcomponent, see g.(4.4) and eqn.(4.16):
dA
z
=
0
4
I
0
dz
z
2
+ x
2
. (4.19)
Unfortunately, the integral of eqn.(4.19) diverges if it is evaluated over the
interval z . This indicates that an innitely long wire is un
physical; eventually the two ends of the wire must be connected in order to
complete the steady state current loop. In order to proceed, one can calcu
late the contribution to the vector potential from the large but nite wire
segment L z +L. The result is
A
z
(x) =
0
I
0
4
ln
_
L
2
+ x
2
+ L
L
2
+ x
2
L
_
.
Clearly A
z
must have the same value everywhere on a circle of radius x
centered on the origin and lying in the xy plane. The expression for the
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 129
Figure 4.4: A straight wire 2L meters long, and carrying a current of I
0
Amp`eres, used to calculate the vector potential and the magnetic eld gen
erated at a point P in the central plane.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 130
vector potential may therefore be written in cylindrical polar coordinates as
A
z
(r) =
0
I
0
4
ln
_
L
2
+ r
2
+ L
L
2
+ r
2
L
_
.
Although this expression is strictly valid only for points in the xy plane, it
is clear from symmetry arguments that for large L and small z the vector
potential must be essentially independent of z. The corresponding magnetic
eld is given by
B = curl(
=
_
A
z
r
_
=
0
I
0
2
L
r
L
2
+ r
2
.
If Lr this expression reduces to
B
=
0
I
0
2
1
r
. (4.20)
4.3.2 A Long Straight Wire Revisited.
The result eqn.(4.20) for the magnetic eld generated by a long straight wire
is so simple that it suggests that there must be an easy method for obtaining
it: a method based upon the symmetry of the problem. Magnetic problems
in which the current distribution is very symmetric may often be solved
by means of an application of Stokes theorem (Chpt.(1), Section(1.3.4)).
Stokes theorem states that the surface integral of the curl of any vector
eld over a surface bounded by a closed curve C can be replaced by the line
integral of that vector over the curve C. Apply this theorem to the Maxwell
equation
curl(
B) =
0
_
J
f
+curl(
M)
_
=
0
J
T
.
For the present problem there is no magnetization density;
M = 0 everywhere
and therefore curl(
M) = 0 everywhere and
J
T
=
J
f
. The current ow is
conned to the crosssection of the wire so that if one applies Stokes theorem
to the surface bounded by the circle of radius R shown in g.(4.5) one obtains
__
Surface
dS curl(
B) n =
0
__
Surface
dS
J
f
n =
0
I
0
,
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 131
Figure 4.5: Geometry used to calculate the magnetic eld generated by a
long straight wire carrying a current of I
0
Amp`eres.
where dS is the element of area, and n is a unit vector normal to the element
of surface area. But from Stokes Theorem
__
Surface
dS curl(
B) n =
_
C
B
dL ,
and therefore
_
C
B
dL =
0
I
0
.
The law of BiotSavart, eqn.(4.17), can be used to convince oneself that
B
has only a component in the direction tangent to the circle C of g.(4.5).
By symmetry this component must be independent of position along the
circumference of the circle, and the line integral in is very easy to carry out.
_
C
B
dL = 2RB
=
0
I
0
,
or
B
=
0
I
0
2R
, (4.21)
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 132
Figure 4.6: The magnetic eld generated along the axis of a circular current
loop.
in agreement with eqn.(4.20) deduced from the vector potential. Unfortu
nately, most problems do not exhibit sucient symmetry to be so simply
solved.
4.3.3 A Circular Loop.
Refer to g.(4.6). In this case the eld is most simply calculated by direct
application of the law of BiotSavart, eqn.(4.17). The element of magnetic
eld,
dB, generated by any small element of length,
dL, along the wire is
perpendicular both to
dL and to r as shown in g.(4.6). The transverse
component of
dB is cancelled by symmetry by the contribution from the
element of length that is diametrically opposite to
dL. Thus along the axis
of the loop there is only a zcomponent of magnetic eld:
dB
z
=
0
I
0
4
_
dL
r
2
_
cos =
0
I
0
4
RdL
r
3
.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 133
Figure 4.7: The magnetic eld along the axis of a solenoid L meters long, R
meters in radius, and having N turns per meter.
This expression can be readily integrated because the distance r does not
depend upon position around the circumference of the wire. Thus
B
z
=
0
I
0
4
_
R
r
3
_ _
C
dL =
0
I
0
2
R
2
[z
2
+ R
2
]
3/2
. (4.22)
This expression, together with the principle of superposition, can be used
to calculate the magnetic eld along the axis of a solenoid.
4.3.4 The Magnetic Field along the Axis of a Solenoid.
Consider a coil L meters long that is uniformly wound with N turns/meter.
The magnetic eld at a point on the axis of the coil can be calculated as
the sum of the elds generated by each turn separately using the principle of
superposition. The eld generated by a single turn located at is given by
B
z
=
_
0
I
0
R
2
2
_
1
((z )
2
+ R
2
)
3/2
,
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 134
where I
0
is the current; this follows from eqn.(4.22). The eld generated at
z by the Nd turns contained in the element of length d is given by
dB
z
=
_
0
I
0
R
2
2
_
N
d
((z )
2
+ R
2
)
3/2
.
Upon integration over the total eld becomes
B
z
=
_
0
I
0
R
2
N
2
_ _
L/2
L/2
d
((z )
2
+ R
2
)
3/2
.
This is a standard integral:
B
z
=
_
0
I
0
N
2
_
_
_
([L/2] + z)
_
([L/2] + z)
2
+ R
2
+
([L/2] z)
_
([L/2] z)
2
+ R
2
_
_
. (4.23)
The calculation of the eld strength at an oaxis position is more dif
cult, and must be carried out numerically. In the limit as L becomes very
large, ie.(z/L)1, the z dependence drops out to give
B
z
0
NI
0
_
L/2
_
(L/2)
2
+ R
2
_
0
NI
0
if (R/L) 1 . (4.24)
( Note that N is not the total number of turns on the solenoid but is the
total number of turns divided by the length L.)
4.3.5 The Magnetic Field of an Innite Solenoid.
The eld in an innite solenoid cannot depend upon position along z because
the coil appears the same to a xed observer even if it is shifted along its
axis through any nite interval, z. The current ow in the solenoid turns is
transverse to the solenoid axis, therefore according to the expression (4.16)
for the vector potential,
A must be purely transverse; ie. the vector potential
,
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 135
Figure 4.8: Diagram to illustrate the use of Stokes Theorem to show that
the eld outside an innite solenoid is zero.
and for which these components depend only upon the radial coordinate,r,
has only a zcomponent,
B
z
= curl(
A)
z
=
1
r
(rA
)
r
.
We conclude, therefore, that the magnetic eld can have only one compo
nent, B
z
, and that component can depend only upon the distance r from the
solenoid axis. Further note that everywhere inside the solenoid curl(
B) = 0
from Maxwells equations since there is no free current density and no mag
netization density by hypothesis. But since
B has only a zcomponent that
is independent of and z, its curl has only the component
curl(
B)
=
B
z
r
= 0
and therefore B
z
is independent of the distance from the solenoid axis. A
similar line of argument applies equally to the region outside the solenoid.
It follows from eqn.(4.24), the expression for the eld at the center of a long
solenoid, that the eld everywhere inside an innite solenoid must be given
by
B
z
=
0
NI
0
Teslas . (4.25)
As was shown above, outside the innite solenoid the eld must be a
constant, B
z
= B
1
say. The value of B
1
may be calculated by means of
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 136
Stokes theorem, g.(4.8). Apply Stokes theorem to an area bounded by the
rectangle L long and d wide that is oriented perpendicular to the current
ow in the windings. From Maxwells equations
curl(
B) =
0
J
f
,
since there is no magnetization density and the elds are static. Therefore
__
S
dS curl(
B) n =
0
__
S
dS
J
f
n =
0
NI
0
L .
This last result follows because
J
f
= 0 except on the crosssection of each
wire. But, referring to g.(4.8)
__
S
dS curl(
B) n =
_
C
B
dL = B
z
L B
1
L .
The sides of the loop d meters long contribute nothing because they are
perpendicular to the magnetic eld. It can therefore be concluded that
(B
z
B
1
) =
0
NI
0
. (4.26)
But inside the solenoid the eld is B
z
=
0
NI
0
, and eqn.(4.26) then requires
that the eld outside the solenoid be zero. The elds generated by an
innitely long solenoid are zero everywhere outside the solenoid,
and a uniform eld parallel with the axis, B
z
=
0
NI
0
, everywhere
inside the solenoid.
4.3.6 The Field generated by a Point Magnetic Dipole.
Consider a current loop of radius a meters centered on the origin and lying in
the xy plane as shown in g.(4.9). For simplicity, let the point of observation,
P, lie in the yz plane; this assumption involves no loss of generality because
the vector potential and the eld must be independent of angle around the
zaxis. The contribution of the line element
dL = a d[sin u
x
+ cos u
y
]
to the vector potential at P(0,Y,Z) is
dA
P
=
0
I
0
4
dL

R a 
=
0
I
0
4
ad
(sin u
x
+ cos u
y
)

R a 
.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 137
Figure 4.9: Calculation of the vector potential generated by a current loop
of radius a carrying a current of I
0
Amps.
As usual u
x
and u
y
are unit vectors directed along x and y.

R a =
_
a
2
cos
2
+ [Y a sin ]
2
+ Z
2
,
or

R a = R
_
1
2aYsin
R
2
+
a
2
R
2
,
where R
2
= Y
2
+ Z
2
. Using the binomial expansion theorem along with the
condition (a/R) 1 one nds, to rst order in (a/R),
dA
P
=
0
I
0
4
ad
R
(sin u
x
+ cos u
y
)
_
1 +
aYsin
R
2
_
.
Integrate over the angle from = 0 to = 2. The integrals over sin ,
cos , and sin cos all vanish. However, the integral over sin
2
gives .
Thus
A
P
will have only a component parallel with the xaxis for the above
choice of P lying in the YZ plane at (0,Y,Z):
A
x
=
0
4
_
a
2
I
0
_
Y
R
3
.
This result indicates, because of the symmetry around the zaxis, that in
spherical polar coordinates the vector potential has only one component,
A
. Let m = a
2
I
0
; then
A
=
0
4
msin
R
2
.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 138
In vector notation this result can be written
A
dip
=
0
4
_
m
R
_
R
3
Tesla meters , (4.27)
where  m = I
0
A, and A = a
2
, the area of the current loop. It can be
shown that this same result is obtained for any small current loop, whatever
its shape may be, in the limit as the dimensions of the loop become very
small compared with the distance to the point of observation, R.
It is simple, but tedious, to show that the magnetic eld corresponding
to eqn.(4.27) is given by
B
dip
= curl(
A
dip
) =
0
4
_
3[ m
R]
R
R
5
m
R
3
_
. (4.28)
This result can best be obtained by calculating the curl using cartesian co
ordinates. Eqn.(4.28) for the magnetic eld generated by a magnetic point
dipole has exactly the same form as eqn.(1.22), the electric eld produced by
an electric point dipole.
4.3.7 A Long Uniformly Magnetized Rod.
Let a cylindrical rod be magnetized uniformly along its axis. Inside the
rod the magnetization density, M
z
= M
0
, is independent of position, ie.
M
z
/r = 0, M
z
/ = 0, and M
z
/z = 0. Therefore, curl(
M) = 0 ev
erywhere inside the rod. Similarly, curl(
M)
= M
z
/r: the radial component of curl(
M):
curl(
M)
=
M
z
r
= M
0
(r R) .
where (r R) is the Dirac function that vanishes except at the radius
r=R. The quantity curl(
M) is equivalent to a real current density as far as
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 139
Figure 4.10: A long cylindrical rod magnetized along the axis.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 140
Figure 4.11: A uniformly magnetized disc.
producing a magnetic eld is concerned. The above surface current density
produces exactly the same magnetic elds as a surface current sheet having
a strength of M
0
Amps/meter; in terms of the windings on a solenoid, it is
equivalent to N turns/meter carrying a current of I
0
Amps where NI
0
= M
0
Amps/meter. The eld inside a uniformly magnetized rod is given by the
innite solenoid formula, eqn.(4.25),
B
z
=
0
M
0
Teslas . (4.29)
Unfortunately this eld is not accessible. The eld outside an innitely long
magnetized rod is zero.
4.3.8 A Uniformly Magnetized Disc.
The discontinuity in the tangential component of the magnetization density
at the surfaces of a uniformly magnetized disc produces an eective surface
current density that sets up a magnetic eld whose distribution is exactly
equivalent to the eld set up by a solenoid of the same length. The strength
of the eective current sheet is M
0
Amps/meter, and is equivalent to N
turns/meter carrying I
0
Amps, where NI
0
= M
0
. This can be shown using
Stokes Theorem applied to a small loop of area A that spans the surface of
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 141
the disc as shown in g.(4.11). The eld along the axis of a disc of thickness
L
d
is given by eqn.(4.23) applied to this case :
B
z
=
0
M
0
2
_
_
[(L
d
/2) +z]
_
[(L
d
/2) +z]
2
+ R
2
+
[(L
d
/2) z]
_
[(L
d
/2) z]
2
+ R
2
_
_
. (4.30)
The eld generated by a uniformly magnetized disc having a nite thickness
is accessible at points outside the disc. The strength of the eld at the center
of the disc surface at r=0 is given by
B
z
=
0
M
0
L
d
2
1
_
L
2
d
+ R
2
Teslas .
Permanent magnets are available for which
0
M
0
1 Tesla. The external
elds produced by such magnets can be quite large the order of 0.2 Teslas
or greater.
4.4 A Second Approach to Magnetostatics.
When time variations of the source terms can be neglected we have seen that
Maxwells equations for the magnetostatic eld become
div(
B) = 0 (4.31)
curl(
B) =
0
_
J
f
+curl(
M)
_
. (4.32)
The auxillary vector
H was introduced in chapter(1), section(1.4), through
the relation
B =
0
_
H +
M
_
. (4.33)
When (4.33) is used in (4.31) and (4.32) to replace
B by
H the result is
curl(
H) =
J
f
(4.34)
div(
H) = div(
M) . (4.35)
For problems in which there is no free current density,
J
f
, these equations
reduce to
curl(
H) = 0 , (4.36)
div(
H) = div(
M) =
M
. (4.37)
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 142
The form of these equations for the eld
H is exactly the same as the form of
Maxwells equations for the electrostatic eld in the absence of a free charge
density, ie. (see section(2.1)
curl(
E) = 0 ,
div(
E) =
1
0
div(
P) =
b
0
.
The analogy between these equations for the electrostatic eld and the above
equations for the magnetic eld,
H, in a current free region suggests that
H
can be obtained from a magnetic potential function, V
M
;
H = grad(V
M
).
Notice that if there are no free currents, curlH=0, and therefore in the
absence of a current density the tangential components of H must
be continuous everywhere. The truth of this statement can be demon
strated by means of an application of Stokes theorem, section(1.3.4). The
argument is the same as that used to derive eqn.(2.22) which states that the
tangential component of the electrostatic eld must be continuous across a
boundary. In the electrostatic case continuity of the tangential component
of E can be guaranteed by the requirement that the electrostatic potential
function be continuous. In the equivalent magnetostatic case the continuity
of the tangential component of H is guaranteed by the requirement that the
magnetostatic potential function, V
M
, be continuous across a boundary.
The machinery that was set up in Chapter(2) to calculate the electrostatic
eld from a given charge distribution can be taken over intact to calculate
the magnetostatic eld from a given magnetic charge density distribution,
M
, where
M
= div(
M) . (4.38)
From now on eqn.(4.38) will be used to dene what is meant by the
term magnetic charge density. There is no real magnetic charge density;
to this date (2004) no one has been able to discover a magnetic monopole,
the magnetic analogue of an electric charge. If a magnetic monopole were to
be discovered it would have the units of Ampmeters, and it would produce
a eld
H =
1
4
q
m
r
2
_
r
r
_
Amps/meter ,
by analogy with the electrostatic case, where q
m
is the strength of the mag
netic charge.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 143
If curl(
H = grad(V
M
) . (4.39)
Eqn.(4.39) guarantees that curl(
2
V
M
=
M
. (4.40)
By analogy with the electrostatic case, eqn.(2.11), the particular solution for
the magnetic potential can be written
V
M
(
R) =
1
4
___
Space
dVol
M
(r)

R r 
. (4.41)
In the application of eqn.(4.41) it must be remembered that a discontinuity
in the normal component of the magnetization,
M, will produce a surface
density of magnetic charges just as a discontinuity in the normal compo
nent of the electric dipole moment,
P, produces a surface density of bound
electric charges, Chapter(2), section(2.3.3). The magnetic surface charge
density contributes to the magnetic potential, V
M
(
J
f
= curl(
M) = 0 everywhere, so that
M
= 0 every
where. There are no surface charge densities because there are no discontinu
ities in the normal component of
M. This means that the magnetic potential
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 144
must be independent of position, see eqn.(4.41), and thus
H = grad(V
M
) = 0 .
But by denition
H =
_
B
M
_
,
therefore if
H = 0 it follows that
B =
0
H +
M
_
this means that, for a disc having an innite radius, the eld
B is zero both
inside and outside the disc. This conclusion is in agreement with eqn.(4.30)
in which the eld
B was calculated along the axis from the equivalent surface
current density on the edge of the disc. Notice that the normal component
of B is continuous across the interface between the outside and inside of the
magnet. It is a general consequence of the Maxwell equation div(
B) = 0
that the normal component of
B must be continuous across any
interface.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 145
Figure 4.12: A uniformly magnetized disc. The discontinuities in the normal
component of the magnetization generate an eective magnetic surface charge
density on the front and back surfaces of the disc.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 146
4.4.3 A Uniformly Magnetized Ellipsoid.
The results of section(2.7.4) for a uniformly polarized ellipsoid can be taken
over for the magnetic case because of the similarity between the equations
for the electrostatic eld,
E, and those for the magnetic eld,
H, in a current
free region. Consider the ellipsoid whose surface is described by
_
x
a
_
2
+
_
y
b
_
2
+
_
z
c
_
2
= 1 .
Let the components of the magnetization in the principle axis system be M
x
,
M
y
, M
z
. There exist demagnetizing coecients, N
H(r) =
1
4
_
3[ m r]r
r
5
m
r
3
_
. (4.45)
The components of this eld when written in the spherical polar coordinate
system are (see g.(4.13))
H
r
=
2m
4
cos
r
3
, (4.46)
H
=
m
4
sin
r
3
,
H
= 0 .
The components of
B are obtained from the components of
H by multi
plying by the permeability of free space,
0
. The resulting expressions are
exactly the same as the ones obtained earlier, eqn.(4.28), from the vector po
tential for a point dipole, eqn.(4.27). Thus, the eld due to a magnetic point
dipole can be calculated either from a magnetic vector potential or from a
magnetic scalar potential.
The magnetic scalar potential corresponding to a given distribution of
magnetization density can be calculated by superposition using the magnetic
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 148
Figure 4.13: A magnetic point dipole oriented along the zaxis.
potential due to a point dipole, eqn.(4.44), see g.(4.14). The element of vol
ume, d, has associated with it a magnetic dipole moment m =
M(r)d. This
contributes to the magnetic scalar potential at point P(X,Y,Z) an amount
given by
dV
P
(
R) =
1
4
M(r) [
R r]

R r 
3
d . (4.47)
Sum eqn.(4.47) over the entire magnetization distribution to obtain
V
P
(
R) =
1
4
___
Space
d
M(r) [
R r]

R r 
3
. (4.48)
The potential calculated using eqn.(4.48) will give the same elds as that
calculated from the equivalent magnetic charge distribution and eqn.(4.41)
which is based upon the superposition of the magnetic potentials generated
by ctitious point magnetic charges. The proof that the potential calculated
in these two dierent ways is the same, except, possibly for a constant, is
based on the identity
div
_
M

R r 
_
=
div(
M)

R r 
+
M grad
_
1

R r 
_
.
CHAPTER 4. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (I) 149
Figure 4.14: The calculation of the magnetic scalar potential for a given
distribution of magnetization density,
M(r), using superposition and the po
tential function for a point magnetic dipole.
The argument proceeds in exactly the same fashion as for the analogous
electrostatic case; see Chpt.(2), section(2.8).
Chapter 5
The Magnetostatic Field (II)
Magnetostatic Boundary Value Problems for a Linear, Isotropic,
Magnetic Material.
5.1 Introduction: Sources in a Uniform Per
meable Material.
The equations of magnetostatics are given by eqn.(4.2)
div(
B) = 0 ,
and eqn.(4.3)
curl(
B) =
0
_
J
f
+curl(
M)
_
.
( refer to section(4.1)). For a linear, isotropic, magnetic medium
B is pro
portional to
H where the factor of proportionality is called the permeability.
B =
H =
0
_
H +
M
_
,
so that
M =
_
0
1
_
H ,
or
M = (
r
1)
H . (5.1)
150
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 151
In eqn.(5.1)
r
= /
0
is the relative permeability. The second of the above
Maxwells equations can be rewritten in the form
curl(
H) =
J
f
,
or
curl(
B) =
J
f
. (5.2)
The substitution
B = curl(
A) =
J
f
. (5.3)
If in addition one chooses
div(
A) = 0 , (5.4)
then
A =
J
f
, (5.5)
and this equation has the particular solution
A(
R) =
4
___
Space
d
J
f
(r)

R r 
, (5.6)
where d is an element of volume. This developement exactly follows the
procedure described in Chpt.(4); the only dierence is that the integration
in eqn.(5.6) is carried out over the free current density distribution, and the
elds due to the eective current density curl(
A
P
=
I
4
_
Wire

dL
 r 
, (5.7)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 152
where r is the vector from the element of length
dL to the point P where the
vector potential
A is to be calculated. From
B = curl(
A) one obtains
B(r) =
I
4
_
Wire
dL r
 r 
3
. (5.8)
These formulae are very similar to eqns.(4.16) and (4.17) of Chpt.(4). The
elds corresponding to the standard problems of a long straight wire, the eld
along the axis of a circular loop, and along the axis of a nite solenoid are
given by eqns.(4.21),(4.22), and (4.23) where the permeability of free space,
0
, is replaced by the permeability . In particular, the eld of an innite
solenoid that is lled with a magnetic material is given by
B = NI , (5.9)
where N is the number of turns per meter.
5.2 Calculation of oaxis Fields.
It is relatively easy to calculate the magnetic eld along the symmetry axis of
an axially symmetric coil system using the law of BiotSavart, eqn.(5.8). The
calculation can be easily carried out because the magnetic eld has only one
component, an axial component, and the cylindrical symmetry makes the
integration over the current distribution relatively simple. M.W.Garrett has
pointed out that oaxis elds can be readily calculated from the magnetic
scalar potential ( M.W.Garrett, J.Appl.Phys.22,10911107(1951); Axially
Symmetric Systems for Generating and Measuring Magnetic Fields. Part
I). In any currentfree region
curl(
H) = 0
and therefore one can write
H = grad(V
m
) , (5.10)
where V
m
is a scalar function of position. In a uniform medium for which
B =
B) = 0 can be rewritten as
div(
H) = 0 . (5.11)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 153
It follows from eqn.(5.10) that the magnetic scalar potential must satisfy
LaPlaces equation in any region free of currents. In spherical polar co
ordinates LaPlaces equation is written
1
r
2
r
_
r
2
V
m
r
_
+
1
r
2
sin
_
sin
V
m
_
+
1
r
2
sin
2
2
V
m
2
= 0 . (5.12)
The magnetic scalar potential cannot depend upon the azimuthal angle for
an axially symmetric coil system, so that
2
V
m
= 0 reduces to
1
r
2
r
_
r
2
V
m
r
_
+
1
r
2
sin
_
sin
V
m
_
= 0 . (5.13)
The general solution of this equation can be written as a series expansion in
Legendre polynomials:
V
m
=
n=0
_
a
n
r
n
+
b
n
r
n+1
_
P
n
(cos ) . (5.14)
This is the same expansion as was used for the electrostatic potential in
Chpt.(3),section(3.2.1(d)) to treat the problem of a dielectric sphere in a
uniform applied electric eld. The functions P
n
(x) are Legendre polynomials,
the rst ve of which are listed in Table(3.2). The terms proportional to
1/r
n+1
in the expansion (5.14) are not acceptable for describing the magnetic
potential function for a system of axially symmetric coils because they blow
up at r=0; there are no singularities in the magnetic eld along the axis of
the coil system. This means that the magnetic potential must be describable
by the series
V
m
=
n=1
a
n
r
n
P
n
(cos ) . (5.15)
(The n=0 term corresponds to a constant; it is not important and may
be set equal to zero because any constant may be added to V
m
without
changing the magnetic eld). Along the axis of the coil system, the zaxis
of the spherical polar coordinate system, the angle is xed; cos =+1 for
the region z > 0 and cos =1 for the region z < 0. Moreover,along the
axis of the coil system r = z , so that along the axis eqn.(5.15) becomes a
power series in z. The magnetic eld calculated from this power series may be
compared term by term with the power series for the magnetic eld calculated
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 154
Figure 5.1: A circular loop of radius R carrying a current of I Amps and
lying in the xy plane.
directly from the law of BiotSavart. The comparison of the two series yields
values for the coecients a
n
that appear in the expansion for the magnetic
potential, eqn.(5.15). Once the coecients a
n
have been determined the
magnetic eld at any point within the coil system can be readily calculated
from
H = grad(V
m
).
This procedure can be illustrated for a single loop of wire lying in the xy
plane, g.(5.1). The magnetic eld along the axis of such a loop is given by
B
z
=
I R
2
2
1
(z
2
+ R
2
)
3/2
, (5.16)
see eqn.(4.22) of Chpt.(4). This expression can be expanded in a Taylor seies
in the variable z:
B
z
(z) = B
z
(0) +
_
dB
z
dz
_
z=0
z +
_
d
2
B
z
dz
2
_
z=0
_
z
2
2
_
+
+
_
d
3
B
z
dz
3
_
z=0
_
z
3
6
_
+ +
_
d
n
B
z
dz
n
_
z=0
_
z
n
n!
_
+ (5.17)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 155
For the single current loop of g.(5.1) this Taylors series becomes
B
z
(z) =
_
I
2R
__
1
3
2
_
z
R
_
2
+
45
24
_
z
R
_
4
+
_
. (5.18)
Notice that this series contains only even powers of (z/R) because the mag
netic eld is symmetric with respect to the plane of the coil, i.e. B
z
(z) =
B
z
(z). Now B
z
(z) is derived from the magnetic potential function through a
dierentiation with respect to z:
B
z
(z) =
V
m
z
,
and therefore the series expansion along z for the magnetic potential that
corresponds to the magnetic eld expansion (5.18) is given by
V
m
(z) =
I
2
_
z
R
1
2
_
z
R
_
3
+
9
24
_
z
R
_
5
+
_
. (5.19)
The series (5.19) must be compared with the general series eqn.(5.15) using
r=z and cos = 1, i.e. with
V
m
(z, 0) = a
1
zP
1
(1) + a
2
z
2
P
2
(1) + a
3
z
3
P
3
(1) +
+a
4
z
4
P
4
(1) + a
5
z
5
P
5
(1) + (5.20)
It is clear from this comparison that the coecients of all the even terms
must be zero. The Legendre polynomials are normalized so that P
n
(1) = 1
( see Table(3.2), section(3.2.1(d))). It follows from a comparison of (5.20)
with (5.19) that
a
1
=
I
2R
,
a
3
=
I
2
_
1
2R
3
_
,
a
5
=
I
2
_
9
24R
5
_
, etc.
The rst three terms in the expansion for the potential function, valid for
any point in space such that (r/R) < 1, are given by
V
m
(r, ) =
I
2
_
_
r
R
_
P
1
(cos )
1
2
_
r
R
_
3
P
3
(cos ) +
9
24
_
r
R
_
5
P
5
(cos ) +
_
,
(5.21)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 156
where
P
1
(x) = x ,
P
3
(x) =
1
2
_
5x
3
3x
_
,
and
P
5
(x) =
1
8
_
63x
5
70x
3
+ 15x
_
;
( see Schaums Outline Series: Mathematical Handbook, by Murray R.
Spiegel, McGrawHill,N.Y., 1968)). The components of the magnetic eld
can be calculated from
B
r
=
V
m
r
,
and
B
=
1
r
V
m
.
These elds can be calculated very readily for particular values of r, by
means of a modern digital computer; programs for calculating Legendre poly
nomials and their derivatives are readily available.
5.3 A Discontinuity in the Permeability.
Problems that involve currents embedded in materials for which the perme
ability varies from place to place are very dicult even if all of those materials
exhibit linear response. Such problems can usually be solved by successive
approximations: (1) the elds are calculated as if the source currents are
immersed in a uniform permeable medium; (2) the resulting magnetization
distribution is calculated from eqn.(5.1) using the actual permeabilities; (3)
the elds due to the eective current distribution
J
eff
= curl(M) are added
to the elds previously calculated; (4) the resulting total eld is used to
calculate a new magnetization distribution; (5) the cycle is repeated until
adequate convergence has been secured, i.e. until the input eld and the
output eld are essentially the same.
There is a class of magnetic problems that are very similar to electro
static problems. In a region of space that is current free it is appropriate
to use a magnetic scalar potential because curl(H) = 0. In any region in
which the permeability does not depend upon position B = H and there
fore div(H) = 0 because div(B) = 0; in such a region the magnetic scalar
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 157
potential, V
m
, must satisfy LaPlaces equation. The magnetic potential must
also satisfy boundary conditions at a surface of discontinuity between regions
which are characterized by dierent permeabilities. These boundary condi
tions are:
(1)) V
m
must be continuous across the interface between two materials. This
condition is a consequence of curl(
B) =
0; the continuity of the normal component of B can be deduced using Gauss
theorem. In terms of the permeabilities one has
1
_
V
1
m
n
_
Boundary
=
2
_
V
2
m
n
_
Boundary
, (5.22)
where
V
m
n
is the derivative of the magnetic potential along the normal to
the interface. These two boundary conditions are essentially the same as the
boundary conditions imposed upon the electrostatic potential function. In
addition, the magnetic potential must exhibit the proper behaviour at inn
ity and at the origin just like the electrostatic potential. The electrostatic
potential and the magnetic potential both satisfy LaPlaces equation, and
both satisfy similar boundary conditions; it follows that similar problems
must have correspondingly similar solutions. In particular, the magnetic po
tential functions for a sphere in a uniform applied eld, and for a cylinder in a
uniform eld applied transverse to the cylinder axis must have the same form
as those for the corresponding electrostatic problems discussed in Chpt.(3),
sections(3.2.1 (c) and (d)) and gs.(3.5) and (3.6). For the magnetic case see
gs.(5.2 and 5.3).
5.3.1 A Permeable Sphere in a Uniform Magnetic Field.
The potential function inside the sphere is given by
V
i
m
=
3
_
1
_
H
0
_
1 + 2
_
1
__ r cos . (5.23)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 158
Figure 5.2: A permeable sphere placed in a uniform magnetic Held of
strength H
0
Amps/meter. The permeability of the sphere is
1
, and it is
placed in a medium having a permeability
2
.
This corresponds to a uniform magnetic eld along the zaxis. The potential
function outside the sphere is given by
V
o
m
= H
0
r cos +
(1 (
2
/
1
))
(1 + 2(
2
/
1
))
R
3
H
0
cos
r
2
. (5.24)
This corresponds to a uniform magnetic eld, H
0
, plus the eld of a point
dipole located at the center of the sphere and having a strength
m =
(1 [
2
/
1
])
(1 + 2[
2
/
1
])
4R
3
H
0
Amp m
2
.
5.3.2 An Innitely Long permeable Cylinder in a Uni
form Magnetic Field.
The potential function inside the cylinder is given by
V
i
m
=
2 (
2
/
1
) H
0
(1 + (
2
/
1
))
r cos . (5.25)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 159
Figure 5.3: An innitely long permeable cylinder, radius R, placed in a
uniform transverse magnetic eld, H
0
Amps/meter. The axis of the cylinder
is oriented along the zaxis. The permeability of the cylinder is
1
and the
cylinder is immersed in a medium whose permeability is
2
.
This corresponds to a uniform eld along the xaxis, parallel with the applied
magnetic eld. The potential function outside the cylinder is given by
V
o
m
= H
0
r cos +
(1 [
2
/
1
])
(1 + [
2
/
1
])
H
0
R
2
cos
r
. (5.26)
This corresponds to a uniform magnetic eld, H
0
, plus the eld due to a line
of dipoles located on the cylinder axis and having a strength
m = 2R
2
H
0
;
(1 [
2
/
1
])
(1 + [
2
/
1
])
H
0
R
2
cos
r
.
5.3.3 A Point Magnetic Dipole Near a Permeable Plane.
There are no magnetic point charges, nevertheless the eld of a point dipole
can be considered to have its origin in two magnetic poles that are very close
together. This suggests that the problem of a magnetic dipole near the plane
interface between two magnetically dissimilar materials may be treated by the
method of images by analogy with the corresponding electrostatic problem:
see section(3.2.2(a) and (b)). The potential function for a magnetic point
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 160
charge of strength q
m
is given by
V
m
=
q
m
4
_
1
r
_
and the corresponding magnetic eld,
H, generated by a hypothetical point
magnetic charge of strength q
m
is given by the Coulomb law
H =
q
m
4
_
r
r
3
_
. (5.27)
The corresponding eld B is given by
B =
q
m
4
_
r
r
3
_
. (5.28)
Eqn.(5.27) can be used to calculate the magnetic eld generated by a
magnetic dipole. Let a magnetic charge q
m
be located at x=0, y=0, and
z=d/2. Let a second magnetic charge q
m
be located at x=0, y=0, and z=
d/2. This pair of charges forms a magnetic dipole of strength m=qd oriented
along the zaxis and positioned at z=0. The magnetic eld of the dipole is
given by (using eqn.(5.27))
H =
q
m
4
(x u
x
+ y u
y
+ (z d/2) u
z
)
(x
2
+ y
2
+ (z d/2)
2
)
3/2
q
m
4
(x u
x
+ y u
y
+ (z + d/2) u
z
)
(x
2
+ y
2
+ (z + d/2)
2
)
3/2
,
or in the limit as d 0 the expression for the magnetic eld can be written
H =
1
4
_
3( m r)r
r
5
m
r
3
_
. (5.29)
Using
B =
1
) / (
2
+
1
) located the
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 161
Figure 5.4: A ctitious magnetic point charge, q
m
, located outside the plane
boundary between two permeable materials. The permeability to the left of
the boundary is
1
. The permeability on the right hand side of the boundary
is
2
. The magnetic charge is located a distance d from the interface. The
other two magnetic charges, q
m
and q
m
0
= m
0
_
2
+
1
_
. The im
age dipole used for calculating elds on the right of the plane boundary is
m
= 2m
0
_
1
2
+
1
_
. (N.B. the dipole strength is given by m
0
= q
m
d where d
is the small separation between the plus and minus magnetic charges, NOT
the distance d between the dipole and the interface at z=0.)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 163
same distance behind the interface as q
m
is located in front of the interface.
The eld in the right hand space, permeability
2
, is the eld due to a
magnetic charge that is located at the same place as q
m
but whose strength
is 2q
m
1
/ (
2
+
1
). It is easy to show that the elds in the two regions
are such that the components of H parallel with the interface are continuous
across the interface. It is also easy to show that the normal components of H
in the two regions is such that at the interface
1
(
H)
n
=
2
(
H)
n
so that the
normal component of
B is continuous across the interface. Notice that the
image charge is the negative of q
m
for the case
2
>
1
, but that the image
charge has the same sign as q
m
when
2
<
1
. The eld on the left of the
interface is given by
H
L
=
q
m
4
_
r
1
r
3
1
_
q
m
4
_
2
+
1
__
r
2
r
3
2
_
.
The eld on the right side of the interface is given by
H
R
=
1
4
_
2q
m
2
+
1
__
r
1
r
3
1
_
.
This point charge solution can be extended by means of superposition to
treat the problem of a magnetic dipole near a plane interface, g.(5.5). The
eld on the left, in the region of permeability
1
, is due to the dipole plus
its image as shown in the gure. The elds in the region on the left due to
the image dipole can be used to calculate the force and torque on the real
dipole. The force on a magnetic monopole is given by
F = q
m
B , (5.30)
The force on the magnetic dipole is just the sum of the forces acting on the
two monopoles that make up the dipole: the dipole force is proportional to
the eld gradientr at the position of the dipole. The torque exerted on a
magnetic dipole is given by
T = m
B . (5.31)
If
2
>
1
the magnetic dipole is attracted to the interface. Clearly this
treatment can be generalized to discuss any permanently magnetized body
located near a plane interface between two linear magnetic materials: the
solution can be obtained as the superposition of the elds generated by the
elementary dipoles of which the body is composed.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 164
Figure 5.6: The image problem for the case of a line current of I Amps
running parallel with the plane interface between two permeable materials
and located a distance d from the interface.
5.3.4 A Wire Parallel with an Interface and carrying
a Current of I Amps.
Another problem that can be solved using the method of images is that of
a thin wire carrying a current, and oriented parallel with the plane interface
between two dierent permeable regions as shown in g.(5.6). The eld in
the region on the left is ascribed to the real current I plus an image current
I located the same distance, d, to the right of the interface as the real
current is located to the left of the interface. Any point P on the interface
is equidistant from both the current I and its image, I; let that distance
be R. Let the line joining the position of the current to the point P on the
interface make an angle with the normal to the interface, as shown in
g.(5.6). The eld lines generated by a long straight current carrying wire
form concentric cylinders around the wire, and the strength of the eld in free
space is given by B
=
0
I/2R, where R is the distance from the wire; see
Chpt.(4), eqn.(4.21). This corresponds to an Held H
= I/2R Amps/m.
The component of the magnetic eld,
H, parallel to the interface that is
generated by the current I and its image I in g.(5.6) is given by
H
1

parallel
=
1
2R
_
I cos I
cos
_
. (5.32)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 165
The eld component normal to the interface is given by
H
1

normal
=
1
2R
_
I sin + I
sin
_
. (5.33)
Let the eld in the region of space to the right of the interface be generated
by an image current I located at the position of the real current I. The
magnetic eld component parallel with the interface generated by I is given
by
H
2

parallel
=
1
2R
I
cos , (5.34)
and its normal component is given by
H
2

normal
=
1
2R
I
sin , (5.35)
The tangential component of H must be continuous across the interface, and
therefore from eqns.(5.32 and 5.34)
I I
= I
. (5.36)
The normal component of
B must be continuous across the interface so
that from eqns.(5.33 and 5.35) one nds
1
_
I + I
_
=
2
I
. (5.37)
The linear equations (5.36 and 5.37) can be solved to obtain the required
image current strengths.The results are
I
=
_
2
+
1
_
I , (5.38)
and
I
=
2I
1
(
2
+
1
)
. (5.39)
The
H eld in the space to the left of the interface is that generated by the
current I plus the image current I. The
H eld to the right of the interface
is that generated by the image current I.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 166
5.4 The Magnetostatic Field Energy.
Energy is required to establish a magnetic eld. The energy density stored
in a magnetostatic eld established in a linear isotropic material is given by
W
B
=
2
H
2
=
B
2
Joules/m
3
. (5.40)
The total energy stored in the magnetostatic eld is obtained by integrating
the energy density, W
B
, over all space (the element of volume is d):
U
B
=
___
Space
d
_
B
2
_
. (5.41)
This expression for the total energy, U
B
, can be transformed into an integral
over the sources of the magnetostatic eld. The transformation can be carried
out by means of the vector identity
div(
H) =
H (
A)
A (
H) . (5.42)
(There is a nice discussion of this identity in The Feynman Lectures on
Physics, Vol.II, section 27.3, by R.P.Feynman, R.B.Leighton, and M.Sands,
AddisonWesley, Reading, Mass.,1964). Proceed by integrating eqn.(5.42)
over all space, then use Gauss theorem to transform the left hand side into
a surface integral. The result is
__
Surface
(
H) d
S =
___
V olume
d
_
J
f
A
_
, (5.43)
where d
A), and
H = curl(
H) =
J
f
. Here
A is the vector potential and
J
f
is the current
density. When the integrals in eqn.(5.43) are extended over all space the
surface integral goes to zero: the surface area of a sphere of large radius R is
proportional to R
2
but for currents conned to a nite region of space 
A 
must decrease at least as fast as a dipole source, i.e. 1/R
2
, and 
H 
must decrease at least as fast as 1/R
3
. It follows that in the large R limit
the surface integral must go to zero like 1/R
3
. This requires the two terms
on the right hand side of (5.43) to be equal, and this result can be used to
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 167
rewrite the expression (5.41) in terms of the vector potential and the source
current density:
U
B
=
1
2
___
Space
d
_
B
_
=
1
2
___
Space
d
_
J
f
A
_
. (5.44)
In many problems the current density is conned to a wire whose dimensions
are small compared with other lengths in the problem. For such a circuit
the contribution to the second volume integral in (5.44) vanishes except for
points within the wire, and therefore the volume integral can be replaced
by a line integral along the wire providing that the variation of the vector
potential,
A, over the crosssection of the wire can be neglected. For a wire
of negligible thickness
___
Space
d
_
J
f
A
_
I
_
C
A d
L , (5.45)
where I is the current through the wire; the current must be the same, of
course, at all points along the circuit. The line integral of the vector potential
around a closed circuit is equal to the magnetic ux, , through the circuit.
This equivalence can be seen by using the denition
B = curl(
A) along with
Stokes theorem to transform the integral for the ux:
=
__
S
B d
S =
__
S
curl(
A) d
S =
_
C
A d
L , (5.46)
where the curve C bounds the surface S. Combining eqns.(5.46) and (5.44),
the magnetic energy associated with a single circuit can be written
U
B
=
1
2
___
Space
d
_
J
f
A
_
=
1
2
I , (5.47)
and for a number of circuits, N,
U
B
=
1
2
N
k=1
I
k
k
. (5.48)
The latter expression is similar to eqn.(3.59) for the electrostatic energy asso
ciated with a collection of charged conductors: currents in the magnetostatic
case play a role similar to that of charges in the electrostatic case, and ux
plays a role that is similar to the role played by the potentials.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 168
Figure 5.7: N circuits embedded in a linear, isotropic medium. The magnetic
uxes,
k
are linear functions of the currents I
j
. The inductance coecients
satisfy the symmetry relations L
MN
= L
NM
.
5.5 Inductance Coecients.
Consider N circuits embedded in a linear, isotropic medium characterized by
a permeability . The magnetic ux through a given circuit will depend upon
the currents in all of the circuits. However, the magnetic eld generated by
the current in a particular circuit will be a linear function of the current in
that circuit; if the current is doubled then the magnetic eld due to that
current will also be doubled because Maxwells equations are linear in the
current density. Since the magnetic eld at any point is a linear function
of the currents it follows that the ux through each circuit must be a linear
function of the currents: i.e.
1
= L
11
I
1
+ L
12
I
2
+ + L
1N
I
N
(5.49)
2
= L
21
I
1
+ L
22
I
2
+ + L
2N
I
N
.
.
.
N
= L
N1
I
1
+ L
N2
I
2
+ + L
NN
I
N
.
The coecients L
MN
are called coecients of induction. They have units of
Henries.
The magnetostatic energy, eqn.(5.48), can be written in terms of the
current in each circuit and the induction coecients. The magnetic energy
must be independent of the order in which the circuit currents attains their
nal values. This condition requires that
L
MN
= L
NM
. (5.50)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 169
Figure 5.8: A system consisting of a primary coil carrying a current I
p
and
a secondary coil consisting of a single turn of wire enclosing an area A m
2
.
There are, therefore, only N(N+1)/2 independent induction coecients
rather than N
2
of them. This symmetry property of the induction coecients
can be used to determine the ux produced in a coil system by a magnetized
body. Consider a primary coil system carrying a current I
p
. Let there be a
small secondary coil as shown in g.(5.8). The magnetic eld produced by
the primary coil at the position of the secondary coil is
B
z
= K I
p
Teslas ,
K is just a constant that depends upon the geometry of the primary coil.
If the area of the secondary coil is A, supposed to be very small, the ux
through the secondary coil due to the primary current is given by
s
= B
z
A = KAI
p
, (5.51)
and therefore the relevant inductance coecient, L
sp
, is
L
sp
= KA . (5.52)
But this means that the ux through the primary coil system due to a current
I
s
in the secondary coil is given by
p
= L
ps
I
s
= L
sp
I
s
= KAI
s
.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 170
The small secondary coil carrying a current I
s
constitutes a magnetic moment
m
z
= I
s
A Ampm
2
. It follows that a magnetic dipole m
z
produces a ux
through a primary coil system given by
p
= Km
z
, (5.53)
where the coil system produces the eld B
z
= KI
p
Teslas at the position of
the magnetic moment. If the eld produced by the coil system is uniform over
a magnetic body it follows from the principle of superposition that the ux
produced in the coil system by the body is proportional to its total magnetic
moment. In particular, the ux through an innite solenoid produced by a
magnetic dipole, m, oriented along the solenoid axis is given by
= Nm , (5.54)
if the system is immersed in a medium whose permeability is . In most
applications can be taken to be the permeability of free space,
0
.
5.6 Forces on Magnetic Circuits.
The induction coecients, eqn.(5.50), are functions of coil position and coil
geometry. If a circuit is moved, or if its shape is altered, the uxes through
all the circuits will be altered. A changing magnetic ux through a circuit
induces an emf in that circuit:
curl(E) =
B
t
,
so that
__
Surface
curl(
E) d
S =
__
Surface
B
t
d
S =
t
__
Surface
B d
S .
But the last term above is just the time rate of change of the magnetic ux,
therefore
__
Surface
curl(
E) d
S =
d
dt
.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 171
Stokes theorem can be used to transform the surface integral of curl(
E) over
the area of a circuit into a line integral of the electric eld around the circuit
contour C:
e =
_
C
E d
L =
d
dt
. (5.55)
In order to be able to use conservation of energy to derive formulae that
relate the forces exerted by the magnetic eld on circuits to the change in
magnetic energy that accompanies any shift in position or distortion in shape
of those circuits, it is useful to consider wires that are made of perfectly super
conducting metals so that resistive losses can be neglected. Magnetic forces
can not depend upon the circuit resistances because these forces depend only
upon the interaction between a current element and the magnetic eld acting
upon that current element. The emf around a closed superconducting loop
must be zero because the electric eld in a perfect conductor must always be
zero; any electric eld strength would produce an innite current. It follows
that the uxes through closed superconducting circuits cannot change. Any
relative motion of the circuits, or any distortion of the circuits, must be ac
companied by changes in their currents such that the uxes remain constant.
In addition, energy must be conserved, and therefore any external work done
by the magnetic forces during a displacement must be at the expense of the
magnetic energy stored in the system
F
M
r = U
B
. (5.56)
The magnetic energy acts like a potential energy function for the magnetic
forces.
Usually it is convenient to arrange to keep the current in each circuit
constant during the circuit motion or deformation. The current can be kept
constant, in principle, by including a superconducting generator in each cir
cuit as is shown in g.(5.9(a)). This is a device by means of which external
electrical work can be done on the circuit. Now the ux through the circuit
can be allowed to change because the electromotive force (emf) due to the
changing ux can be cancelled out by the external emf of the generator so
that the net emf in the system can be maintained at zero. In order to cancel
out the emf due to the changing ux, work must be done on the generator
at the rate
dW
dt
= e
gen
I = eI = I
d
dt
,
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 172
Figure 5.9: A change in ux through a circuit must be accompanied by an
applied emf e = d/dt in order to maintain the current constant.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 173
or the change in ux, d, must be accompanied by an input of external work
(to turn the crank on the generator) such that
dW = Id .
A similar argument can be applied to each circuit of N coupled circuits so
that taken all together the total external energy input through the generators
is
dW =
N
n=1
I
N
d
N
. (5.57)
As mentioned above, the result (5.57) cannot depend upon whether or not
the circuits contain resistance elements. A circuit that contains a resistance
must be provided with a source of emf in order to maintain a constant current
(see g.(5.9(b)). This emf, that can be imagined to be a power supply whose
terminal voltage is variable, must supply energy at the rate of I
2
R Watts,
where R is the circuit resistance. If the ux through the circuit increases the
power supply voltage must be increased by e = d/dt in order to maintain
the current constant. This means that the power extracted from the power
supply must also increase by the amount
dW
dt
= eI = I
d
dt
.
In order to change the ux through the circuit by d at xed current the
power supply must add extra energy in the amount
dW = Id ,
and this clearly does not depend upon whether there is, or is not, resistance
in the circuit. A generalization of this result to a collection of N circuits leads
directly to eqn.(5.57). Any displacement of a circuit, or a deformation of a
circuit, that results in a change of the inductance coecients must result in
a change in the magnetic energy stored in the eld if the current in each of
the circuits is held xed. This energy change is given by
dU
B
=
1
2
N
I
N
d
N
,
see eqn.(5.48). But in view of eqn.(5.57), any ux changes at constant current
that cause the energy stored in the magnetic eld to increase must extract
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 174
twice that energy increase from the external energy sources which do work
on the generators in order to keep the currents constant:
dW = 2dU
B
.
The excess of the work done on the generators, dW, over the energy increase
in the magnetostatic eld, dU
B
, must represent the external work done by
the magnetic forces during the circuit displacement or deformation, therefore
F
M
r = U
B
. (5.58)
At constant currents work expended to keep the currents xed goes one half
into increasing the stored magnetic energy and one half into the work done
by the magnetic forces.
5.6.1 Forces on a Magnetic Dipole.
Let us apply the above ideas to calculate the force on a magnetic dipole.
Consider a magnetic moment located in an inhomogeneous eld that is di
rected along the zaxis . The magnetic moment can be represented as a small
loop carrying a xed current I, see g.(5.10). The magnetic moment of the
loop, IA, is also directed along z. If the loop moves a distance dz along z, the
magnetic eld will change from B to B + (dB
z
/dz)dz. The magnetic energy
of the system is given by
U
B
=
L
11
2
I
2
p
+ L
12
I
p
I +
L
22
2
I
2
.
During the displacement dz only the mutual inductance coecient L
12
changes:
L
11
and L
22
are not altered. The change in magnetic energy due to the dis
placement of the loop at constant currents is given by
dU
B
= I
p
dL
12
I = Id .
But
d = AdB
z
= A
_
dB
z
dz
_
dz ,
therefore
dU
B
= IA
_
dB
z
dz
_
dz .
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 175
Figure 5.10: A magnetic dipole located in an inhomogeneous magnetic eld.
The magnetic moment and the applied eld,
B, are both directed along the
zaxis
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 176
From an application of eqn.(5.58) one can conclude that the magnetic force
on the loop must be
F
z
= IA
_
dB
z
dz
_
= m
z
_
dB
z
dz
_
Newtons. (5.59)
This equation for the force on a dipole was derived using arguments based
upon circuits in which the currents were held xed. However, the valid
ity of the expression for the force does not depend upon the manner of its
derivation, and eqn.(5.59) is correct for any point dipole.
The result (5.59) can be generalized by considering displacements along
x and y. For a magnetic moment that has only a zcomponent the result is
F = m
z
grad(B
z
) .
The total force acting on a magnetic moment that has components along all
three coordinate axes is obtained from a further generalization of the above
arguments. The result is
F = m
x
grad(B
x
) + m
y
grad(B
y
) + m
z
grad(B
z
) . (5.60)
The expression (5.60) can be further transformed by using the fact that
curl(
B =
H. From curl(
B) = 0
B
x
y
=
B
y
x
,
B
x
z
=
B
z
x
,
B
y
z
=
B
z
y
.
Using these relations, eqn.(5.60) can be written in the form
F
x
= m
x
B
x
x
+ m
y
B
x
y
+ m
z
B
x
z
, (5.61)
F
y
= m
x
B
y
x
+ m
y
B
y
y
+ m
z
B
y
z
,
F
z
= m
x
B
z
x
+ m
y
B
z
y
+ m
z
B
z
z
.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 177
or
F =
_
m
grad
_
B . (5.62)
Equations (5.61) are the expressions which would be deuced from a mag
netic point charge model in which the force on a magnetic pole is given by
q
m
F
M
=
_
M
B
x
_
u
x
+
_
M
B
y
_
u
y
+
_
M
B
z
_
u
z
Newtons/m
3
.
Here
M is the magnetization per unit volume.
5.6.2 Torque on a Magnetic Dipole.
Consider a small current loop placed in a uniform magnetic eld generated by
a primary coil system carrying a current I
1
. If the loop is allowed to rotate the
ux linkage between it and the primary coil system changes; however, neither
its own selfinductance coecient, L
22
, nor the selfinductance coecient of
the primary system, L
22
, changes with the angle of rotation, , g.(5.11).
The mutual inductance coecient, L
12
= L
21
, does change with angle, and
therefore a small rotation through d causes a change in the magnetic energy
for xed currents I
1
, I
2
. The change in magnetostatic energy of the system
for a small rotation is given by
dU
B
= I
1
I
2
dL
12
.
The mutual inductance coecient can be calculated from the ux through
the current loop:
2
= (R
2
) B
z
cos = (R
2
K) I
1
cos .
Therefore
L
12
= (R
2
K) cos Henries ,
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 178
Figure 5.11: A loop of wire carrying a current I
2
Amps, and having an
area R
2
, is located in a uniform magnetic eld B
z
. The magnetic eld is
generated by a coil system carrying a current I
1
Amps: B
z
= KI
1
. The eld
exerts a torque on the loop given by T
y
= B
z
msin Newtonmeters.
so that
dL
12
= (R
2
Ksin ) d .
It follows that the change in the magnetostatic energy of the system as a
result of the change in angle is given by
dU
B
= (R
2
I
2
)(KI
1
) sin d .
The change in magnetic energy can be expressed in terms of the magnetic
moment of the loop, m, and the value of the magnetic eld at the position
of the loop (it is assumed that the loop is small enough that the variation of
the magnetic eld across its diameter can be ignored):
dU
B
= B
z
m sin d .
This change in the energy must be equal to the external work done by the
magnetic torque on the loop (eqn.(5.58)); T
y
d = dU
B
, where the torque is
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 179
directed along the yaxis if the rotation takes place in the xz plane, g.(5.11).
Therefore
T
y
= mB
z
sin . (5.63)
The direction of the torque is such as to orient the normal to the plane of
the loop along the direction of the applied magnetic eld: in other words,
the torque is such as to cause both the ux through the loop and the magne
tostatic energy to become as large as possible. The magnetic moment asso
ciated with the loop is perpendicular to the plane of the loop, consequently
eqn.(5.63) can be written in the form
T =
_
m
B
_
. (5.64)
The torque (5.64) can be derived from an eective potential energy
W
B
= m
B Joules , (5.65)
using
T
=
W
B
. (5.66)
Equations (5.65 and 5.66) are particularly useful for treating the problem
of a collection of permanent dipoles (a permanently magnetized body) that
interacts with an applied magnetic eld.
5.6.3 Forces on a Solenoid.
Consider a coil in the form of a very long cylindrical solenoid that is wound
with N turns per meter. The length of the solenoid is L meters, and the
mean radius of the windings is R meters, g.(5.12). The eld at the center
of a very long solenoid is given by eqn.(4.25) of Chpt.(4):
B
z
=
0
NI Teslas , (5.67)
where the coil carries a current of I Amps. The ux through one turn of
the solenoid is AB
z
= R
2
B
z
near the center of the solenoid; neglecting end
eects which play a relatively small role in the limit L/R , the total
ux through all of the windings is the ux per turn multiplied by the total
number of turns
= R
2
B
z
NL ,
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 180
Figure 5.12: A long cylindrical solenoid. The solenoid is L meters long and
has a radius of R meters. It is wound with N turns per meter.
or
=
0
N
2
_
R
2
L
_
I . (5.68)
The magnetic energy stored in the eld is U
B
= I/2 Joules, and therefore
U
B
=
0
2
N
2
I
2
_
R
2
L
_
. (5.69)
In order to discuss magnetic forces it is necessary to consider distortions of
the solenoid; for example, a change in the length or in its diameter. During
those distortions the current will be held xed. The total number of turns on
the solenoid, N
tot
= NL, must also remain xed, and therefore the magnetic
energy will be rewritten in terms of the total number of turns on the winding:
U
B
=
0
N
2
tot
I
2
R
2
2L
. (5.70)
It is apparent from this expression that an increase in solenoid length will
reduce the magnetostatic energy, U
B
. We can conclude that the magnetic
forces on the solenoid windings will act in such a way as to shorten the
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 181
solenoid because any system of coils carrying xed currents will attempt
to arrange themselves so as to maximize the magnetostatic energy of the
system. Similarly, any increase in the solenoid radius results in an increase
in the magnetostatic energy; it can therefore be concluded that the magnetic
forces will place the windings under tension. The magnitude of the magnetic
forces can be obtained from an application of eqn.(5.58) which equates the
work done by the magnetic forces during a small change in geometry to the
increase in magnetic energy. For example, let the length of the solenoid
increase by L; the work done by the magnetic forces is F
M
L. The change
in magnetic energy for a displacement L is
U
B
=
0
2
_
N
2
tot
L
2
_
I
2
R
2
L ;
consequently, from U
B
= F
M
L one nds
F
M
=
_
0
N
2
I
2
2
_
R
2
Newtons . (5.71)
The force that tends to squeeze the turns together is the force that would
be generated by a pressure p
B
= BH/2 Newtons/m
2
acting over the cross
sectional area of the solenoid.
A similar argument can be used to calculate the tension in the solenoid
windings due to magnetic forces. Let the radius of the solenoid of g.(5.12)
expand slightly. The work done by a uniform pressure, p
M
, during this
expansion would be
W = p
M
(2R) R
per meter of length because the work done per unit area of wall per unit
length is given by p
M
R. The total work done by the magnetic pressure, p
M
,
during the change R for a cylinder L meters long is given by
W = p
M
(2RL) R .
The corresponding increase in magnetostatic energy, from eqn.(5.69), is
U
B
=
0
N
2
I
2
(RL) R .
But the work done by the magnetic forces must be equal to the increase in
stored magnetic energy if the current is held xed, and therefore
p
M
=
0
2
N
2
I
2
=
BH
2
Newtons/m
2
. (5.72)
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 182
Figure 5.13: The hoop stresses, T, acting on a cylindrical shell due to an
internal pressure of p
M
Newtons per m
2
. The hoop stresses T exerted by the
bottom halfcylinder on the top halfcylinder are required to overcome the
internal pressure forces. The thickness of the shell has been exaggerated.
The magnetic eld exerts a pressure on the solenoid windings: this pres
sure results in a tension given by
T = p
M
R = R
_
BH
2
_
Newtons/meter , (5.73)
see g.(5.13). There are N wires per meter of length, and therefore the
tension on each wire will be given by
t = T/N =
R
N
_
BH
2
_
. (5.74)
The forces exerted on the windings of a solenoid can be quite large. For
example, superconducting solenoids are available that can be used to generate
elds in excess of 10 Teslas. The magnetic pressure in a 10 Tesla eld is
p
M
= B
2
/2
0
= 3.98 10
7
Newtons/m
2
. The pressure of one atmosphere is
1.01 10
5
Newtons/m
2
, therefore the magnetic pressure associated with a
eld of 10 Teslas is equivalent to 394 atmospheres. The windings on such a
superconducting solenoid must be rmly anchored in order to prevent them
from moving.
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 183
Figure 5.14: The magnetic force acting on the matter contained within a vol
ume V can be obtained as the integral of a vector
T
M
over the closed surface
S which encloses V. It is assumed that
B is proportional to
H everywhere
inside V, that
B and
H are parallel on S, and that S is immersed in a uid
that can support no shear stresses. 
T
M
=
B
H
2
. The direction of the force
per unit area,
T
M
, is such that the angle between
T
M
and the surface normal
is bisected by the direction of the magnetic eld
B.
5.7 The Maxwell Stress Tensor.
In analogy with the electrostatic case, the forces due to the magnetic eld
acting on the current distribution in a body can be obtained from a magnetic
Maxwell stress tensor, see J.A.Stratton, Electromagnetic Theory, section 2.5,
(McGrawHill, N.Y., 1941). If the magnetic materials in the system are linear
so that
B is proportional to
H, it can be shown that there exists a vector
T
M
associated with the elements of the stress tensor such that the surface integral
of
T
M
over a closed surface S gives the net force acting on the material in
the volume V enclosed by the surface S: it is assumed that the surface S is
contained entirely within a uid that can support no shearing stresses. The
magnetic force acting on the material within the volume V can be calculated
CHAPTER 5. THE MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD (II) 184
from
F
M
=
__
S
T
M
dS , (5.75)
where the magnitude of the Maxwell stress vector for a linear, isotropic ma
terial, is

T
M
=
H
2
, (5.76)
and its direction is given by the construction shown in g.(5.14). The stress
vector
T
M
is turned away from the surface normal through an angle that
is twice the angle that the magnetic eld
B (or
H) makes with the surface
normal. When
B lies along the surface normal the magnetic force is a tension,
but when the eld
B lies in the surface the magnetic force is a pressure.
Chapter 6
Ferromagnetism
A description of the ferromagnetic state with an application to
magnetic recording.
6.1 Introduction.
The magnetization density,
M, in most materials at room temperatures is
proportional to the magnetic eld,
H:
M =
H . (6.1)
The factor of proportionality, , is called the magnetic susceptibility. Since
M, and
H have the same units (Amps/meter) the magnetic susceptibility has
no dimensions. Typical values of the susceptibility at room temperatures for
some common substances are listed in Table(6.1). It is clear from this Table
that for such nonmagnetic substances the magnetization per unit volume
is negligible compared with values of the impressed magnetic eld,
H. The
situation is quite dierent for ferromagnetic substances such as iron, nickel,
or cobalt. In a ferromagnet the magnetic moments are held parallel by very
strong forces called exchange forces. The magnetization per unit volume,

M
s
, is very large and essentially independent of applied magnetic eld
at temperatures low compared with a critical temperature called the Curie
Temperature. The Curie temperature, T
c
, is that temperature at which the
magnetization in zero applied magnetic eld goes to zero. The Curie tem
perature is material dependent. The Curie temperatures for iron,nickel and
cobalt are 1044, 631, and 1393 K respectively. The magnetization varies
185
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 186
Substance Susceptibility
in units of 10
6
Al +20.7
Cu 9.68
Au 34.6
Si 4.0
SiO
2
16.3
H
2
O 9.05
Table 6.1: The magnetic susceptibility at room temperature for some com
mon nonmagnetic substances.
Figure 6.1: The variation with temperature of the reduced magnetization for
pure iron. The Curie temperature is T
c
= 1044 K, and the magnetization at
T=0 K is M
s
(0) = 22.1 kOe= 1.76 10
7
Amps/m.
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 187
slowly with temperature at low temperatures. The temperature dependence
of the magnetization in iron is depicted in g.(6.1). The temperature depen
dence of M
s
for other ferromagnets is very similar. If a cylindrical rod of iron
were to be uniformly magnetized along its length the magnetic eld strength
near its end surfaces would be very large, see eqn.(4.30) and g.(4.11) of
Chapter(4). The eld just outside an end face and near the cylinder axis
is given by B
z
=
0
M
0
/2 for a cylinder whose length, L
d
, is much greater
than its radius, R. For iron at room temperature this eld is approximately
1 Tesla. It is, however, common experience that the elds around a length of
iron rod are very weak, of the order of 0.01 Teslas or less. The eld outside
the rod is weak because the magnetization is broken up into a very large
number of small domains. Each domain carries a large magnetization, M
s
,
but the direction of the magnetization changes from domain to domain in
such a way that the average magnetization density is very nearly zero. It
can be shown that the energy due to a magnetization distribution can be
calculated from
U
m
=
0
2
___
Space
dH
2
m
, (6.2)
where H
m
is the magnetic eld generated by the magnetic charge density
m
= div(
M) as nearly zero as
possible. This tendency is called the magnetic pole avoidance principle.
The size of the magnetic domains in the absence of an applied magnetic eld
depends very strongly on the structure of the material (whether the specimen
is a polycrystal or a single crystal), upon the concentration of impurities, and
upon the presence of internal stresses. The domain dimensions in an annealed
polycrystalline iron bar are of the order of 1/10 mm on a side. The domains
are therefore very large compared with atomic dimensions, but are small on
a macroscopic scale. In very perfect single crystalline prisms of iron in which
the cubic iron axes are accurately parallel with the edges of the specimen the
domains may be as long as a cm or more: see g.(6.2).
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 188
Figure 6.2: The domain structure at room temperature in a perfect iron
single crystal in which the edges of the crystal are accurately parallel with
the crystalline axes. The magnetization is uniform along the zdirection
(out of the paper). Simple domain structures are observed only in single
crystalline specimens.
6.2 BH Curves
The magnetic properties of ferromagnets at a xed temperature are often
described by curves of magnetic induction B vs. H, see g.(6.3). H is the
internal magnetic eld: its sources include
m
= div(
M) in the magnetic
body as well as any externally applied magnetic eld generated by a system
of coils outside the magnetic body.
B =
0
_
H +
M
_
, and in the simplest
case the three vectors
B,
H, and
M are all parallel. Starting from the fully
demagnetized state (H=0, M=0) the magnetization increases with H, and
B follows the curve labeled virgin curve. In the virgin state with H=0,
an equal number of domains have positive magnetization as have negative
magnetization so that the net magnetization is zero. As H increases those
domains having a magnetization oriented along the applied eld direction
grow in volume at the expense of domains having a magnetization oriented
opposite to the applied eld direction. Eventually those domains having a
component of magnetization opposed to the direction of H have been elimi
nated (at the point marked A in g.(6.3)). However, iron has a cubic crystal
structure and exhibits the property that the magnetization strongly prefers
to orient itself along a direction corresponding to one of the three equivalent
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 189
Figure 6.3: A hysteresis loop for a polycrystalline specimen of pure iron. The
details of the BH loop are specimen sensitive. The saturation magnetization
at room temperature is 2.14 Teslas. The remanent eld is B
r
= 1.22 T, and
the coercive eld is H
c
= 79 Amps/m.
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 190
cubic axes. In a polycrystalline material at a eld corresponding to point A
in g.(6.3) the domain magnetizations, each having a strength M
s
per unit
volume, are oriented at angles with respect to the applied eld ranging from
0 to 90
H +
M
_
so after saturation the Beld continues to increase
with H, although the rate of increase of B with H becomes negligibly slow
compared with the rate of increase leading up to saturation; the variation of
B with H becomes imperceptible on the scale of g.(6.3). Upon reducing the
eld H after having increased it to values larger than that corresponding to
point A in g.(6.3), B follows the upper curve in g.(6.3) and when H=0 the
magnetic induction reaches the remanent eld value B = B
r
. B gradually
falls as domains with a reversed magnetization orientation gradually reform
in the body. As H is further reduced B continues to follow the upper curve
and eventually B reaches zero at a negative value of H called the coercive eld,
H
c
. Continued reduction of H ultimately leads to magnetic saturation in the
negative direction with uniform magnetization having the value M
s
. As H is
increased from applied eld values more negative than the eld corresponding
to point A in the third quadrant the Beld increases along the lower curve,
the magnetization becomes less negative as the number of domains having
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 191
Figure 6.4: The hysteresis loop for the soft ferromagnet 479 Permalloy (79%
Ni, 17% Fe, 4% Mo). The maximum eective permeability is 0.14 (the rela
tive permeability is
R
= 1.110
5
), and H
c
= 2.45 Amps/m. The saturation
eld is B
s
= 0.87 Teslas.
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 192
a positive magnetization increases, and ultimately B becomes positive. At
the coercive eld H
c
the magnetic induction is zero; B=0. At suciently
large values of the magnetic eld the specimen once again becomes saturated
with a uniform magnetization having the value Ms. For elds larger than
500 Amps/m, or for elds less than 500 Amps/m, the curve of B vs. H
is reversible. The loop dened by the upper and lower curves in g.(6.3) is
called a major hysteresis loop. Two questions arise immediately: (1) What
happens if H is decreased before point A is reached? and (2) How can the
virgin state with H=0, M=0, and B=0 be attained? If H is reduced before the
reversible part of the BH loop has been attained the Beld decreases along a
minor hysteresis loop such as those shown in g.(6.5). If a sinusoidal driving
eld is applied having an amplitude sucient to drive the specimen into
the reversible part the hysteresis loop the magnetic state is carried around
the hysteresis loop from one extreme in the plus direction to an extreme in
the negative direction many times per second. If now the amplitude of the
driving eld is slowly reduced to zero the hysteresis curve collapses to zero
symmetrically around the origin. The specimen will be left in the virgin state
in which B=M=H=0.
Important parameters associated with the hysteresis loop are (1) the
remanent eld, B
r
, (2) the coercive eld, H
c
, and (3) the maximum eective
permeability dened by the maximum slope of the straight line joining the
origin to a point on the virgin magnetization curve as shown in gs.(6.3, 6.4).
There are two major classes of ferromagnetic materials: soft ferromagnets and
hard ferromagnets. Soft magnetic materials are characterized by very small
values of the coercive eld, see Table(6.2). For such materials the dependence
of B on H is almost linear for H < H
c
, and as a reasonable approximation
one can write
B =
eff
eff
=
R
0
.
Pure polycrystalline iron is a soft ferromagnet characterized by H
c
= 60
Amps/m and
eff
= 0.013, or
R
10,000. There are a number of alloys
that behave very nearly like perfectly soft ferromagnets, see Table(6.2).
Hard magnetic materials are characterized by large values of the coercive
eld and remanent eld B
r
, see Table(6.3). Very hard ferromagnets such as
SmCo alloys, NdFeB alloys, and Strontium ferrites can be better described
in terms of M vs. H. The variation of magnetization with internal magnetic
eld, H, is shown for a commercial Barium ferrite in g.(6.6); only negative
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 193
Figure 6.5: Examples of two minor hysteresis loops in 479 Permalloy (see
g.(6.4). For the lowest minor loop the eld was reduced after having par
tially traversed the virgin magnetization curve. For the upper minor loop
the eld was reduced after having traversed the major hysteresis curve cycle
at least once.
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 194
Material B
s
Curie Coercive Maximum
Saturation Temp.(C) Field Relative
Field,Teslas Amps/m Perm.
R
Iron 2.14 770 79 6600
(Fig.(6.3))
Single 2.14 770 0.8 1.2 10
6
Cryst. Fe
Permalloy 1.08 600 4 100,000
Supermalloy 0.75 400 0.16 10
6
Table 6.2: Magnetic properties of some soft magnetic materials. B =
eff
(H + M), where
eff
=
R
0
. One Tesla equals 10 kGauss, and 79
Amps/m equals 1 Oersted. Permalloy is an alloy of 78.5 atomic % Ni and
21.5 atomic % Fe. Supermalloy is composed of 79 atomic % Ni, 16 atomic
% Fe, and 5 atomic % Mo.
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 195
Figure 6.6: The variation with internal magnetic eld, H, of the magnetiza
tion at room temperature for a commercial Strontium Ferrite. The coercive
eld is 2.59 10
5
Amps/m.
internal elds, H, are shown because this portion of the magnetization curve
is the one required for practical applications. The hysteresis loop is very
nearly rectangular, meaning that to a good approximation the magnetization
is independent of the Held until it ips 180
0
H then for large
R
one has B=
0
H
0
/N
z
; ie. a straight line having a
slope corresponding to
R
= 1/N
z
. The argument runs as follows:
B = H =
0
(H + M) ,
0
H = (H + M) ,
so
M = (
R
1) H .
Since the pole eld is H
D
= N
z
M, the applied eld must overcome this pole
eld and in addition supply the eld H. Therefore the applied eld is given
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 199
Figure 6.9: A ring shaped specimen used to measure the intrinsic magnetic
properties of a soft magnetic material. The primary winding of N
p
turns
is used to generate the eld H. The secondary coil of N
s
turns is used to
measure the eld B in the ring.
by
H
0
= N
z
(
R
1) H + H ,
or
H =
H
0
[N
z
(
R
1) + 1]
,
and
B =
0
R
H
0
[N
z
(
R
1) + 1]
.
Upon dividing through by
R
and taking the limit such that
R
1, one
obtains
B
=
0
H
0
/N
z
. (6.3)
The point is that in order to measure the intrinsic response of a soft mag
netic material it is necessary to avoid spatial variations in the magnetization
that give rise to magnetic pole elds. This can be done by using a specimen
having the topology of a ring, g.(6.9). This ring can be supplied with a
uniformly wound primary coil of N
p
turns used to generate the applied eld,
H
0
, plus a secondary coil of N
s
turns used to measure the ux density in
the specimen. There are no magnetic poles if M is uniform around the ring,
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 200
therefore the eld in the material is just H = N
p
I/L, where I is the primary
coil current in Amps and L is the length in meters measured along the cen
terline of the ring. The Beld can be calculated from the emf developed
across the secondary windings as the primary current is changed; according
to Faradays law
V = N
s
A(dB/dt) ,
where A is the crosssectional area of the ring.
6.3 Digital Magnetic Recording.
A magnetic hard disc for use as a magnetic memory storage device for a
computer consists of a very smooth circular substrate upon which has been
deposited a very thin coating of a magnetic cobalt alloy 50 nm or less thick.
This disc is rotated at a very high rate. The remanent magnetization of
this magnetic thin lm is such that B
R
1/2 Tesla, and the coercive eld
is approximately 105 Amps/m. The magnetization lies in the plane of the
disc and contains many small, oblong regions in which the magnetization is
oriented either parallel or antiparallel to the disc velocity. These magneti
zation regions are written into the disc magnetization by means of a write
head: an extremely simplied drawing of a write head is shown in g.(6.10).
The write head is basically an electromagnet constructed of a soft magnetic
permalloy yoke (the saturation eld is 1 Tesla and the coercive eld is H
c
4
Amps/m). This electromagnet is driven by the current through a single turn.
The yoke contains a narrow gap, g, approximately 50 nm wide. The write
head ies over the surface of the disc at an altitude of approximately 25
nm, and the magnetic lm on the disc is magnetized by the fringing eld
produced at the magnet gap. A eld of approximately 3 times the coercive
eld is used to write magnetization regions into the disc magnetic lm that
are either parallel or antiparallel to the disc velocity. The spatial dependen
cies of the fringing eld components near the gap are given in the Karlqvist
approximation by:
H
x
=
B
g
arctan
_
y g
x
2
+ y
2
(g
2
/4)
_
, (6.4)
H
y
=
B
g
2
ln
_
(x g/2)
2
+ y
2
(x + g/2)
2
+ y
2
_
,
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 201
Figure 6.10: (a) A schematic representation of a hard disc write head. (b)
The coordinate system used to write the spatial dependence of the write
head eld in the Karlqvist approximation.
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 202
Figure 6.11: At the juncture between two regions of oppositely directed
magnetizations there is a large surface charge density, and this gives rise
to large fringing elds.
where B
g
is the Beld in the middle of the gap region, and g is the gap
width: the coordinate axes are shown in g.(6.10b). Bits of information are
stored as magnetization reversals (also called ux reversals). It is only at
those places where the magnetizations are directed opposite to one another
that the fringing eld is large enough to be detected by the read head. This
is illustrated in g.(6.11). The absence of a ux reversal is taken to be a zero;
the presence of a ux reversal is taken to be a 1. The magnetization prole
for a typical run of data might look like that shown in g.(6.12). In practice,
each data byte of input is stored using a complex code that uses more than
the nominal 8 bits per byte in order to build in the capability to detect and
correct errors.
Modern read heads use a complicated structure of thin lms. The mag
netic eld due to a magnetization change on the hard disc is detected by
means of a change in resistance of a magnetoresistance element. Write and
read heads are combined in a single write/read unit.
As of November 1999 IBM demonstrated a hard disc drive having the
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 203
Figure 6.12: Example of encoded data bits on a hard disc drive.
capability to store 3.5 10
10
bits per square inch using 522,000 bits per inch
and 67,300 tracks per inch. This means that each magnetization cell was
only 49 nm long by 377 nm wide. The disc spun at 10,000 revolutions per
minute, the seek time was 4.9 msecs, and information was read in and out at
the rate of 18 10
6
bytes per second. The uncorrected error rate was 1:10
8
;
after correction this error rate decreased to less than 1:10
12
.
Further Reading.
S. Chikazumi, Physics of Magnetism. John Wiley and Sons,New York,
1964.
John C. Mallinson, The Foundations of Magnetic Recording, Second Edi
tion. Academic Press, San Diego, 1993.
John C. Mallinson, MagnetoResistive Heads. Academic Press, San Diego,
1996.
6.4 Electromagnets.
Consider the electromagnet shown in g.(6.13). As a rst approximation
let the Beld in the ferromagnetic yoke be uniform with the same value B
Teslas everywhere. The eld in the gap measured along the centerline will
also be B to a good approximation. This follows from the Maxwell equation
divB=0 which requires the normal component of B to be continuous across
a material discontinuity. If the gap eld is B then the Held in the gap
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 204
Figure 6.13: An electromagnet consisting of a soft ferromagnetic yoke wound
with N turns of wire and containing a gap of width g meters. The length of
the ferromagnetic yoke along its center line is L meters.
is H
g
= B/
0
. The permeability of free space,
0
= 4 10
7
, is a small
number therefore H
g
will be quite large: if B=1.0 Tesla then H
g
= 7.9610
5
Amps/m. This Held is much larger than H within the soft ferromagnetic
yoke material. For example, in iron the eld H cannot exceed 100 Amps/m
if B= 1.0 Tesla, see g.(6.3). According to another Maxwell equation for the
static magnetic eld
curl(
H) =
J ,
or
_
C
H d
L =
__
Area
J d
A , (6.5)
from Stokes theorem where the Area of the surface integration is bounded by
the curve C. Apply eqn.(6.5) to the closed line running along the centerline
of the magnet. The integral of the current density over the area bounded by
the magnet center line is just NI so that the line integral of H becomes
L H + g H
g
= NI ,
CHAPTER 6. FERROMAGNETISM 205
where L is the length of the path in the ferromagnetic yoke and g is the width
of the gap. Given a value for the Beld one can look up the corresponding
value of the Held from the ferromagnetic hysteresis loop. Then the current
required to produce that Beld is
I =
1
N
(LH + [gB/
0
]) . (6.6)
In this way one can construct a graph of B vs. I corresponding to various
points on the BH loop. It should be noted that this simple construction fails
when the ferromagnet approaches magnetic saturation.
Chapter 7
Time Dependent
Electromagnetic Fields.
General Reference: The Feynman Lectures in Physics, Vol.(II),
by R.P.Feynman, R.B.Leighton, and M.Sands, Addison Wesley,
Reading, Mass., 1964.
7.1 Introduction.
Chapters (2) to (5) treated the problem of how to calculate electric and mag
netic eld distributions given time independent charge and current distribu
tions. This chapter discusses the more general problem of how to calculate
electric and magnetic elds given time varying charge and current distribu
tions. It turns out that the solution to this general problem is most easily
developed using the scalar and vector potentials discussed in chapters (2)
and (4). By way of example, the formalism is applied to the generation of
radio waves by currents owing in an antenna, and to the generation of light
waves by oscillating atomic dipole moments.
206
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 207
7.2 Time Dependent Maxwells Equations.
Start from Maxwells equations in the form
curl(
E) =
B
t
, (7.1)
div(
B) = 0 ,
curl(
B) =
0
J
T
+
0
E
t
,
div(
E) =
1
T
,
where
T
=
f
div(
P) , (7.2)
and
J
T
=
J
f
+curl(
M) +
P
t
. (7.3)
Recall that
f
is the density of free charges,
J
f
is the free current density due
to the motion of the free charges,
P is the electric dipole moment density,
and
M is the magnetic dipole density. It is presumed that the total charge
density,
T
, and the total current density,
J
T
, are prescribed functions of
position and of time. The equation div(
B = curl(
A) , (7.4)
because the divergence of any curl is equal to zero. The rst of eqns.(7.1)
becomes, with the help of eqn.(7.4),
curl(
E) =
t
curl(
A) = curl
_
A
t
_
,
where it has been assumed that the order of the space and time derivatives
can be interchanged. It follows that the curl of the sum of the electric eld
and the time derivative of the vector potential is zero,
curl
_
E +
A
t
_
= 0 . (7.5)
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 208
The curl of any gradient is zero so that the requirement eqn.(7.5) can be
satised by putting
E +
A
t
=
gradV ,
or
E =
gradV
A
t
. (7.6)
The introduction of the vector potential,
A, and the scalar potential, V,
enables one to satisfy the rst two of Maxwells equations (7.1). Write
E
and
B in terms of the potentials in the second pair of Maxwells equations
to obtain
curl curl(
A) =
0
J
T
+
0
0
_
grad
V
t
2
A
t
2
_
,
and
div
gradV
t
div(
A) =
T
0
.
In cartesian coordinates, but only in cartesian coordinates, the vector
operator curl curl can be written
curl curl =
2
+
grad div . (7.7)
Using eqn.(7.7) one obtains
A +
0
A
t
2
+
grad
_
div(
A) +
0
0
V
t
_
=
0
J
T
. (7.8)
In order to completely specify a vector eld one must give both its curl
and its divergence. But at this point only the curl of
A has been xed by the
requirement that
B = curl(
A) +
0
0
_
V
t
_
= 0 . (7.9)
This choice of div(
A
0
A
t
2
=
0
J
T
, (7.10)
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 209
or in component form
2
A
x
2
A
x
t
2
=
0
J
T

x
, (7.11)
2
A
y
2
A
y
t
2
=
0
J
T

y
,
2
A
z
2
A
z
t
2
=
0
J
T

z
,
Similarly, if the last of Maxwells eqns.(7.1) is combined with eqn.(7.6) and
with the Lorentz condition (7.9) one nds
2
V
0
2
V
t
2
=
T
0
. (7.12)
Obviously, the four equations (7.11 plus 7.12) are very similar and the form
of a solution that satises one of them must also satisfy the other three. (The
fact that A
x
, A
y
, A
z
, V all satisfy equations of the same form is no accident:
according to the special theory of relativity these four quantities are related
to the four components of a single vector in fourdimensional spacetime).
Consider the homogeneous equation
2
V
0
2
V
t
2
= 0 ;
or, since c
2
= 1/(
0
0
),
2
V
1
c
2
2
V
t
2
= 0 . (7.13)
This equation is called the wave equation. A spherically symmetric solution
that satises the wave equation is
V =
f(t [r/c])
r
, (7.14)
where f(x) is any function whatsoever. It is instructive to substitute the func
tion (7.14) into the wave equation. Since the function does not depend upon
either of the angular coordinates, or , the Laplacian operator becomes
2
V =
1
r
2
r
_
r
2
V
r
_
.
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 210
Inserting the function (7.14) one obtains
V
r
=
f
r
2
f
cr
,
since
f
r
=
_
f
t
__
r
[t
r
c
]
_
=
f
c
.
Therefore
r
2
V
r
= f
r
f
c
,
and
r
_
r
2
V
r
_
=
f
r
f
c
+
r
f
c
2
=
r
f
c
2
,
thus
2
V =
f
rc
2
.
But
2
V
t
2
=
f
rc
2
,
and therefore the wave equation (7.13) is satised by a potential function of
the form eqn.(7.14) where f(x) is an arbitrary function of its argument, x.
Apart from the appearance of the retarded time, t
R
= t r/c, the form of
eqn.(7.14) is very similar to the potential function for a point charge. It is
therefore natural to suppose that the potential function that is generated by
a timevarying point charge q(t) located at the origin is given by
V(r, t) =
1
4
0
q(t r/c)
r
, (7.15)
where the value of the charge at the retarded time must be used to calculate
the potential at the time of observation, t: the retarded time must be used
in order to allow for the nite time required to propagate a signal from the
charge to the observer at the speed of light. The notion of a timedependent
charge is an unusual one: think of a tiny volume at the origin into which
charge can ow with time. Then the potential function (7.15) describes the
contribution to the potential at the position of the observer due to the charge
in that tiny volume element at the origin. The potential function (7.15) goes
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 211
Figure 7.1: A space and time dependent source charge density (r, t) and
a space and time dependent source current density
J
T
(r, t) generate time
dependent electric and magnetic elds at the position, P, of an observer.
over into the electrostatic potential for a point charge if the observer is so close
to the origin that (r/c) can be neglected, or if the charge q is independent of
the time.
The elementary solution (7.15) of the wave equation can be used, together
with the principle of superposition, to construct a particular solution of the
wave equation given a space and time varying distribution of charge density
(see g.(7.1)):
V(
R, t) =
1
4
0
___
Space
d
T
(r, t
R
)

R r 
, (7.16)
where d is the element of volume and the retarded time is given by
t
R
= t

R r 
c
. (7.17)
It may be helpful to write out eqn.(7.16) explicitly in cartesian coordinates
(see g.(7.1):
V
P
(X, Y, Z, t) =
1
4
0
___
Space
dxdydz
T
(x, y, z, t
R
)
_
(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
,
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 212
where
t
R
= t
_
(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
c
.
If eqn.(7.16) is the required solution of the inhomogeneous wave equation
(7.12) for the potential function V(
A(
R, t) =
0
4
___
Space
d
J
T
(r, t
R
)

R r 
. (7.18)
Here again t
R
is the retarded time. These solutions, which satisfy Maxwells
equations for the case in which the charge and current distributions depend
upon time, have exactly the same form as the solution for the electrostatic
potential, eqn.(2.11), and the solution for the magnetostatic vector potential,
eqn.(4.13), except that the retarded time must be used in the source terms.
The presence of the retarded time in the integrals makes the calculation of
the scalar and vector potentials much more complicated than the equivalent
calculations for the static limit. It can be shown, after much work, that the
potential functions (7.16) and (7.18) satisfy the Lorentz condition, eqn.(7.9).
7.3 A Simple Radio Antenna.
See (Electromagnetic Theory by J.A.Stratton, McGrawHill, N.Y., 1941.
Section 8.7 and the following).
Consider a center fed linear antenna such as that depicted in g.(7.2).
In order to apply eqn.(7.18) to an antenna of nite length it is necessary
to know the current distribution along the wire. An exact solution of this
problem is very dicult. A useful approximation assumes that the current
distribution along the antenna is sinusoidal if the time variation of the current
is sinusoidal. For a thin wire the current must be zero at the ends of the wire
since there is no place to store charge. At other places along the wire charge
may be stored on the wire surfaces and so the current need not be the same
at every crosssection. The antenna is supposed to be driven by a sinusoidal
generator at the circular frequency . A wave of current propagates along
the wire, which can be regarded as a transmission line, and is reected from
the open ends of the wire. The resulting current distribution is a sinusoidal
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 213
Figure 7.2: A center fed linear radio antenna. The current forms a standing
wave with nodes at the wire ends.
standing wave along the wire having zero current at the ends of the wire at
z = L. Such a current distribution can be described by
I(z, t) = I
0
exp (it) sin
c
(L z) , z 0 (7.19)
I(z, t) = I
0
exp (it) sin
c
(L + z) , z 0
see g.(7.2). Use this current distribution in eqn.(7.18) to calculate the vector
potential. The currents ow only in the zdirection so the vector potential will
only have a zcomponent. Further, it is assumed that we will be interested
only in those elds that are far removed from the antenna: this means that
for an observer at distance R from the antenna we shall assume that R L,
where the antenna length is 2L and is the wavelength of the electric and
magnetic elds produced by the antenna where = c/f, and = 2f where
f is the frequency. The antenna wire is assumed to be very thin so that every
point on a crosssection at z can be considered to be at the same distance
from the observer. This means that in the integral of (7.18) the integral of
current density over x,y simply gives the total current at that place along
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 214
the wire. Eqn.(7.18) can be written
A
z
(X, Y, Z, t) =
0
4
L
_
L
dz
I
z
(z, t
R
)
r
,
where I
z
is given by (7.19), t
R
= t  r/c, and
r
2
= X
2
+ Y
2
+ (Z z)
2
.
Since  z < L and R L one can use the binomial theorem to expand r in
powers of (z/R):
r = R
_
1
2Zz
R
2
+
_
z
R
_
2
_
1/2
,
or
r
= R
Zz
R
,
neglecting terms of order (z/R)
2
or higher. Thus the distance to the observer
from a point z on the antenna is given by
r = R z cos ,
where is the angle between the direction of
R and the antenna, see g.(7.2).
The vector potential can therefore be written
A
z
(R, , t) =
0
4
0
_
L
dz
I
0
sin
_
c
(L + z)
[R z cos ]
exp (it) exp
_
i
c
[R z cos ]
_
+
0
4
L
_
0
dz
I
0
sin
_
c
(L z)
[R z cos ]
exp (it) exp
_
i
c
[R z cos ]
_
.
(7.20)
This rather formidable appearing expression can be simplied if one notices
that z cos in the denominator can be neglected compared with the distance
R since RL. On the other hand, the term (z cos /c) in the exponentials
cannot be neglected because L is usually comparable with and (z/c) =
2z/. With the above simplication we have
A
z
(R, , t) =
0
4
I
0
exp (i[t R/c])
R
[I
1
+ I
2
] , (7.21)
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 215
where
I
1
=
0
_
L
dz sin
_
c
(L + z)
_
exp (i
c
z cos )
and
I
2
=
L
_
0
dz sin
_
c
(L z)
_
exp (i
c
z cos ) .
The integrals are messy but can be easily carried out. The result is
F() = I
1
+ I
2
=
2
c
sin
2
_
cos
_
Lcos
c
_
cos
_
L
c
__
. (7.22)
The next step uses (7.21) to calculate the Beld from
B = curl(
= A
z
sin ,
A
= 0 .
But since A
= 0 ,
and
B
=
1
R
_
R
(RA
)
A
R
_
,
or
B
= i
0
4
I
0
c
exp (i[t R/c])
R
sin F()
0
4
I
0
c
exp (i[t R/c])
R
2
_
sin F() + cos
dF
d
_
.(7.23)
This eld contains two terms. The rst term decreases with distance to the
observer like (R)
1
. The second term decreases with distance like R
2
. This
means that for the condition R one can ignore the second term because
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 216
it becomes very small relative to the rst term. So in the far eld of the
antenna (R ) one nds
B
= i
0
4
I
0
c
exp (i[t R/c])
R
sin F() , (7.24)
and
B
= B
R
= 0 .
The electric eld can be most easily obtained from B by means of the
third Maxwell equation (7.1). In free space
J
T
= 0 so that
1
c
2
E
t
= curl(
B) ,
or, since the time variation is proportional to exp (it),
i
c
2
E = curl(
B) . (7.25)
The electric eld components calculated from eqn.(7.25) are:
i
c
2
E
R
=
1
Rsin
(sin B
) , (7.26)
i
c
2
E
=
1
R
R
(RB
) ,
E
= 0 .
Notice that the component E
R
varies with distance like 1/R
2
, whereas the
component E
and
B has only the
component B
. Notice that
E and
B are orthogonal to each other and both
are orthogonal to the line joining the observer to the center of the antenna.
Also note that from eqn.(7.26)
E
= c B
, (7.27)
independent of the angle of observation.
In the limit of small angles, , the factor sin F() in eqn.(7.24) simplies
to 2L sin (
L
c
). This means that in the limit 0 the eld amplitudes fall
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 217
o to zero as the observer becomes aligned with the antenna ( is dened in
g.(7.2)). On the other hand, for an observer in the XY plane = /2 and
sin F() =
_
2c
__
1 cos
_
L
c
__
.
The radiation elds in the equatorial plane are nonzero and become particu
larly large when cos(L/c)= 0 or 1. Such an antenna is said to be resonant.
The condition L/c = /2 corresponds to the commonly used halfwave
antenna for which L = /4, where is the free space wavelength 2c/.
For such a halfwave antenna the angular dependence of the radiation elds
becomes
sin F() =
(2c/) cos ( cos /2)
sin
. (7.28)
Despite its more complicated appearance, this function is very similar to the
sin angular variation that characterizes a point electric dipole radiator, as
we shall see in the next section.
The present section has demonstrated how one can calculate the strength
of a radio signal generated by a typical linear antenna. It also demon
strates that relatively complex elds are a consequence of the presence of
the retarded time in the relatively simple formula for the vector potential,
eqn.(7.18).
7.4 An Electric Dipole Radiator.
An atom or a molecule in an excited state may develop an oscillating electric
dipole moment density,
P. This dipole density oscillates at a frequency that
is proportional to the energy dierence between the excited state and the
ground state, E: = E. The oscillating dipole moment generates an
electromagnetic eld that carries o the excited state energy E, and the
atom or molecule returns to the ground state. An oscillating dipole moment
density constitutes a current density. From eqn.(7.3)
J
T
=
P
t
=
P ,
if
J
f
and
M are both zero as shall be assumed here. Also assume that the
dipole density has only a zcomponent as shown in g.(7.3). Then from
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 218
Figure 7.3: The coordinate system used to describe the elds generated by
an oscillating atomic or molecular electric dipole moment.
eqn.(7.18) the vector potential can be written
A(
R, t) =
0
4
1
R
___
V ol
d
P
z
(r, t R/c) ,
where d is the element of volume and the integral is carried out over the
volume, Vol, of the atom or molecule. In the above equation it has been
assumed that the dimensions of the atom or molecule are so small that all
parts are at the same distance from the observer: ie. as r in (7.18) ranges
over the volume, Vol, changes in the distance to the observer can be neglected
both in the denominator and in the retarded time. This is the point dipole
approximation. The volume integration with this assumption simply gives
the total atomic or molecular dipole moment, p
z
, and
A
z
(R, , , t) =
0
4
p
z
R
,
where p
z
is the total dipole moment evaluated at the retarded time t
R
=
t R/c . This vector potential can now be used to calculate the magnetic
eld,
B = curl(
(R, , t) =
0
4
p
z
(t R/c)
R
sin ,
A
(R, , t) = 0 .
Notice that the vector potential does not depend on the angle so that the
operator (/) gives zero. From (7.29) one nds
B
R
= B
= 0 ,
and
B
=
1
R
_
R
(RA
)
A
R
_
,
or
B
=
0
4
_
p
z
cR
+
p
z
R
2
_
sin . (7.30)
(Remember that p
z
/R = p
z
/c because the dipole moment must be eval
uated at the retarded time, t
R
= t R/c). The electric eld components can
be most easily calculated from the maxwell equation curl(
B) = (1/c
2
)
E/t
since outside the atom or molecule
J
T
= 0. The components of curl(
B) are:
curl(
B)
R
=
1
Rsin
(sin B
) ,
so that
curl(
B)
R
=
0
4
_
p
z
cR
2
+
p
z
R
3
_
cos .
curl(
B)
=
1
R
R
(RB
) ,
so that
curl(
B)
=
0
4
_
...
p
z
c
2
R
+
p
z
cR
2
+
p
z
R
3
_
sin .
Finally,
curl(
B)
= 0 .
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 220
The electric eld components are therefore given by
E
R
=
1
2
0
_
p
z
cR
2
+
p
z
R
3
_
cos , (7.31)
E
=
1
4
0
_
p
z
c
2
R
+
p
z
cR
2
+
p
z
R
3
_
sin ,
E
= 0 .
The electric eld derivatives from curl(
0
) has been used to eliminate
0
.
The elds generated by a point dipole fall naturally into two groups:
(a) The Near Fields. These are the terms that become dominant as R, the
distance from dipole to observer, becomes small. They are
B
=
0
4
p
z
R
2
sin , (7.32)
E
R
=
1
4
0
2p
z
cos
R
3
,
E
=
1
4
0
p
z
sin
R
3
.
The magnetic eld is just that generated by a static current element accord
ing to the law of BiotSavart, see eqn.(4.17). The electric eld components
have the same form as those generated by a static dipole oriented along the
zaxis, see eqn.(1.24). Therefore near the dipole retardation eects are unim
portant as one would expect.
(b) The Far Fields or the Radiation Fields. Far from the dipole the
dominant terms for both the electric and magnetic elds are those that fall
o with distance like 1/R.
B
=
0
4
p
z
cR
sin , (7.33)
E
R
0 like(1/R
2
) ,
E
=
0
4
p
z
R
sin
=
1
4
0
p
z
c
2
R
sin .
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 221
In this limit E
= cB
=
0
4
m
z
sin
R
2
. (7.34)
This follows from the general expression for the vector potential generated
by a point dipole, eqn.(4.27)
A =
0
4
_
m
R
_
R
3
.
However, it can be shown that due to the eects of time retardation the
equation for the vector potential,(7.34) must be modied to read
A
=
0
4
sin
_
m
z
R
2
+
m
z
cR
_
. (7.35)
The elds derived from this expression for the vector potential,
B = curl(
A),
are
B
R
=
0
4
2 cos
_
m
z
R
3
+
m
z
cR
2
_
t
R
, (7.36)
B
=
0
4
sin
_
m
z
R
3
+
m
z
cR
2
+
m
z
c
2
R
_
t
R
,
B
= 0 = E
R
= E
,
E
0
4
sin
_
m
z
R
2
+
m
z
cR
_
t
R
,
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 222
where t
R
= t R/c. Far from the dipole the radiation elds that decrease
with distance like (1/R) are given by
B
=
0
4
m
z
c
2
R
sin , (7.37)
E
0
4
m
z
cR
sin = cB
,
both evaluated at the retarded time t
R
. Just as for the electric dipole far
elds 
E = c 
B , and
E and
B are orthogonal to each other and to the
line joining the position of the observer to the dipole.
7.6 A Moving Point Charge in Vacuum.
The charge density corresponding to a point charge is a singular distribution
that can be written
f
(r, t) = q (r r
0
(t)) , (7.38)
where (r) is the Dirac deltafunction introduced in Chapters (2) and (4), and
r
0
(t) describes the time variation of the position of the particle. The delta
function is supposed to be zero for all values of its argument except when the
argument is equal to zero; at that point the function becomes innitely large
but in such a manner that its integral is unity. The 1dimensional function
may be thought of as the limit as 0 of a very thin rectangular shape that
is wide and that has an amplitude 1/. The three dimensional function
may be envisioned as the product of three 1dimensional functions. The
potential function that is generated by the distribution (7.38) can be written
using eqn.(7.16):
V(
R, t) =
q
4
0
___
Space
d
[r r
0
(t
R
)]

R r 
. (7.39)
The integrand is very sharply peaked when r = r
0
(t
R
) so that it is very
tempting to conclude that
V(
R, t) =
q
4
0
1

R r
0
(t
R
) 
.
This equation is WRONG, because it ignores the position dependence of
the retarded time which appears in the argument of the function. In
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 223
Figure 7.4: A small blob of charge moving along the xaxis with a velocity v
x
.
The contribution to the potential at P at the time of observation, t, comes
from the position of the particle at the retarded time t
R
= t r
0
/c.
order to understand this, suppose for simplicity that a coordinate system is
chosen so that at the retarded time the particle is moving along the xaxis,
i.e. y
0
= z
0
= 0 and y,z are not changing with time because the velocity of
the particle is directed along x (see g.(7.4)). The integral of eqn.(7.39) can
be written explicitly in cartesian coordinates: the result is
V(X, Y, Z, t) =
q
4
0
+
___
dxdydz
[x x
0
(t
R
)][y][z]
_
(X x)
2
+ (Y y)
2
+ (Z z)
2
.
The integrations over y,z are just ordinary integrations over functions that
may be carried out at once using
+
_
du f(u)(u) = f(0) .
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 224
This leaves the integration over x to be carried out;
V(X, Y, Z, t) =
q
4
0
+
_
dx
[x x
0
(t
R
)]
_
(X x)
2
+ Y
2
+ Z
2
. (7.40)
In order to turn (7.40) into an ordinary integration over a function it is
necessary to change variables so as to get rid of the spatial variation that is
contained in the retarded time, t
R
. Introduce the new variable
u = x x
0
(t
R
) .
Then
du = dx x
0
_
t
R
x
_
dx ,
where
t
R
= t
_
(X x)
2
+ Y
2
+ Z
2
c
,
so that
t
R
x
=
(X x)
c
_
(X x)
2
+ Y
2
+ Z
2
.
One nally obtains for the dierential du the expression
du = dx
_
1
x
0
(X x)
c
_
(X x)
2
+ Y
2
+ Z
2
_
,
and the integral (7.40) becomes
V(X, Y, Z, t) =
q
4
0
+
_
du
(u)
_
_
(X x)
2
+ Y
2
+ Z
2
x
0
(Xx)
c
_ .
The expression for the potential function has been transformed into a function
integration that can be carried out immediately to give
V(X, Y, Z, t) =
q
4
0
_
1
_
(X x
0
)
2
+ Y
2
+ Z
2
x
0
(Xx
0
)
c
_
t
R
, (7.41)
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 225
since for u=0 x=x
0
(t
R
). The result, eqn.(7.41), can be written in a more
general and compact form using vector notation:
V(
R, t) =
q
4
0
_
1
 r
0

vr
0
c
_
tr
0
/c
, (7.42)
where r
0
= (
J(r, t) = qv (r r
0
(t)) ,
where r
0
(t) describes the position of the particle at time t. Upon carrying
out the integration in eqn.(7.18) the resulting vector potential is found to be
A(
R, t) =
0
4
_
q v
 r
0

vr
0
c
_
tr
0
/c
, (7.43)
where r
0
is the vector drawn from the position of the particle at the retarded
time, t
R
, to the point of observation at time t. Eqns.(7.42) and (7.43) are
called the LienardWiechert potentials for a point charge. They are consistent
with the theory of relativity. The electric and magnetic elds generated by
a moving point charge, Chpt.(1), eqns.(1.9) and (1.10), can be deduced from
them by means of the relations
B = curl(
A) ,
and
E =
grad(V)
A
t
.
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 226
In the general case these result in the rather complex equations of eqns.(1.9)
and (1.10). However, in the limit v/c 1 the elds generated by a moving
point charge can be obtained relatively simply from the low velocity limit of
the vector potential. Consider a charge q near the origin, at r = (0, 0, ), and
moving along the zaxis with a velocity v =
. In spherical polar coordinates
one has
A
r
=
0
4
qv cos
_
r
vz
c
_ =
0
4
qv cos
r
_
1
v cos
c
_
A
0
4
qv sin
r
_
1
v cos
c
_ .
For a slowly moving particle, v c, these become
A
r
=
0
4
qv cos
r
,
and
A
0
4
qv sin
r
,
where A
= 0, v =
, and A
r
, A
A):
B
r
= B
= 0 ,
and
B
=
1
r
r
(rA
)
1
r
(A
r
) ,
where
r
includes a term /ct because if r changes by dr the retarded
time changes by dt
R
= dr/c. Thus
B
=
0
4
q sin
_
v
r
2
+
v
cr
_
. (7.44)
Eqn.(7.44) is just the eld generated by a point electric dipole at the origin
if one writes p
z
= q, p
z
= q
, and p
z
= q
; then
B
=
0
4
sin
_
p
z
r
2
+
p
z
cr
_
, (7.45)
see eqn.(7.30).
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 227
The electric eld can be calculated from
curl(
B) =
1
c
2
E
t
.
Thus
1
c
2
E
r
t
=
0
4
2 cos
_
qv
r
3
+
v
cr
2
_
,
or
E
r
t
=
1
4
0
2 cos
_
p
z
r
3
+
p
z
cr
2
_
.
This last equation can be integrated with respect to the time to obtain
E
r
= E
0
+
2 cos
4
0
_
p
z
r
3
+
p
z
cr
2
_
, (7.46)
where the constant of integration is simply the static eld due to a charge,
q, at the origin,
E
0
=
1
4
0
q
r
2
.
The radial electric eld component is that of a point charge at the origin plus
a eld due to a point dipole at the origin.
The transverse electric eld component is given by
E
t
=
sin
4
0
_
p
z
r
3
+
p
z
cr
2
+
...
p
z
c
2
r
_
.
This expression can be integrated to give
E
=
sin
4
0
_
p
z
r
3
+
p
z
cr
2
+
p
z
c
2
r
_
. (7.47)
For this case the constant of integration is zero because in the static limit the
only contribution to the component of the electric eld is a dipole term due
to the displacement of the charge from the origin by the vanishingly small
distance . Eqn.(7.47) is just the component of the eld generated by a
point electric dipole at the origin, eqn.(7.31). The radiation eld terms, the
terms that fall o like 1/r, can be written
E
=
sin
4
0
qa
c
2
r
,
CHAPTER 7. TIME DEPENDENT ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS. 228
cB
=
sin
4
0
qa
c
2
r
,
where a =
. These radiation elds can be written as follows in terms of
general vector position coordinates where the particle is taken to be at the
origin:
E(r, t) =
q
4
0
[r r a]
c
2
r
3

t
R
(7.48)
c
B(r, t) =
q
4
0
[a r]
c
2
r
2

t
R
,
where the acceleration a is evaluated at the retarded time t
R
= t r/c.
Eqns.(7.48) are valid only for a slowly moving charge whose velocity is
very much smaller than the velocity of light in vacuum. These radiation elds
fall o as the rst power of the distance from the observer to the particle.
Eqns.(7.46 and 7.47) can also be calculated from the formula
E =
grad(V)
A
t
,
using the low velocity limit for the vector potential along with the expression
for the potential function, eqn.(7.42), expanded to lowest order in the small
quantities and
/c:
V(r, t) =
q
4
0
1
r
_
1 +
cos
r
+
cos
c
_
.
Chapter 8
E.M. Fields and Energy Flow.
8.1 Introduction.
Chapter (7) treated the problem of how electromagnetic elds are generated
by time varying charge and current distributions. Electromagnetic elds
transport energy and momentum through space, and this chapter is con
cerned about how to calculate the energy density contained in those elds
and how to calculate the rate of energy transport. Scattering from atoms
or molecules is also discussed, as are the generation of the continuous Xray
spectrum produced in an Xray tube.
8.2 Poyntings Theorem.
A relation between energy ow and energy stored in the electromagnetic eld
can be obtained from Maxwells equations and the vector identity
div(
H) =
H curl(
E)
E curl(
H) . (8.1)
Multiply the Maxwell equation
curl(
E) =
B
t
by
H, and multiply
curl(
H) =
J
f
+
D
t
229
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 230
by
E and subtract to obtain
H curl(
E)
E curl(
H) =
B
t
J
f
D
t
. (8.2)
Using the identity (8.1) this may be rewritten
div(
H) =
J
f
E +
E
D
t
+
H
B
t
.
Integrate the latter equation over a volume V bounded by a closed surface
S. The volume integral over the divergence can be converted to a surface
integral by means of Gauss theorem:
___
V
d div(
H) =
__
S
dS
_
H
_
u
n
,
where dS is an element of surface area, and u
n
is a unit vector normal to dS.
Using Gauss Theorem one obtains
__
S
dS
_
H
_
u
n
=
___
V
d
_
J
f
E +
E
D
t
+
H
B
t
_
. (8.3)
Equation (8.3) is the statement of Poyntings theorem. Each term in (8.3)
has the units of a rate of change of energy density. The quantity
S =
E
H (8.4)
is called Poyntings vector; it is a measure of the momentum density carried
by the electromagnetic eld. Momentum density in the eld is given by
g =
S
c
2
;
see the Feynman Lectures on Physics, Volume(II), Chapter(27); ( R.P.Feynman,
R.B.Leighton, and M.Sands, AddisonWesley, Reading, Mass., 1964 ).
The surface integral of the Poynting vector,
S, over any closed surface
gives the rate at which energy is transported by the electromagnetic eld into
the volume bounded by that surface. The three terms on the right hand side
of eqn.(8.3) describe how the energy carried into the volume is distributed.
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 231
These three terms are:
(1)
___
V
d
_
J
f
E
_
This term describes the rate at which mechanical energy in the system
dened by the volume V increases due to the mechanical forces exerted on
charged particles by the electric eld: it describes the conversion of electric
and magnetic energy into kinetic energy and heat. This can be understood
by considering the force on a charged particle
f = q
_
E + (v
B)
_
.
The rate at which the electromagnetic eld does work on the charged particle
is
dW
dt
=
f v q v
E . (8.5)
(The magnetic eld makes no contribution to the work done on the parti
cle because the magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity, v). When
summed over all the charges in a volume element, eqn.(8.5) gives, per unit
volume,
J
f
E.
(2)
___
V
d
_
D
t
_
This term gives the rate at which the energy stored in the macroscopic
electric eld increases with time. Its eect can be represented by the rate of
increase of an energy density W
E
:
W
E
t
=
E
D
t
. (8.6)
Notice that this term depends upon the properties of the material because it
involves the polarization vector through the displacement vector
D =
0
E+
P.
(3)
___
V
d
_
B
t
_
This integral describes the rate of increase of energy stored in the volume
V in the form of magnetic energy. It corresponds to a rate of increase of a
magnetic energy density W
B
:
W
B
t
=
H
B
t
. (8.7)
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 232
Notice that this term involves the properties of the matter in the volume V
through the presence of the magnetization density,
M, in the denition of
H =
_
B/
0
_
M.
Let us apply Poyntings theorem, eqn.(8.3), to a spherical surface sur
rounding the dipole radiator of Chapter(7). Suppose that the radius of the
sphere, R, is so large that only the radiation elds have an appreciable am
plitude on its surface; recall that the radiation elds fall o with distance like
1/R (see eqns.(7.33)) , whereas the other eld components fall o like 1/R
2
or 1/R
3
. For the case of dipole radiation in free space the Poynting vector
has only an rcomponent because
E,
H are perpendicular to one another and
also perpendicular to the direction specied by the unit vector u
r
=r/r. In
free space
B =
0
H and
S
r
=
E
0
=
1
c
0
_
1
4
0
_
2
_
d
2
p
z
dt
2
_
2
t
R
_
sin
2
c
4
R
2
_
, (8.8)
where as usual t
R
= t R/c is the retarded time. Now take p
z
= p
0
cos (t)
so that
_
d
2
p
z
dt
2
_
t
R
=
2
p
0
cos (t
R
) ,
and therefore
S
r
=
1
c
0
_
1
4
0
_
2 _
c
_
4
p
0
2
cos
2
(t R/c)
_
sin
2
R
2
_
. (8.9)
The time averaged value of the term cos
2
(t R/c) is 1/2 ; also c
2
=
1/(
0
0
) . These can be used in (8.9) to obtain the average rate at which
energy is transported through a surface having a radius R:
< S
r
>=
_
1
8
_ _
c
4
0
_
_
c
_
4
p
2
0
sin
2
R
2
. (8.10)
Eqn.(8.10) gives the angular distribution of the timeaveraged power radiated
by an oscillating electric dipole. The power radiated along the direction of the
dipole is zero, and the maximum power is radiated in the plane perpendicular
to the dipole (see g.(8.1)). The total average power radiated by the dipole
can be obtained by integrating (8.10) over the surface of the sphere of radius
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 233
Figure 8.1: The pattern of radiated power for an oscillating electric dipole.
There is no power radiated along the direction of the dipole, p or m.
R:
__
Sphere
dS < S
r
>=
_
0
< S
r
> 2R
2
sin d =
c
16
0
_
c
_
4
p
2
0
_
0
sin
3
d .
But
_
0
sin
3
d = 4/3 so that the total average power radiated by the oscil
lating electric dipole is given by
P
E
=
1
3
c
4
0
_
c
_
4
p
2
0
Watts . (8.11)
The rate of energy radiated by the dipole increases very rapidly with the
frequency for a xed dipole moment, p
0
.
A similar calculation gives the average rate, P
M
, at which energy is ra
diated by an oscillating magnetic dipole. The far elds generated by an
oscillating magnetic dipole are given by
B
=
0
4
_
d
2
m
z
dt
2
_
t
R
sin
c
2
R
,
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 234
Figure 8.2: The schematic diagram of a centerfed, linear, halfwave antenna
oriented along the zaxis. The current is zero at the ends of the antenna;
these are located at z=L and at z=+L.
E
= cB
,
where as usual t
R
= t R/c is the retarded time. For a magnetic dipole
whose amplitude is m
0
one nds
P
M
=
c
3
0
4
_
c
_
4
m
2
0
Watts . (8.12)
8.3 Power Radiated by a Simple Antenna.
The radiation elds generated by a simple centerfed linear antenna oriented
along the zaxis can be written
B
=
0
4
I
0
_
c
_
cos ([t R/c])
sin F()
R
, (8.13)
E
= cB
,
where
sin F() =
2
_
c
_
sin
_
cos
_
Lcos
c
_
cos
_
L
c
__
, (8.14)
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 235
Figure 8.3: The radiation pattern for a halfwave antenna compared with
the radiation pattern for an oscillating electric dipole. The dipole pattern is
indicated by the + symbols.
(see Chapter(7) eqns.(7.24 and 7.22). The simplest resonant antenna is that
for which (L/c) = /2. This is a halfwave antenna for which 2L = /2;
ie. the total length of the antenna is half the free space wavelength =
2(c/) = 2/k. For this halfwave antenna eqn.(7.22) becomes
sin F() =
2
_
c
_
sin
cos
_
2
cos
_
, (8.15)
and the current distribution along the antenna becomes
I
z
(z) = I
0
sin (t) cos
_
z
2L
_
, (8.16)
see g.(8.2). The Poynting vector is S
R
= (E
/
0
), and since
E and
B
oscillate in phase the time averaged Poynting vector is given by
< S
R
>=
 E
 B

2
0
,
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 236
where  E
 and  B
0
I
2
0
cos
2
_
cos
2
_
R
2
sin
2
. (8.17)
Z
0
=
_
0
/
0
= 120 Ohms= 377 Ohms is the impedance of free space. The
variation with angle of the radiated power is shown in g.(8.3) where it is
compared with the simple sin
2
pattern characteristic of a point dipole. The
total average power passing through a sphere of radius R is independent of
R and is given by
< P
R
>= 2R
2
_
0
< S
R
> sin d ,
or
< P
R
>= 30 I
2
0
_
0
d
cos
2
_
2
cos
_
sin
,
since
_
0
/
0
= 120 Ohms. The integral can be evaluated numerically. The
result is
< P
R
>= 73.13
_
I
2
0
2
_
Watts . (8.18)
The average power dissipated in a resistor, R Ohms, by a sinusoidal
current having an amplitude I
0
Amps is R(I
2
0
/2), therefore the ideal half
wave antenna presents an impedance to the power source whose real part
is R
A
= 73.13 Ohms. The resistance R
A
is called the radiation resistance
of the antenna. An ideal antenna is one for which the Ohmic resistance of
the antenna wire itself is negligible compared with the radiation resistance.
The antenna will also present an inductive or capacitive impedance to the
generator since energy is stored in the electric and magnetic near elds. A
thin wire halfwavelength antenna has an impedance Z = 73.1 +i42.5 Ohms;
in other words, the impedance contains an inductive component. However,
if the antenna is made 0.49 long, the impedance becomes purely resistive
at approximately 73 Ohms. Such an antenna is said to be tuned. The
input impedance of a shorter antenna contains a capacitive component; a
longer antenna carries an inductive impedance component. Thus the input
impedance of a halfwave dipole antenna varies rapidly with frequency. For
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 237
practical use it is desirable to construct an antenna that (1) radiates most
of its energy into a relatively narrow cone, and (2) one that has an input
impedance that is relatively insensitive to frequency. These requirements
have led to the development of a large variety of antenna congurations.
These are described by John D. Kraus in Antennas, McGrawHill, New
York, 1988.
An antenna can, of course, also be used to detect the power broadcast by
an antenna. It is instructive to examine the problem of an antenna used as a
receiver. Let the antenna be terminated by a matched load; the resistive part
of the load will thus be equal to the antenna radiation resistance, R
A
. Let
us use the specic example of a halfwave antenna for which R
A
73 Ohms.
Assume that the receiving antenna is oriented parallel with the transmitting
antenna so that the incident electric eld vector is oriented along the receiving
antenna: if the
E eld is transverse to the antenna no signal will be detected.
Usually, the transmitter is so far removed from the receiver that the incident
electric eld amplitude can be taken as constant over the receiving antenna.
Let the amplitude of this incident electric eld be E
0
. The incident electric
eld will induce a current distribution on the halfwave antenna that has the
form described by eqn.(8.16) and an amplitude I
A
Amps. Assume that the
antenna is connected to a detector whose input impedance has been matched
to the antenna impedance. The average rate at which power is extracted from
the incident radio wave is
< P
A
>=
1
2
+L
_
L
dz E
0
I
A
cos
_
z
2L
_
=
2L
E
0
I
A
Watts . (8.19)
This means that for a halfwave antenna and a matched load the detector
resistance will be 73 Ohms. For this matched receiver one half the incident
power will be reradiated (the current distribution will after all radiate away
power at the average rate of R
A
I
2
A
/2 Watts), and half the power will be
absorbed by the matched detector, R
A
I
2
A
/2 Watts. Thus the useful power
picked up by the antenna and delivered to the detector is
P
D
=
L
E
0
I
A
=
R
A
2
I
2
A
. (8.20)
From this equation one nds I
A
= 2LE
0
/(R
A
), and
P
D
=
2L
2
2
E
2
0
R
A
Watts . (8.21)
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 238
It is useful and interesting to ask how large must a disc be so that all the
transmitted energy intercepted by the disc is equal to the power P
D
delivered
to the detector?. The area of such a disc is called the Eective Aperture,
A
E
, of the receiving antenna. The amplitude of the timeaveraged Poynting
vector for an incident wave of amplitude E
0
is
< P >=
E
2
0
2c
0
=
E
2
0
2Z
0
Watts/m
2
,
where Z
0
=377 Ohms. Therefore
E
2
0
2Z
0
A
E
= P
D
=
2L
2
2
E
2
0
R
A
,
from which
A
E
=
4
2
Z
0
R
A
L
2
m
2
. (8.22)
For the halfwave antenna R
A
= 73 Ohms and 2L= /2, so that
A
E
= 0.131
2
.
In other words, the useful power delivered to the detector is all the incident
power contained in a circle whose diameter is 0.4, a diameter nearly equal
to the length of the antenna!
8.4 A NonSinusoidal Time Dependence.
Nothing in the calculation of the radiation elds required the time variation
of the dipole moment to be sinusoidal. If a charge undergoes an acceleration
a at the retarded time t
R
= t R/c then the Poynting vector at time t on a
surface of radius R will have the radial component
S
r
=
1
c
0
_
qa sin
4
0
c
2
R
_
2
,
(see eqns.(7.33)). This expression can be written
S
r
=
c
4
1
4
0
_
q
2
a
2
sin
2
c
4
R
2
_
t
R
, (8.23)
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 239
Figure 8.4: A schematic diagram of an Xray tube illustrating the production
of the white Xray spectrum. The electrons undergo a deacceleration upon
striking the metal anode. This deacceleration is of order a= 1024 m/sec
2
for a typical 20 keV potential drop between the anode and the cathode: this
assumes an electron stopping distance of 3510
10
m. During a brief period,
10
16
seconds, the electron radiates at the rate of 5.7 10
6
Watts,
therefore each electron emits a pulse of radiation containing 5.7 10
22
Joules. The number of electrons that impinge on the anode per second for a
beam of 1 mAmp is 6.25 10
15
. The average power in the Xray beam will
be (6.25 10
15
)(5.7 10
22
) = 3.6 10
6
Watts. This energy is distributed
over a range of frequencies from zero to 4.810
18
Hz (h
max
= e  V). This
calculation does not include the energy contained in the characteristic Xray
spectrum emitted from the target.
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 240
Figure 8.5: Schematic diagram of an atom in a time varying electric eld.
The atom develops a time varying dipole moment that scatters the incident
radiation.
and the power integrated over a sphere of radius R is given by
P
q
=
2
3
1
4
0
_
q
2
a
2
c
3
_
t
R
Watts , (8.24)
where a(t
R
) means that the acceleration is measured at the retarded time
(t R/c) if the power is measured at the time t. Eqn.(8.24) can be used
to understand the production of the continuous Xray spectrum, refer to
g.(8.4). The conversion eciency for Xray production is rather small; ap
proximately 10
7
of the incident power is converted to continuous spectrum
Xray energy.
8.5 Scattering from a Stationary Atom.
Let plane wave radiation propagating in vacuum fall upon a stationary atom
located at the origin of coordinates. Let the plane wave be polarized with
the electric vector directed along z, and let the wave be propagating along x
(g.(8.5)):
E
z
= E
0
exp i(kx t) . (8.25)
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 241
We will consider only radiation whose wavelength, , is much larger than the
dimensions of the atom, i.e. much larger than 10
10
meters. This condition
restricts the frequency of the radiation to f 3 10
17
Hz. In this long wave
length limit one can take the electric eld to be uniform over the atom. Each
charged particle in the atom will be subjected, as a rst approximation, to
the electric eld of eqn.(8.25). The response of the nucleus to the oscillating
electric eld can be neglected for purposes of estimating the induced atomic
electric dipole moment because the nucleus is so massive compared with the
electrons. The main contribution to the induced dipole moment will be due
to the response of the cloud of electrons to the applied oscillating electric
eld. The results of calculations using quantum mechanics shows that the
electrons behave like simple harmonic oscillators that follow an equation of
motion of the form
d
2
z
dt
2
+
2
0
z =
 e 
m
E
0
e
it
, (8.26)
where
2
0
is the square of the natural frequency associated with the electron.
(Quantum mechanics must be used to calculate the resonant frequencies as
sociated with the various electron groups in an atom). The steady state
solution of eqn.(8.26) is
z(t) = z
0
e
it
, (8.27)
where
z
0
=
_
e
m
_
E
0
(
2
2
0
)
. (8.28)
In eqn.(8.28)  e = 1.602 10
19
Coulombs, the electron charge, and m=
9.11 10
31
kg, the electron mass. The electron develops an oscillating
dipole moment, p
z
=  e  z, as a result of the motion induced by the
forcing electric eld. The oscillating dipole will radiate energy at the same
frequency as the incident radiation, and in this way energy will be removed
from the incident plane wave and scattered in all directions around the zaxis
as per the discussion of section (8.2), eqn.(8.10). If the atom contains many
groups of electrons, each group characterized by a characteristic resonant
frequency,
n
, then each group will develop a dipole moment as a result of
a vibration of the form of eqn.(8.27). The total dipole moment developed
by the atom is obtained by summing the contributions from each electron
group:
p
z
=
_
e
2
m
_
_
n
f
n
(
2
2
0
)
_
E
0
e
it
= p
0
e
it
. (8.29)
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 242
The factors f
n
are called the oscillator strengths. Each f
n
is a measure of
the eective number of electrons in a particular group characterized by the
resonant frequency
n
. The above model does not include damping processes
and therefore the response described by eqn.(8.29) becomes innite whenever
the frequency of the incident radiation becomes equal to one of the resonant
frequencies,
n
. In any actual atomic system the response of the electrons is
limited by a number of energy loss mechanisms, including the energy radiated
by the oscillating dipole moment, so that at resonance the electronic response
becomes large but it does remain nite. The rate at which energy is scattered
into the direction specied by , is given by eqn.(8.10) of section (8.2) :
< S
r
>=
1
8
c
4
0
_
c
_
4
p
2
0
sin
2
R
2
, (8.30)
where p
0
is given by eqn.(8.29). A number of interesting conclusions can be
drawn from the above result:
(1) No energy is scattered along the direction parallel with the incident elec
tric eld;
(2) The intensity of the scattered radiation is maximum in the plane perpen
dicular to the direction of the incident light electric vector, and the scattered
light will be linearly polarized;
(3) For frequencies that are much less than the lowest atomic resonant fre
quency the dipole moment, eqn.(8.29), becomes independent of frequency.
Under these conditions the intensity of the scattered radiation increases very
rapidly with frequency; it is proportional to
4
;
(4) In the high frequency limit,
max
, where
max
is the greatest reso
nant frequency, the dipole moment amplitude becomes inversely proportional
to the square of the frequency so that the intensity of the scattered radiation
becomes independent of frequency.
If one observes the result of scattering of visible, unpolarized light from
atoms or molecules in a direction that is perpendicular to the direction of
propagation of the incident light, it will be found that the scattered light will
tend to be blue and it will be linearly polarized, see g.(8.6). The scattered
light tends to be blue because in the visible the scattering intensity increases
approximately as the fourth power of the frequency, and red light has a lower
frequency than blue light. This immediately suggests an explanation for the
observation that the sky appears to be blue. It also explains why light from
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 243
Figure 8.6: The production of polarized light by means of scattering. Let
the incident light be unpolarized. The light scattered along the yaxis will
be completely linearly polarized because only the component of the dipole
moment along z can scatter radiation into the ydirection (see eqn.(8.30)).
The argument can be generalized to show that for any direction in the yz
plane the scattered radiation will be linearly polarized.
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 244
the sky is partially polarized when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the
sun.
The total rate of energy loss from a plane wave due to atomic scattering
can be calculated from the integral of (8.30) over a sphere having a radius
R. The result is (see eqn.(8.11))
P
E
=
1
3
c
4
0
_
c
_
4
p
2
0
Watts .
The rate at which energy is carried to the atom by the incident plane wave
can be calculated from the time average of the Poynting vector, eqn.(8.4),
using H
0
= E
0
/c
0
:
< S
x
>=
1
2
_
0
E
2
0
Watts/m
2
.
This expression can be combined with eqn.(8.11) to calculate an eective
area for scattering, i.e. an area such that if all the incident power that falls
on that area were to be removed from the plane wave, then that energy
loss would just equal the radiated power given by eqn.(8.11). Such an area,
which is clearly frequency dependent, is called the scattering crosssection;
it is often designated by
a
. Far from resonance atomic crosssections tend
to be of the order of 10
37
m
2
for visible light; i.e. the crosssection is small
compared with the atomic area of 10
20
m
2
. For incident light having a
wavelength of 10
10
m. or less, the calculation of the scattering crosssection
becomes complicated because the electric eld strength in the incident wave
is not constant in amplitude across the atom. However, in the limit of very
short wavelengths, i.e. for very high frequencies, the electrons in the atom
or molecule behave like independent scattering centers whose motions are
uncorrelated. In this very high frequency regime one has
n
for all n,
and so the dipole amplitude for each electron becomes
p
0
=
_
e
2
m
2
_
E
0
. (8.31)
Each electron behaves as if it were free, and consequently it oscillates with
an amplitude given by
z =
 e 
m
2
E
0
e
it
.
CHAPTER 8. E.M. FIELDS AND ENERGY FLOW. 245
The total power radiated by each electron in the high frequency limit can be
calculated from eqn.(8.11). The result is
P
e
=
1
3
1
4
0
_
e
4
m
2
c
3
_
E
2
0
,
which is independent of frequency. This, combined with the equation for
the rate of incident energy ow per unit area, can be used to calculate the
eective crosssection for each electron in the high frequency limit. The result
is
e
=
8
3
_
1
4
0
e
2
mc
2
_
2
=
8
3
r
2
e
, (8.32)
where the length r
e
= 2.81 10
15
meters is called the classical radius of
the electron. The frequency independent area (8.32) is called the Thompson
crosssection; it has the numerical value
e
= 66.2 10
30
meters
2
. In the
high frequency limit where each electron in the atom scatters independently,
the total crosssection is proportional to the total number of electrons in the
atom, i.e. it is proportional to the atomic number.
Of course, in general, atoms that scatter light are not stationary; they
are moving in a random direction with a speed, V, that is related to the
mean thermal energy. This motion results in a Doppler frequency shift that
is proportional to the ratio V/c, to rst order. The problem of scattering
of radiation by a moving atom can be treated by transforming from the
laboratory frame to a frame in which the atom is at rest the rest frame.
After having calculated the intensity and distribution of the scattered light
one can then perform an inverse transformation back to the laboratory frame.
Thermal velocities of atoms at room temperatures are quite small. They are
largest for hydrogen atoms, and even in that case the velocity corresponding
to 300K is only 2.2 10
3
meters/sec. Therefore Doppler frequency shifts are
of the order of 1 part in 10
5
or smaller.
Chapter 9
Plane Waves (I).
The use of phasors to describe the propagation of plane waves
through space.
9.1 Introduction.
An electric dipole directed along z, located at the origin, and oscillating with
the circular frequency produces electric and magnetic elds far from the
origin that have the form (see equations (7.33)):
E
=
2
4
0
p
0
sin
c
2
R
exp (i[t R/c]) , (9.1)
B
= cE
2
4
p
0
sin
cR
exp (i[t R/c])
where p
z
= p
0
exp (i[t R/c]), and t is the time at which the observer
at
R measures the elds. It must always be kept in mind that the elds are
represented by real numbers; the notation of complex numbers is simply a
convenient bookkeeping device for dealing with sinusoidal functions. The
notation exp (it) means the real part of exp (it) i.e. cos (t). It is
particularly important to remember this when calculating the Poynting vec
tor or the energy densities which involve the product of two eld amplitudes.
For example, the Poynting vector corresponding to the elds of eqns.(9.1) is
given by
S
r
= E
=
1
4
0
4
4
p
2
0
sin
2
c
3
R
2
cos
2
([t R/c]) . (9.2)
246
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 247
Note that the time factor is not the same as
Real (exp (2i[t R/c])) = cos (2[t R/c]) . (9.3)
The time average of eqn.(9.3) is zero, whereas the time average of the correct
expression, eqn.(9.2), is given by
< S
r
>=
_
1
8
_ _
c
4
0
_
_
c
_
4
p
2
0
sin
2
R
2
, (9.4)
since the time average of the cosine squared function is 1/2. At distances far
removed from the dipole radiator the surface of constant R can be approxi
mated locally by a plane perpendicular to u
r
, a unit vector parallel with
R .
This suggests that Maxwells equations ought to have plane wave solutions
of the form
E(r, t) =
E
0
exp
_
i[
k r t]
_
, (9.5)
B(r, t) =
B
0
exp
_
i[
k r t]
_
,
where
k is a vector whose magnitude is /c and whose direction lies along
the direction of propagation of the wave, and where
E
0
and
B
0
are constant
vectors that are perpendicular to each other and to the wavevector
k (see
g.(9.1)).
Equations (9.5) can be written in component form using some convenient
coordinate system, and using Real
_
exp
_
i[
k r t]
__
= cos
_
k r t
_
:
E
x
= E
0x
cos (k
x
x + k
y
y + k
z
z t) , (9.6)
E
y
= E
0y
cos (k
x
x + k
y
y + k
z
z t) ,
E
z
= E
0z
cos (k
x
x + k
y
y + k
z
z t) ,
B
x
= B
0x
cos (k
x
x + k
y
y + k
z
z t) ,
B
y
= B
0y
cos (k
x
x + k
y
y + k
z
z t) ,
B
z
= B
0z
cos (k
x
x + k
y
y + k
z
z t) .
Using these expressions it is easy to show that
curl(
E) =
_
E
0
_
sin
_
k r t
_
,
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 248
Figure 9.1: A plane wave propagating along the direction specied by
k and
for which 
E) =
_
E
0
_
sin
_
k r t
_
,
curl(
B) =
_
B
0
_
sin
_
k r t
_
,
div(
B) =
_
B
0
_
sin
_
k r t
_
,
In free space Maxwells equations become
curl(
E) =
B
t
, (9.7)
curl(
B) =
0
E
t
,
div(
E) = 0 ,
div(
B) = 0 .
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 249
Figure 9.2: An electromagnetic plane wave propagating in free space. The
electric eld vector,
E(r, t) =
E
0
cos (
E
0
=
B
0
, (9.8)
B
0
=
0
E
0
,
E
0
= 0 ,
B
0
= 0 .
The last two equations state that for plane wave solutions of Maxwells equa
tions in free space both the electric and magnetic eld vectors must be per
pendicular to the direction of propagation specied by the vector
k; i.e.
E
0
and
B
0
must be parallel with the surfaces of constant phase. The rst two
equations of (9.8) state that the elds
E
0
and
B
0
must be mutually per
pendicular; thus the three vectors
E
0
,
B
0
, and
k form an orthogonal right
handed triad. In order to satisfy Maxwells equations the magnitude of the
wavevector must be given by
k
2
=
0
0
2
=
_
c
_
2
, (9.9)
and the amplitudes of the electric and magnetic elds must be related by

E
0
= c 
B
0
 ,
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 250
see g.(9.2). Notice that E and B oscillate in phase: ie. they have exactly
the same sinusoidal dependence on space and on time. These relations are
the same as those which were earlier associated with the wave produced by
an oscillating dipole, eqns.(7.33).
In free space the displacement vector,
D, is related to the electric eld
by
D =
0
E
t
=
t
_
0
E
2
2
_
. (9.10)
Using (9.10), the energy density stored in the electric eld of a plane wave is
given by
W
E
=
0
E
2
0
2
cos
2
(
k r t) , Joules/m
3
.
This energy density oscillates in both space and time, in particular at a xed
point in space the energy density periodically vanishes. However, the average
energy density measured at any point in space is independent of both position
and time:
< W
E
>=
0
4
E
2
0
, Joules/m
3
. (9.11)
Similarly, the time rate of change of the energy density stored in the magnetic
eld is given by (8.7)
W
B
t
=
H
B
t
=
t
_
B
2
2
0
_
. (9.12)
Therefore one can write
W
B
=
B
2
2
0
=
B
2
0
2
0
cos
2
(
k r t) Joules/m
3
.
The time averaged energy density stored in the magnetic eld is independent
of position and since B=E/c is given by
< W
B
>=
B
2
0
4
0
=
E
2
0
4
0
c
2
=
0
E
2
0
4
=< W
E
> Joules/m
3
. (9.13)
The average energy density stored in the magnetic eld is exactly the same,
in free space, as the average energy density stored in the electric eld. The
total time averaged energy density stored in the electromagnetic eld is
< W >=< W
E
> + < W
B
>=
0
E
2
0
2
, Joules/m
3
. (9.14)
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 251
The average rate at which energy in the electromagnetic eld is trans
ported across a unit area normal to the direction of propagation, i.e. normal
to
k, can be obtained by multiplying eqn.(9.14) by the speed of light: this
rate is also just the time average of the Poynting vector
< S >= c
0
E
2
0
2
=
1
2
_
0
E
2
0
, Watts/m
2
. (9.15)
The quantity Z
0
=
_
0
/
0
has the units of a resistance; it is called the
impedance of free space, and Z
0
= 377 Ohms. From the equations for the
space and time variation of a plane wave, eqns.(9.6), it follows that for a
xed time the electric and magnetic elds vary in space with a period along
the direction of
k given by 2/ 
k . By denition, this spatial period is
the wavelength, , therefore 
k = 2/. Similarly, at a xed position in
space the elds oscillate in time with the period 2/; by denition, this
period, T, is the inverse of the frequency,f, therefore = 2f. In order to
satisfy Maxwells equations, the frequency and wavelength of a plane wave
are related by eqn.(9.9)
= c 
k  ;
this can be written in the more familiar form f = c.
9.2 Phasors.
It is very convenient to represent sinusoidal functions i.e. sines and cosines, by
complex exponential functions when dealing with linear dierential equations
such as Maxwells equations. For example
y = Aexp [i(kx t)]
means
y = Real Part (Aexp [i(kx t)]) = Acos (kx t)
if A is a real number, or if A= a+ib is a complex number
y = Real Part ((a + ib) exp [i(kx t)]) , (9.16)
= a cos (kx t) b sin (kx t) .
A complex amplitude represents a phase shift. Since
cos( +) = cos cos sin sin , (9.17)
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 252
eqn.(9.16) can be written
y =
a
2
+ b
2
cos (kx t +) ,
where
sin =
b
a
2
+ b
2
and
cos =
a
a
2
+ b
2
,
or
tan =
b
a
.
In phasor notation
y =
a
2
+ b
2
exp [i(kx t +)] =
_
a
2
+ b
2
exp i
_
exp [i(kx t)] .
The prefactor
_
a
2
+ b
2
exp i
_
is just the polar representation of the com
plex number (a+ib).
Derivatives are particularly convenient in the complex phasor notation
because the derivative of an exponential function gives back the same expo
nential function multiplied by a constant (usually a complex number).
One must be careful when calculating energy densities or when calcu
lating the Poynting vector using the phasor notation because the Real Part
of the product of two complex exponentials is not the same as the product
of the two Real sinusoidal functions that appear in the product. There is,
however, a trick which is useful. Consider a plane wave propagating along z
and which can be described by
E
x
= E
0
e
i(kzt+
1
)
(9.18)
H
y
= H
0
e
i(kzt+
2
)
These electric and magnetic elds are not in phase because
1
and
2
are
dierent, and therefore this plane wave is not propagating in free space. It
corresponds to a wave propagating in a medium characterized by a complex
dielectric constant as will be discussed in a later chapter. Now calculate the
time average of the Poynting vector,
S =
E
H , using eqns.(9.18). It is
asserted that
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 253
the time average of the product of two phasors can be obtained
as onehalf of the real part of the product of one phasor with the
complex conjugate of the other phasor.
Thus
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real
_
E
x
H
y
_
=
1
2
Real (E
x
H
y
) , (9.19)
where E
x
means the complex conjugate of E
x
, and H
y
means the complex
conjugate of H
y
. Using eqn.(9.18) in eqn.(9.19) one obtains
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real (E
0
H
0
exp i(
1
2
)) =
E
0
H
0
2
cos (
1
2
) , (9.20)
since E
0
, H
0
are taken to be real amplitudes. Eqn.(9.19) can be checked by
writing the elds (9.18) in real form:
S
z
= E
0
H
0
cos (kz t +
1
) cos (kz t +
2
) ,
or, using eqn.(9.17),
S
z
= E
0
H
0
(cos
1
cos (kz t) sin
1
sin (kz t))
(cos
2
cos (kz t) sin
2
sin (kz t)) ,
or upon an explicit multiplication
S
z
= E
0
H
0
_
cos
1
cos
2
cos
2
(kz t) cos
2
sin
1
sin (kz t) cos (kz t)
_
E
0
H
0
_
sin
2
cos
1
sin (kz t) cos (kz t) sin
1
sin
2
sin
2
(kz t)
_
.
Upon taking the time averages one obtains
< S
z
>=
E
0
H
0
2
(cos
1
cos
2
+ sin
1
sin
2
) .
This equation can be written compactly as
< S
z
>=
E
0
H
0
2
cos (
1
2
) ,
in agreement with the result eqn.(9.20) obtained using the prescription (9.19).
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 254
Figure 9.3: Two coherent plane waves having orthogonal polarizations, and
propagating along the zdirection. Each wave is characterized by the same
circular frequency, , and the same wavevector,
k, where k
z
=
k = /c.
Let the elds in wave number (2) be shifted in phase by radians relative
to the elds in wave number (1).
9.3 Elliptically Polarized Plane Waves.
It may happen that two plane waves corresponding to the same frequency
are propagating in the same direction, but they may have electric elds that
are oriented in dierent directions and which may be shifted in phase relative
to one another. For example, consider the plane waves of circular frequency
and propagating along z as shown in g.(9.3). Let wave no.1 be polarized
with its electric vector along the xaxis;
E
x
= E
1
exp [i(kz t)]
and
B
y
=
E
1
c
exp [i(kz t)] .
Let wave no.2 be polarized with its electric vector along the yaxis:
E
y
= E
2
exp [i(kz t +)]
and
B
x
=
E
2
c
exp [i(kz t +)] .
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 255
Figure 9.4: The sum of two orthogonally polarized plane waves that have the
same frequency and wavevector. Case(a). = 0, the two electric elds are
in phase: E
x
= E
1
cos t and E
y
= E
2
cos t.
Note that the elds in wave number(2) are shifted in phase by radians
relative to the elds in wave number(1). Now make a diagram that displays
the time variation of the total electric eld at a xed point in space; for
simplicity, take z=0. There are a number of interesting cases:
Case(a). = 0. The two electric elds are in phase. This is an ordinary
plane wave in which the electric vector is oriented at an angle with respect
to the coordinate axes, g.(9.4).
Case(b). = /2. The two electric elds are in quadrature i.e. they are 90
out of phase. The tip of the electric vector traces out an elliptical pattern
as a function of time, g.(9.5). The sense of rotation of the electric vector
is such that a nut on a right handed screw thread would advance along the
+z axis; this radiation is said to be right hand elliptically polarized. For the
special case in which E
1
= E
2
the tip of the electric vector traces out a circle;
such radiation is said to be right hand circularly polarized.
Case(c). = 3/2. In this case the electric elds are in quadrature, as
for Case(b), but the sense of rotation of the electric vector is in the opposite
direction, g(9.6). This radiation is said to be left hand elliptically polarized.
When E
1
= E
2
the radiation is left hand circularly polarized.
Case(d). = /4. The phase shift in this case is equal to 45
and is less
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 256
Figure 9.5: The sum of two orthogonally polarized plane waves that have the
same frequency and wavevector. Case(b). = /2, the two electric elds
are out of phase by /2 radians: E
x
= E
1
cos t and E
y
= E
2
sin t.
Figure 9.6: The sum of two orthogonally polarized plane waves that have the
same frequency and wavevector. Case(c). = 3/2, the two electric elds
are out of phase by 3/2 radians: E
x
= E
1
cos t and E
y
= E
2
sin t.
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 257
Figure 9.7: The sum of two orthogonally polarized plane waves that have
the same frequency and wavevector. Case(d). = /4, the two elec
tric elds are out of phase by /4 radians: E
x
= E
1
cos t and E
y
=
_
E
2
/
2
_
(cos t + sin t).
than 90
2
(cos t + sin t) .
The tip of the electric vector traces out an elliptical path as time goes on.
The sense of the rotation is such that a nut on a right handed screw would
advance along the positive zaxis; the radiation is right hand elliptically po
larized. However, the principle axes of the ellipse are not parallel with the
x,y coordinate axes. As the phase angle between the two electric vectors,
, increases from zero, the ellipticity of the radiation increases and the prin
ciple axes of the ellipse rotate until they coincide with the coordinate axes
at = /2. Upon further increase in phase angle, the ellipticity decreases
until the radiation becomes linearly polarized again for = : the plane of
polarization is rotated 90
__
c
_
2
= k
2
0
.
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 260
Eqn.(9.21) is an example of a Fourier Integral. The amplitude function
A(p,q) can be chosen to give the required beam prole in the xy plane at
some plane z=constant; it is convenient to choose this plane to be at z=0.
The beam prole at any other position z can be obtained using the integral
(9.21). As an example of how this works let us treat a specic case for
which the mathematics can be easily worked out. Suppose that at z=0 the
beam crosssection can be described as a plane wave whose amplitude falls
o exponentially along x and y:
E
x
(x, y, 0) = E
0
exp
_
(x
2
+ y
2
)
w
2
0
_
. (9.22)
A time dependence exp (it) is assumed, but this factor will be suppressed
in the following. The output beam from a typical gas laser, a HeNe laser
for example, exhibits the spatial variation (9.22) at the output mirror with
w
0
approximately equal to 1 mm. Such a beam prole is called a Gaussian
beam prole. The spatial Fourier integral in (9.21) can be inverted for z=0
to obtain
A(p, q) =
1
4
2
__
dxdy E
x
(x, y, 0) exp (i[px + qy]) . (9.23)
Using the Gaussian spatial variation of eqn.(9.22) one nds
A(p, q) =
E
0
w
2
0
4
exp
_
w
2
0
4
(p
2
+ q
2
)
_
. (9.24)
The Fourier transform of a Gaussian function is another Gaussian function:
see section(9.4.1).
Notice that the amplitude function (9.24) becomes very small if p
2
or q
2
is greater than 4/w
2
0
: this means that the waves in the bundle describing the
radiation beam that have transverse components p,q much larger than 2/w
0
can be neglected. In a typical case the laser beam radius is 1 mm so that the
amplitude A(p,q) becomes small for  p ,  q  larger than 2 10
3
m
1
. But
at optical frequencies (1/2) 10
6
m so that k
0
2/ 410
6
m
1
.
Thus the important values of the transverse components p,q of the plane
waves that make up the beam are very small compared with the total wave
vector k
0
. The longitudinal component of the wavevector, the zcomponent
k, is given by
k
2
=
_
c
_
2
p
2
q
2
= k
2
0
p
2
q
2
.
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 261
Figure 9.9: The variation of the phase across the xy plane for a spherical
wave is described by exp
_
ik
0
2R
(x
2
+ y
2
)
_
. The phase increases with distance,
r, in the plane because the distance from the center of curvature to an oaxis
point on the plane is larger than the radius of curvature R.
But (p
2
+ q
2
)/k
2
0
is much less than unity so that one can write
k k
0
(p
2
+ q
2
)
2k
0
. (9.25)
Now using the approximation eqn.(9.25) in eqn.(9.21) investigate the beam
prole at some arbitrary value of z:
E
x
(x, y, z) =
E
0
w
2
0
4
__
dpdq exp
_
w
2
0
4
[p
2
+ q
2
]
_
(9.26)
exp (i[px + qy]) exp
_
i
[p
2
+ q
2
]z
2k
0
_
exp (ik
0
z) .
The integrals in eqn.(9.26) can be evaluated to obtain
E
x
(x, y, z) =
E
0
_
1 + (z/z
R
)
2
exp
_
ik
0
2 q
(x
2
+ y
2
)
_
exp (i[k
0
z ]) , (9.27)
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 262
where
q = z iz
R
, (9.28)
z
R
=
k
0
w
2
0
2
=
w
2
0
, (9.29)
and
tan () = z/z
R
. (9.30)
See Section(9.4.2) for the details of the calculation. The variable q is called
the complex radius of curvature of the beam. This nomenclature stems from
the description of a spherical wavefront, g.(9.9) as will be explained in the
next paragraph. The length z
R
is called the Rayleigh range.
A spherical wavefront exhibits a phase variation across a plane perpen
dicular to the direction of propagation given by
exp
_
ik
0
2R
(x
2
+ y
2
)
_
,
where R is the radius of curvature. A comparison of this expression with
eqn.(9.27) shows why q is called the complex radius of curvature. One can
separate the reciprocal of the complex radius of curvature into its real and
imaginary parts:
1
q
=
1
z z
R
=
z + iz
R
z
2
+ z
2
R
. (9.31)
The real part of eqn.(9.31) gives the real radius of curvature of the wavefront:
1
R
=
z
z
2
+ z
2
R
,
or
R = z +
z
2
R
z
. (9.32)
The radius of curvature is innite at z=0 corresponding to a plane wavefront.
For z z
R
the radius of curvature approaches the distance z.
When eqn.(9.31) is introduced into the expression for the electric eld,
eqn.(9.27), the imaginary part of 1/ q gives rise to a Gaussian spatial variation
exp
_
k
0
z
R
(x
2
+ y
2
)
2(z
2
+ z
2
R
)
_
= exp
_
(x
2
+ y
2
)
w
2
_
, (9.33)
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 263
where
w
2
= w
2
0
_
1 +
_
z
z
R
_
2
_
. (9.34)
This means that as one moves along the beam the radius of the beam slowly
increases and becomes greater by
2 at z = z
R
: ie. at one Rayleigh range
removed from the minimum beam radius, or beam waist.
The beam radius at the output mirror, the position of the minimum
beam radius, is usually w
0
= 1 mm for a typical gas laser operating in the
visible. For a wavelength of = 5 10
7
meters the Rayleigh range for such
a laser is z
R
= 6.28 meters. Therefore the beam diameter will have expanded
by only
__
dxdy exp
_
[
x
2
w
2
0
+ipx]
_
exp
_
[
y
2
w
2
0
+iqy]
_
. (9.35)
These integrals separate into the product of two integrals having an identical
form
I =
dx exp
_
[
x
2
w
2
0
+ipx]
_
. (9.36)
It is useful to complete the square in the exponent of (9.36) in order to
proceed:
1
w
2
0
[x
2
+ipw
2
0
x] =
1
w
2
0
_
x +
ipw
2
0
2
_
2
+
p
2
w
2
0
4
. (9.37)
Eqn.(9.36) can now be rewritten in terms of a new variable
u = x +i
pw
2
0
2
,
and
du = dx .
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 264
Thus the integral I, eqn.(9.36), becomes
I = exp
_
p
2
w
2
0
4
_ _
du exp
_
u
2
w
2
0
_
= w
0
exp
_
p
2
w
2
0
4
_
. (9.38)
Using this result the amplitude function, eqn.(9.35), becomes eqn.(9.24)
A(p, q) =
E
0
4
w
2
0
exp
_
w
2
0
4
[p
2
+ q
2
]
_
.
9.4.2 Integrals that are Required in the Fourier Trans
form, eqn.(9.26).
The integrals required to calculate the Fourier transform of the electric eld
in eqn.(9.26) have the form
I =
dp exp
_
w
2
0
p
2
4
+ipx i
p
2
z
2k
0
_
. (9.39)
The exponent in the exponential function can be written in the form
Exponent =
w
2
0
4
_
p
2
4ipx
w
2
0
+
2ip
2
z
w
2
0
k
0
_
,
or
Exponent =
w
2
0
4
_
1 +
2iz
w
2
0
k
0
_
_
_
p
2
4ipx
w
2
0
_
1 +
2iz
w
2
0
k
0
_
_
_
. (9.40)
Upon completing the square in eqn.(9.40) this becomes
Exponent =
w
2
0
4
_
1 +
2iz
w
2
0
k
0
_
_
_
_
_
_
p
2ix
_
w
2
0
+
2iz
k
0
_
_
_
2
+
4x
2
_
w
2
0
+
2iz
k
0
_
2
_
_
_
,
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 265
or
Exponent =
_
w
2
0
4
+
iz
2k
0
_
_
_
p
2ix
_
w
2
0
+
2iz
k
0
_
_
_
2
(9.41)
x
2
_
w
2
0
+
2iz
k
0
_ .
Introduce the new variable
u = p
2ix
_
w
2
0
+
2iz
k
0
_ ,
with
du = dp ,
then
I = exp
_
_
x
2
_
w
2
0
+
2iz
k
0
_
_
_
du exp
_
_
w
2
0
4
+
iz
2k
0
_
u
2
_
,
and carrying out the integration
I =
_
w
2
0
4
+
iz
2k
0
exp
_
ik
0
x
2
2[z ik
0
w
2
0
/2]
_
. (9.42)
Using the above result, eqn.(9.42), in eqn.(9.26) for the electric eld ampli
tude gives
E
x
(x, y, z) =
E
0
w
2
0
4
_
w
2
0
4
+
iz
2k
0
_ exp
_
ik
0
[x
2
+ y
2
]
2 q
_
exp (ik
0
z) , (9.43)
where
q = z i
k
0
w
2
0
2
. (9.44)
The quantity q is the complex radius of curvature of the wavefront.
It is further useful to dene a distance called the Rayleigh range, z
R
:
z
R
=
k
0
w
2
0
2
=
w
2
0
. (9.45)
CHAPTER 9. PLANE WAVES (I). 266
At the waist of the beam the complex radius of curvature is purely imaginary
q
0
= iz
R
.
The prefactor in eqn.(9.43) can be written
E
0
w
2
0
4
_
w
2
0
4
+
iz
2k
0
_ =
E
0
_
1 +
iz
z
R
_
=
E
0
[1 iz/z
R
]
(1 + [z/z
R
]
2
)
=
E
0
_
1 + (z/z
R
)
2
exp (i) ,
where
tan () = z/z
R
.
Finally,
E
x
(x, y, z) =
E
0
_
1 + (z/z
R
)
2
exp
_
ik
0
2 q
[x
2
+ y
2
]
_
exp (i[k
0
z ]) , (9.46)
and
q = z iz
R
,
with
z
R
=
w
2
0
.
Chapter 10
Plane Waves (II).
An investigation of the behaviour of plane waves incident on a plane
interface between two media having dierent optical properties.
10.1 Normal Incidence.
Consider a plane interface at z=0 that separates vacuum on the left (z < 0)
from a halfspace on the right containing an isotropic material, see g.(10.1).
It is assumed that the relation between
D and
E in this material linear, i.e.
D = ()
E) = i
0
H . (10.3)
It is assumed that there is no free current density,
J
f
= 0, so that curl(
H)
simplies to
curl(
H) = i
D = i
r
0
E . (10.4)
It is also assumed that there is no free charge density in the material so that
div(
D) = 0 . (10.5)
In the material we assume that
B =
0
H and therefore
div(
H) = 0 . (10.6)
In writing these equations use has been made of the denitions from linear
response theory in which it is assumed that the polarization per unit volume
is a linear function of the electric eld strength:
P() =
0
E
()
E ,
and
D =
0
E +
P ,
so that
D = [1 +
E
()]
0
E =
r
0
E . (10.7)
The relative dielectric function
r
() will, in general, be a complex number
because the response of the material,
P, to a driving electric eld,
E, is not in
phase with the electric eld. In the above equations the time dependence of
the elds, exp (it) , has been explicitly used. The divergence of
D is zero
because it has been explicitly assumed that the material is uncharged. If the
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 270
electric eld is taken to have only an xcomponent, and to be propagating
along z as shown in g.(10.1), then its curl simplies to give (from eqn.(10.3)
E
x
z
= i
0
H
y
; (10.8)
it follows from this that the magnetic eld has only a ycomponent. Similarly
from eqn.(10.4) one nds
H
y
z
= i
r
0
E
x
. (10.9)
Both
E and
H in the plane wave of eqn.(10.2) automatically satisfy the condi
tion that their divergences are zero because they are transverse waves; thus
eqns.(10.5) and (10.6) are satised. From eqns.(10.8) and (10.9) one can
obtain
2
E
x
2
z
=
r
2
E
x
=
r
_
c
_
2
E
x
. (10.10)
It follows that a wave in the material will satisfy Maxwells equations pro
viding that
k
2
m
=
r
_
c
_
2
. (10.11)
This means that there are two waves in the material that can be used to
satisfy Maxwells equations:
k
m
= +
_
c
_
r
=
_
c
_
(n +i) , (10.12)
and
k
m
=
_
c
_
r
=
_
c
_
(n +i) , (10.13)
where
r
= (n +i)
2
=
_
n
2
2
_
+ 2in , (10.14)
and n and are dened by eqn.(10.14).
If the parameter is greater than zero the wavevector (10.12) represents
a wave whose amplitude decays to the right since the constant A in eqn.(10.2)
is multiplied by the factor
exp
_
c
_
z
_
.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 271
On the other hand, the wavevector (10.13) represents a wave whose ampli
tude increases to the right in proportion to
exp
_
+
_
c
_
z
_
.
This wave which grows towards the interior of the material clearly cannot be
appropriate for the present problem because it would imply that the wave
was being amplied by its passage through the passive medium in the right
halfspace of g.(10.1). It can be concluded that the wave in the material for
z0 must have the form
E
x
= Aexp
_
c
_
z
_
exp
_
i
_
n
c
z t
__
, (10.15)
and from either of equations (10.8) or (10.9)
H
y
=
_
0
(n +i) Aexp
_
c
_
z
_
exp
_
i
_
n
c
z t
__
. (10.16)
Notice that the ratio of H
y
to E
x
is dierent from the vacuum case:
H
y
E
x
= (n +i)
_
0
, (10.17)
as opposed to
H
y
E
x
=
_
0
=
1
137
Ohm
1
for free space.
The average energy density stored in the electric eld is given by
W
E
=
D
2
from Poyntings Theorem and the fact that
D is proportional to
E, see Chap
ter(8). The average energy density stored in the electric eld is given by
< W
E
>=
1
4
Real
_
_
=
1
4
Real
_
0
E
2
_
or
< W
E
>=
1
4
0
_
n
2
2
_
 A 
2
exp
_
_
2
c
_
z
_
Joules/m
3
. (10.18)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 272
The average energy density stored in the magnetic eld is given by
< W
B
> =
0
4
Real (HH
) (10.19)
=
0
4
_
n
2
+
2
_
 A 
2
exp
_
_
2
c
_
z
_
Joules/m
3
The sum of these two energy densities is
< W >=< W
E
> + < W
B
>=
0
n
2
2
 A 
2
exp
_
_
2
c
_
z
_
Joules/m
3
.
(10.20)
The energy density decays towards the interior of the material as one would
expect.
The Poynting vector,
S =
E
y
_
(10.21)
=
n
2
_
0
 A 
2
exp
_
_
2
c
_
z
_
Watts/m
2
or
< S
z
>=
c
n
< W > Watts/m
2
. (10.22)
The energy ow in the wave takes place with the velocity c/n. The number
n is called the index of refraction. Under some circumstances the index of
refraction may be less than 1. In that case the phase velocity in the material
exceeds the velocity of light in vacuum. It appears at rst sight that a
phase velocity greater than the speed of light in vacuum must violate one
of the postulates of the theory of relativity. However, no information can
be transmitted using a wave of constant amplitude stretching over all time
from t= to t=. In order to transmit a message one must modulate the
amplitude, or the frequency, of the wave. Any such modulation is propagated
with the group velocity; it can be shown that the group velocity is always
less than the speed of light in vacuum.
Having determined the wavevector of the disturbance generated in the
material lled halfspace by the incident electromagnetic wave, it remains
to calculate the amplitude of this disturbance at z=0. In order to nd the
amplitude A it is necessary to apply appropriate boundary conditions on E
x
and H
y
on the interface plane z=0.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 273
Figure 10.2: The Maxwell equation curl(
E) =
E) =
B
t
and the small loop whose sides are L long and long as shown in g.(10.2):
_
E
dL =
t
__
Area
B
dA .
One then takes the limit as the sides shrink to zero. The line integral of
the electric eld gives
_
E
dL = (E
t1
E
t2
) L ,
where E
t1
is the eld component parallel with L in material number 1 (vac
uum in this case) and E
t2
is the electric eld component parallel with L in
material number 2. The ux of the magnetic eld through the loop goes to
zero as goes to zero, therefore
(E
t1
E
t2
) = 0
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 274
Figure 10.3: The Maxwell equation curl(
H) =
H) =
D
t
,
where it has been assumed that there are no free currents in either mate
rial, and no surface free current density on the interface between material
number(1) and material number(2). Therefore
_
C
H
dL =
t
__
Area
D
dS .
Upon taking the limit as shrinks to zero the surface integral over
D gives
nothing and
(H
t1
H
t2
) L = 0 ,
that is
H
t1
= H
t2
. (10.24)
The transverse components of the magnetic eld
H must be continuous across
the boundary between two materials.
10.2.3 The Normal Component of the Field B.
The normal component of the magnetic eld
B must be continuous across
any interface as a consequence of the Maxwell equation div(
B) = 0; see
g.(10.4). In g.(10.4) Gauss theorem is applied to a small pillbox that
spans an arbitrary surface. The height of the pillbox, , is taken to be so
small that any contributions to the surface integral from the sides of the
box can be neglected. The continuity of the normal component of
B is then
forced by the requirement that the surface integral of
B over the pillbox be
zero:
B
n1
= B
n2
. (10.25)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 276
10.3 Application of the Boundary Conditions
to a Plane Interface.
Returning to the problem of a wave incident on a plane interface as shown
in g.(10.1), one could satisfy the boundary condition on
E by choosing the
amplitude of the wave transmitted into the right halfspace to be A= E
0
for
z=0, where E
0
is the amplitude of the incident wave. This choice would,
however, produce a discontinuity in H
y
at the boundary because the ratio of
H
y
/E
x
is dierent in the region z<0 from that in the region z>0. In order
to match both E
x
and H
y
inside and outside the boundary it is necessary to
assume that the oscillating dipoles in the material to the right of z=0 give
rise to a reected wave, so that for z<0, in the vacuum in this example, one
has
E
x
= E
0
exp (i[kz t]) + E
R
exp (i[kz +t]) , (10.26)
and, since
H
y
=
1
i
0
E
x
z
,
H
y
=
_
0
( E
0
exp (i[kz t]) E
R
exp (i[kz +t]) ) , (10.27)
where k = /c. In eqn.(10.26) E
R
is the amplitude of the reected wave,
as yet undetermined. Notice the change in sign of the space part of the
reected wave phasor; this sign change is required because the reected wave
must propagate towards the left i.e. towards z=. The expression for
the magnetic eld H
y
is obtained from applying Maxwells equation (10.3) to
eqn.(10.26). From eqns.(10.26) and (10.27) one obtains on the vacuum side
of the interface at z=0
E
x
(0) = (E
0
+ E
R
) exp (it) (10.28)
H
y
(0) =
_
0
(E
0
E
R
) exp (it) .
On the material side of the interface at z=0 one has
E
x
(0) = A exp (it) (10.29)
H
y
(0) =
_
0
(n +i) A exp (it) .
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 277
Apply the boundary conditions that E
x
and H
y
must be continuous through
the boundary at z=0 to obtain
E
0
+ E
R
= A
and
E
0
E
R
= (n +i) A .
These two equations can be readily solved:
T =
A
E
0
=
2
(1 + n +i)
, (10.30)
R =
E
R
E
0
=
_
1 (n +i)
1 + (n +i)
_
.
Optical parameters n and are listed in Table(10.1) for green light and
for a number of common materials. Metals are quite opaque at optical fre
quencies as can be seen from the Table. For example, at a wavelength of
0.5145 microns ( a standard Argon ion laser line) the optical electric eld
amplitude in copper falls to 1/e of its initial value in a distance = /2,
or = /16.3 = 31.5 10
9
meters. The attenuation of the elds in glass
or in water at frequencies corresponding to visible light is very small, see
Table(10.1). The attenuation coecient, proportional to , is extremely sen
sitive to the presence of small amounts of impurities. Very pure glasses have
been developed for use in optical bres in which the length over which the
eld amplitudes have decayed by e
1
is in excess of 1 km.
It is of interest to calculate the absorption coecient associated with the
plane interface of g.(10.1). This is the timeaveraged rate at which energy
ows into the surface divided by the timeaveraged rate at which the incident
wave carries power towards the surface. It can be calculated in two ways:
(1) As the dierence between the timeaveraged Poynting vectors for the
incident and reected waves divided by the incident wave Poynting vector.
For the incident wave
< S
z0
>=
E
2
0
2
0
c
=
E
2
0
2Z
0
.
For the reected wave
< S
zr
>=
E
2
R
2Z
0
.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 278
Material n
r
= (n +i)
2
= (n
2
2
) +i (2n)
Copper
a
1.19 2.60 5.34+i 6.19
Silver
a
0.05 3.27 10.69+i 0.327
Gold
a
0.73 2.02 3.55+i 2.95
Iron
b
2.83 2.90 0.40+i16.41
Cobalt
b
1.95 3.65 9.52+i 14.24
Nickel
b
1.84 3.38 8.04 +i 12.44
Crown Glass 1.525 10
8
2.33
H
2
O 1.333@ < 10
8
1.78
= 0.589 m
Table 10.1: Optical constants for some selected materials at a wavelength
of 0.5145 microns ( 514.5 nm). This wavelength is a standard Argon ion
laser green line. It corresponds to a frequency of f= 5.827 10
14
Hz. A
time dependence exp (it) has been assumed. (a) P.B. Johnson and R.W.
Christy, Phys.Rev.B6, 4370 (1972). (b) P.B. Johnson and R.W. Christy,
Phys.Rev.B9, 5056 (1974).
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 279
In these last two equations Z
0
=
_
0
/
0
= 377 Ohms is the impedance of
free space. Therefore, the absorption coecient is given by
=
(< S
z0
> < S
zr
>)
< S
z0
>
= 1 
E
R
E
0

2
,
or, using eqn.(10.30) for the reection coecient
=
4n
(1 + n)
2
+
2
. (10.31)
(2) From the ratio of the time averaged Poynting vector just inside the ma
terial at z=0 to the incident wave Poynting vector.
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real
_
H
y
E
x
_
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real
__
0
(n i) A
2
_
=
n  A
2

2Z
0
.
But from eqn.(10.30)
 A
2
=
4E
2
0
(1 + n)
2
+
2
,
and therefore the absorption coecient is given by the same expression as
was obtained above
=
< S
z
>
< S
z0
>
=
4n
(1 + n)
2
+
2
.
10.4 Reection from a Metal at Radio Fre
quencies.
The response of a metal is completely dominated by its dc conductivity,
0
,
for frequencies less than 10
12
Hz ( 1 THz). The relaxation time for the
charge carriers in a good metal at 300K is of order = 10
14
seconds. That
means that the dc conductivity can be meaningfully used for frequencies up
to approximately 10
12
Hz. In order to understand why the response of the
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 280
unbound charge carriers dominates the reponse of the bound electrons at low
frequencies consider the Maxwell equation
curl(H) =
J
f
+
D
t
,
or in the low frequency limit
curl(H) =
0
E +
E
t
.
The term
0
0
, therefore one can compare these two terms by comparing
0
with
0
.
For copper at room temperature
0
= 6.45 10
7
/Ohmm. At 10
12
Hz
0
= (2 10
12
)/36 10
9
=55.6/Ohmm. It is clear that for frequencies
up to 10
12
Hz the contribution of the bound electrons in copper is com
pletely negligible compared with the contribution from the unbound charges.
In this low frequency limit, and for an electric eld polarized along x and
propagating along z, Maxwells equations can be written
E
x
z
= i
0
H
y
(10.32)
H
y
z
=
0
E
x
.
These follow from the relations
curl(
E) =
B
t
,
and
curl(
H) =
0
E .
From eqn.(10.32) one obtains
2
E
x
z
2
= i
0
0
E
x
. (10.33)
For a plane wave solution of the form
E
x
= A exp (i[kz t])
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 281
eqn.(10.33) requires that
k
2
= i
0
0
,
or
k =
_
0
2
(1 +i) , (10.34)
and from eqn.(10.32)
E
x
H
y
=
0
k
=
_
0
2
0
(1 i) . (10.35)
The wave in the metal is clearly very heavily damped because the distance
over which the electric eld amplitude decays to 1/e of its initial value is
approximately equal to the wavelength. This decay distance at 1 GHz for
copper at room temperature is
_
2/
0
0
= = 1.98 10
6
meters. Radi
ation at 1 GHz does not penetrate very far into copper!
The wave impedance of copper at 1 GHz and at room temperature is
given by
Z =
E
x
H
y
= (7.82 10
3
)(1 i) Ohms ,
compared with Z
0
= 377 Ohms for free space. This means that the electric
eld amplitude in the metal is very small compared with the electric eld
amplitude of the incident wave. At the interface between vacuum and the
metal one must construct electric and magnetic eld amplitudes so that the
tangential components of
E and
H are continuous across the surface: the nor
mal component of
B is automatically continuous across the surface because
the wave falls on the metal at normal incidence. These boundary conditions
give
E
0
+ E
R
= A
1
Z
0
(E
0
E
R
) =
A
Z
,
or
E
0
E
R
=
Z
0
A
Z
.
The resulting wave amplitude at the metal surface, z=0, is
A =
2ZE
0
Z + Z
0
=
2Z
Z
0
E
0
. (10.36)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 282
The amplitude of the reected wave is given by
E
R
=
_
Z Z
0
Z + Z
0
_
E
0
,
or
E
R
E
0
= 1 +
2Z
Z
0
,
because (Z/Z
0
) 1.
Notice that for our example of copper at room temperature, and for a
frequency of 1GHz, the magnitude of the reected electric eld amplitude is
the same as the incident electric eld amplitude to within 10
4
, but the
reected electric eld is 180
= 2
E
0
Z
0
,
whereas the magnetic eld amplitude in the incident wave is given by E
0
/Z
0
.
One can speak of a perfectly conducting metal, one for which the conduc
tivity approaches innity. For such a perfectly conducting metal the electric
eld decays away in zero depth: a surface current sheet is set up that per
fectly shields the metal from the electric eld in the incident wave. The
magnitude of the current sheet can be obtained by applying Stokes theorem
to the relation curl(
H) =
J
f
integrated over a small loop that spans the
metal surface as shown in g.(10.5). One has
__
Area
curl(
H)
dS =
__
Area
J
f
dS ,
where Area=L. But from Stokes theorem
_
C
H
dL =
__
Area
J
f
dS = J
s
L , (10.37)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 283
Figure 10.5: Diagram to aid in the calculation of the surface current density
that shields the interior of a perfectly conducting metal from incident electric
and magnetic elds.
where J
s
is the surface current density in Amps/m, and L is the length of
the loop. Inside the metal H
y
= 0 so from (10.37) one obtains
J
s
= H
y
(0) , (10.38)
where H
y
(0) is the magnetic eld amplitude at the vacuum/metal interface,
and H
y
(0) = 2E
0
/Z
0
.
For a perfect metal the wave impedance approaches zero, Z = E
x
/H
y
and Z 0, so that in this limit the electric eld has a node at the metal
surface. For a perfect metal the boundary condition on the electric eld at
the interface becomes
E
t
= 0 ,
where Et is the tangential component of the electric eld.
It is straight forward to calculate the absorption coecient for a metal
surface from eqn.(10.35) and from the amplitude A eqn.(10.36):
=
< S
z
(metal at z = 0) >
S
z
(incident)
=
4c
Z
2
0
 Z 
2
_
0
2
,
or
=
2
c
_
2
0
=
2
c
, (10.39)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 284
Figure 10.6: An Spolarized plane wave incident at the angle on the plane
interface between vacuum and an isotropic medium characterized by material
parameters
r
and
0
. The electric vector in the incident wave is perpendic
ular to the plane of incidence.
where =
_
2
0
is the characteristic length for attenuation of the elds in
the metal.
10.5 Oblique Incidence.
When a plane wave falls upon the plane interface between two media the in
cident and reected wavevectors dene the plane of incidence, see gs.(10.6)
and (10.7). The direction of the electric eld vector in the incident wave may
make an arbitrary angle with the plane of incidence. The general case may
be treated as the sum of two special cases: an electric vector perpendicular
to the plane of incidence (called spolarized light from the German word for
perpendicular, senkrecht), and an electric vector which lies in the plane of
incidence (ppolarized light).
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 285
Figure 10.7: A Ppolarized plane wave incident at the angle on the plane
interface between vacuum and an isotropic medium characterized by material
parameters
r
and
0
. The electric vector in the incident wave is parallel with
the plane of incidence.
10.5.1 Spolarized Waves.
Consider rst Spolarized waves, g.(10.6). The incident wave electric vector
can be described by the equation
E
y
= E
0
exp (i[x(k sin ) + z(k cos ) t]) , (10.40)
where k = /c because this wave is incident on the interface from vacuum.
Eventually one is going to have to ensure that the tangential components
of the electric and magnetic elds are continuous across the interface, and
these boundary conditions must hold at any particular time at all points on
the interface. This requirement means that all the waves in this problem,
both inside the material and on the vacuum side of the interface, must have
the same spatial dependence on the coordinates which lie in the interface
plane. For the present example, g.(10.6), the incident wave varies with the
inplane coordinate like
exp (ixk sin ) = exp (ix sin /c) ,
therefore this same factor must appear both in the reected wave and in the
transmitted wave that is generated in the region z>0. Since the reected
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 286
wavevector has the same magnitude as the incident wavevector, k = /c as
determined by Maxwells equations, and since its xcomponent of the wave
vector must be the same as for the incident wave, it follows that the angle
of reection must be the same as the angle of incidence as is shown
in g.(10.6). The electric vector of the reected wave is given by
E
y
= E
R
exp (i[xk sin zk cos t]) . (10.41)
(Note the change in the sign of the zcomponent of k). The magnetic eld
vector in the incident wave must be perpendicular both to the electric eld
vector and to the wavevector:
H
(i)
x
= H
0
cos exp (i[xk sin + zk cos t]) (10.42)
H
(i)
z
= H
0
sin exp (i[x, k sin + zk cos t])
where H
0
= E
0
/Z
0
, and Z
0
= c
0
=
_
0
/
0
= 377 Ohms. The magnetic
eld vector in the reected wave must simultaneously be orthogonal to the
reected wave electric vector and also to the wavevector:
H
(R)
x
= H
R
cos exp (i[xk sin zk cos t]) (10.43)
H
(R)
z
= H
R
sin exp (i[xk sin zk cos t])
where H
R
= E
R
/Z
0
. Eqns.(10.42 and 10.43)satisfy Maxwells equations for
the vacuum.
The electric eld in the transmitted wave will be polarized along y be
cause the material in the region z0 is assumed to be linear and isotropic so
that a ydirected incident electric eld will generate a ydirected transmitted
electric eld:
E
y
= A exp (i[xk sin ]) exp (i[zk
z
t]) . (10.44)
The Maxwell equation curl(
H) =
B
t
= i
0
H becomes
E
y
z
= i
0
H
x
, (10.45)
E
y
x
= i
0
H
z
.
The Maxwell equation curl(
H) =
D
t
= i
r
E becomes
H
x
z
H
z
x
= i
r
0
E
y
. (10.46)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 287
Combine eqns.(10.45) and (10.46) to obtain
2
E
y
z
2
+
2
E
y
x
2
=
_
c
_
2
r
E
y
. (10.47)
This equation requires that
k
2
z
+ k
2
sin
2
=
r
_
c
_
2
,
or, since k = /c,
k
2
z
=
_
r
sin
2
c
_
2
.
The zcomponent of the transmitted wavevector must therefore be calculated
from
k
z
=
_
_
r
sin
2
c
_
, (10.48)
where the imaginary part of k
z
must be chosen to be positive in order that the
wave (10.44) be damped out as the wave travels along the z direction. The
wavevector component k
z
will in general be a complex number corresponding
to the fact that the relative dielectric constant,
r
=
R
+ i
I
, is a complex
number: here
R
and
I
are both real numbers. A complex index of refraction
can be dened for the case of oblique incidence by setting
k
z
= (n
+i
)
_
c
_
. (10.49)
the parameters n
and
z/c) exp
_
i
_
n
z
c
t
__
, (10.50)
and from eqns.(10.45) the magnetic eld components are given by
H
x
=
(n
+i
)
Z
0
(10.51)
A exp (i[xk sin ]) exp (
z/c) exp
_
i
_
n
z
c
t
__
,
H
z
=
sin
Z
0
A exp (i[xk sin ]) exp (
z/c) exp
_
i
_
n
z
c
t
__
,
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 288
where Z
0
= c
0
=377 Ohms. The planes of constant amplitude are parallel
with the plane interface. The planes of constant phase are tilted at an angle
with respect to the interface plane. The wavevector in the material, which
is perpendicular to the planes of constant phase, has components that are
given by
k
x
=
_
c
_
sin ,
and
Real(k
z
) = n
c
_
,
therefore the tilt angle illustrated in g.(10.6) can be calculated from
tan =
sin
n
. (10.52)
In cases for which the dielectric constant can be taken to be real, i.e.
negligible losses, one has
k
m
=
_
_
k
2
sin
2
+ k
2
z
r
_
c
_
.
Then
sin =
k sin
r
(/c)
=
sin
r
.
This is just Snells law:
sin =
r
sin . (10.53)
For this case a real index of refraction can be dened for the medium, n =
r
, and the phase velocity of the wave in the medium is c/n; the refracted
wave propagates in the direction specied by the angle obtained from
Snells law. In the more general case of a lossy medium the angle between
the surfaces of constant phase and the boundary surface must be calculated
from eqn.(10.52).
At z=0 the tangential components of
E and
H must be continuous across
the interface and this condition determines the amplitudes of the reected
and transmitted waves. One nds
E
0
+ E
R
= A , (10.54)
and
H
0
cos + H
R
cos =
(n
+i
)
Z
0
A ,
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 289
or, since H
0
= E
0
/Z
0
and H
R
= E
R
/Z
0
E
0
+ E
R
=
(n
+i
)
cos
A . (10.55)
The parameters n
and
+i
)]
, (10.56)
E
R
E
0
=
_
cos (n
+i
)
cos + (n
+i
)
_
,
where, it will be recalled,
(n
+i
) =
_
r
sin
2
,
and the sign must be chosen so that
> 0.
10.5.2 Ppolarized Waves.
Arguments for Ppolarized light are similar to those for Spolarized light.
However, for Ppolarized radiation the magnetic eld is polarized perpendic
ular to the plane of incidence, g.(10.7). The incident wave can be written
H
inc
y
= H
0
exp (i[xk sin + zk cos t]) , (10.57)
E
inc
x
= Z
0
H
0
cos exp (i[xk sin + zk cos t]) ,
E
inc
z
= Z
0
H
0
sin exp (i[xk sin + zk cos t]) ,
and for the reected wave:
H
R
y
= H
R
exp (i[xk sin zk cos t]) , (10.58)
E
R
x
= Z
0
H
R
cos exp (i[xk sin zk cos t]) ,
E
R
z
= Z
0
H
R
sin exp (i[xk sin zk cos t]) .
Inside the material, z0, which is assumed to be characterized by a complex
relative dielectric constant
r
, one nds from
curl(
H) = i
r
0
E ,
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 290
H
y
z
= i
r
0
E
x
, (10.59)
H
y
x
= i
r
0
E
z
,
and from
curl(
E) =
B
t
= i
0
H ,
E
x
z
E
z
x
= i
0
H
y
. (10.60)
Equations (10.59) and (10.60) can be combined to give
2
H
y
x
2
+
2
H
y
z
2
=
r
_
c
_
2
H
y
. (10.61)
The solution of eqn.(10.61) can be written
H
y
= H
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) , (10.62)
where
k
2
sin
2
+ k
2
z
=
r
_
c
_
2
. (10.63)
In these eqns. k = (/c). Equation (10.63) for k
z
is the same as that which
was obtained for the case of an incident Spolarized wave. Solving for k
z
one
obtains:
k
z
=
_
[
r
sin
2
]
_
c
_
,
or
k
z
= (n
+i
)
_
c
_
,
where
n
+i
=
_
[
r
sin
2
] ,
and the sign of the square root must be chosen so as to make the imagi
nary part of k
z
positive in order to describe an optical disturbance that is
attenuated as z increases.
From the form of the magnetic eld, eqn.(10.62), and from the Maxwell
eqns.(10.59), it follows that
E
x
=
(n
+i
r
Z
0
H
T
exp (ixk sin ) exp (
z/c) exp
_
i
_
n
z
c
t
__
, (10.64)
E
z
=
sin
r
Z
0
H
T
exp (ixk sin ) exp (
z/c) exp
_
i
_
n
z
c
t
__
.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 291
And from the boundary conditions at z=0 (continuity of the tangential com
ponents of
E and
H) one nds:
H
0
+ H
R
= H
T
,
Z
0
H
0
cos Z
0
H
R
cos =
(n
+i
r
Z
0
H
T
,
or
H
0
H
R
=
(n
+i
r
cos
H
T
.
These two equations can be solved to obtain
H
T
H
0
=
2
r
cos
(
r
cos + (n
+i
))
, (10.65)
H
R
H
0
=
_
r
cos (n
+i
r
cos + (n
+i
)
_
,
where (n
+i
) =
_
[
r
sin
2
] and
> 0.
Notice that div(
E) = 0 and, since
D =
r
E, so also div(
D) = 0. There are
no free charges set up in the material for either S or Ppolarized radiation.
The condition div(
H) =
D
t
= i
D ,
because the divergence of any curl is zero.
It is easy to show by direct calculation that the normal component of the
magnetic eld
B is continuous across the surface of the dielectric material for
both S and Ppolarized radiation.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 292
10.5.3 Oblique Incidence on a Lossless Material.
For a material in which the losses are very small so that the imaginary part
of the dielectric constant can be neglected, a real index of refraction can be
dened by
n =
r
.
For Spolarized radiation the reection and transmission coecients, eqns.(10.56),
become
R
S
=
E
R
E
0
=
_
cos n cos
cos + n cos
_
, (10.66)
T
S
=
E
T
E
0
=
_
2 cos
cos + n cos
_
,
where sin = sin /n.
For Ppolarized radiation, and n =
r
a real number, the reection and
transmission coecients (10.65) become
R
P
=
H
R
H
0
=
_
n cos cos
n cos + cos
_
, (10.67)
T
P
=
H
T
H
0
=
_
2n cos
n cos + cos
_
,
where, as above, sin = sin /n and n =
r
. The relation
n
=
_
n
2
sin
2
= n cos
has also been used.
10.6 Example: Copper.
The real and imaginary parts (n
+ i
) =
_
r
sin
2
have been plotted
in g.(10.8) as a function of the angle of incidence, , for room temperature
copper and for a wavelength of = 0.5145 microns (see Table(10.1)). As
can be seen from the gure, the angular dependence of the indices n
is not very pronounced. For a lossy material such as copper that has a
complex dielectric constant the reectivity, E
R
/E
0
, is complex; that is, the
phase shift between the incident wave and reected wave electric vectors is
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 293
Figure 10.8: The dependence of the complex index of refraction, n
+ i
,
upon angle of incidence of the incident wave calculated for copper at room
temperature and for an incident wavelength of = 0.5145 m. The normal
component of the wavevector in copper is given by k
z
=
_
c
_
(n
+ i
). At
this wavelength the relative dielectric constant for copper is
r
=(5.34+i6.19),
n=1.19, and =2.60.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 294
Figure 10.9: The real and imaginary part of the reectivity of copper, E
R
/E
0
,
as a function of angle of incidence for a wavelength = 0.5145 m and
Spolarized radiation. Copper at room temperature;
r
= (5.34 + i6.19),
n=1.19, and =2.60.
neither 0
.
10.7 Example: Crown Glass.
The dependence of the reectivity on angle of incidence for a typical non
dissipative material, Crown glass, is shown in g.(10.13) and in g.(10.14)
for a wavelength of 0.5145 microns, see Table(10.1). Fig.(10.13) shows the
variation of the ratio E
R
/E
0
(eqn.(10.66)) as a function of the angle of in
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 297
Figure 10.12: The absolute value of the reectivity of copper,  E
R
/E
0
,
as a function of angle of incidence for a wavelength = 0.5145 m and for
Ppolarized radiation. Copper at room temperature;
r
=(5.34 + i6.19),
n=1.19, and =2.60.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 298
Figure 10.13: The reectivity, E
R
/E
0
, as a function of the angle of incidence
for Crown glass at a wavelength = 0.5145 m and for Spolarized radiation.
The reectivity is real because the dielectric constant is real corresponding
to very small losses in the glass. n=1.525=
r
.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 299
Figure 10.14: The reectivity, H
R
/H
0
, as a function of the angle of incidence
for Crown glass at a wavelength = 0.5145 m and for Ppolarized radiation.
The reectivity is real because the dielectric constant is real corresponding
to very small losses in the glass. n=1.525=
r
.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 300
cidence for Spolarized light. Fig.(10.14) shows the variation of the ratio
H
R
/H
0
(eqn.(10.67)) as a function of the angle of incidence for Ppolarized
light. Notice that the angular dependence of the reectivity for Spolarized
light is qualitatively similar to that of copper. Of course, the reectivity of
Crown glass has only a real part because there are negligible losses in the
glass and therefore the reected electric eld is 180
. This
is a handy device for remembering how to determine Brewsters angle. The
demonstration that the angle between the reected beam and the transmitted
beam is 90
n
2
+ 1
= cos ,
and
cos =
1
n
2
+ 1
= sin .
It follows from these relations that and are complementary angles, and
that tan = n.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 301
10.8 Metals at Radio Frequencies.
We are interested in the practical case of metals at room temperature and
frequencies less than 1000 GHz so that the metallic response to an electric
eld may be characterized by its dc conductivity,
0
. We are also interested
in the general case of radiation at oblique incidence. In this relatively low fre
quency regime the conduction current density in a metal is much larger than
the displacement current density; i.e. for a time dependence exp (it)
one nds that
0
r
0
in the Maxwell equation
curl(
H) =
0
E i
r
0
E .
The relevant Maxwells equations for low frequency elds in a nonmagnetic
metal,
=
0
, become
curl(
E) =
0
H
t
(10.68)
and
curl(
H) =
0
E . (10.69)
Take the curl of (10.68) and use a time variation exp (it) to obtain
curlcurl(
E) = i
0
0
E ,
or
E +grad div(
E) = i
0
0
E . (10.70)
However, the divergence of any curl of a vector is equal to zero, and con
sequently div(
2
E
= i
0
0
E
, (10.71)
where stands for each of the three cartesian components x,y, or z.
The solution of the problem of a plane wave incident at an oblique angle
on a plane metallic surface proceeds just as for the general case of oblique inci
dence discussed in section(10.5). Two cases are of interest: (1) Spolarization
in which the electric vector of the incident wave is parallel with the plane
interface, see g.(10.6), and (2) Ppolarization in which the electric vector
of the incident wave lies in the plane of incidence and the magnetic vector
therefore lies parallel with the interface, see g.(10.7).
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 302
10.8.1 Spolarization.
Using the coordinate system of g.(10.6) the elds in the metal can be
written
E
y
= E
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) , (10.72)
H
x
=
k
z
0
E
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) ,
H
z
=
sin
Z
0
E
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) ,
where Z
0
= c
0
= 377 Ohms, and k = /c. The wavevector component k
z
in the metal must be chosen so that E
y
satises eqn. (10.71), i.e.
k
2
z
= i
0
_
sin
c
_
2
.
Apparently the wavevector component k
z
depends upon the angle of inci
dence of the driving incident plane wave. This dependence is illusory because
0
is much larger than /c
2
: for copper at 100 GHz /c
2
= 710
6
whereas
0
= 81. For the range of frequencies and conductivities that are of interest
here the term in sin
2
is negligible compared with the term proportional to
the conductivity, and for any angle of incidence one may use
k
2
z
= i
0
0
,
and
k
z
=
_
0
2
(1 +i) =
(1 +i)
, (10.73)
where is a length that is inversely proportional to the square root of the
frequency. It is handy to remember that = 2m for copper at 1 GHz and
at room temperature.
At the metalvacuum interface the tangential components of
E and
H
must be continuous through the surface. These boundary conditions at z=0
result in two equations for the two unknown electric eld amplitudes E
R
and
E
T
; E
R
is the amplitude of the wave reected from the metal surface, and
E
T
is the amplitude of the electric eld transmitted into the metal. The
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 303
solutions of these equations are
E
R
E
0
=
_
(/c) cos k
z
(/c) cos + k
z
_
, (10.74)
E
T
E
0
=
_
2(/c) cos
(/c) cos + k
z
_
.
The wavevector k
z
is very large compared with (/c) cos so that if one
divides the equations in (10.74) by k
z
top and bottom the reection and
transmission coecients can be expressed as a power series expansion in the
small parameter cos /(ck
z
): for example
E
R
E
0
=
1 +
cos
ck
z
1 +
cos
ck
z
= 1 +
_
2 cos
ck
z
_
.
In terms of (1/k
z
) =
2
(1 i) one nds
E
R
E
0
= 1 +
_
cos
c
_
(1 i) , (10.75)
E
T
E
0
=
_
cos
c
_
(1 i) .
The rate at which energy is carried through the surface per meter squared
to be dissipated as Joule heat in the metal is given by the time average of
the Poynting vector at z=0.
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real (E
y
H
x
)
so that
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real
_
E
T
_
k
0
_
E
T
_
=
1
2
0
 E
T

2
,
or
< S
z
>=
c
cos
2
_
E
2
0
Z
0
_
. (10.76)
The timeaveraged rate at which the incident wave transports energy in the
zdirection is given by the zcomponent of the incident wave Poynting vector:
< S
0
>=
1
2
Real (E
y
H
x
) =
E
2
0
2Z
0
cos . (10.77)
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 304
The absorption coecient associated with the metal surface is given by
=
< S
z
>
< S
0
>
= 2
_
c
_
cos , (10.78)
where =
_
2/(
0
0
). The absorption coecient is very small and in
creases with frequency like
B) = 0.
10.8.2 Ppolarization.
The magnetic vector of the incident wave is parallel with the metal surface,
g.(10.7). For this case the waves in the metal are described by
H
y
= H
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) , (10.80)
E
x
=
ik
z
0
H
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) ,
E
z
=
i sin
c
0
H
T
exp (i[xk sin + zk
z
t]) ,
where
k
2
z
= i
0
c
_
2
sin
2
= i
0
0
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 305
and therefore
k
z
=
_
0
2
(1 +i) =
(1 +i)
. (10.81)
The boundary conditions on H
y
and on E
x
at the interface z=0 (continu
ity of the tangential components of
E and
H), plus a bit of algebra, readily
gives the results
H
R
H
0
=
_
cos
_
2c
_
(1 i)
_
_
cos +
_
2c
_
(1 i)
_ , (10.82)
H
T
H
0
=
2 cos
_
cos +
_
2c
_
(1 i)
_ ,
E
x
H
0
=
Z
0
_
c
_
cos (1 i)
_
cos +
_
2c
_
(1 i)
_ .
In the above expressions Z
0
= 377 Ohms, the impedance of free space. The
ratio /c = 2/ is very small, approximately 4 10
5
for copper at 1
GHz and 300K. It therefore follows that
H
R
H
0
= 1
and
H
T
H
0
= 2 ,
and
E
x
H
0
= Z
0
_
c
_
(1 i) 0 .
In fact, for a perfect metal, one for which the conductivity becomes innitely
large, the length parameter, , goes to zero and the electric eld does not
penetrate into the metal.
The rate at which energy is carried into the metal surface at z=0 is given
by
< S
z
>=
1
2
Real
_
E
x
H
y
_
=
_
2
c
_
Z
0
2
 H
0

2
Watts/m
2
.
The rate at which energy is carried to the surface by the incident wave is
given by
< S
0
>=
1
2
Real
_
E
x
H
y
_
=
Z
0
2
cos  H
0

2
Watts/m
2
.
CHAPTER 10. PLANE WAVES (II). 306
It follows that the absorption coecient associated with the metal surface is
=
< S
z
>
< S
0
>
=
2
c cos
. (10.83)
Equation (10.83) is only valid if cos (/c). In the opposite limit, for
angles very near to /2 so that cos (/c), it can be shown that
4 cos / (/c) ,
so that the absorption coecient goes to zero as the angle of incidence ap
proaches /2.
Chapter 11
Transmission Lines.
11.1 Introduction.
Consider a plane wave propagating along the zdirection in vacuum, and
polarized with its electric vector along the xaxis: its magnetic eld vector
must be directed along the yaxis. Now introduce two innitely conducting
metal planes which block o all of space except the region between x= +a
and x= a, see g.(11.1). The boundary conditions at x= a that must be
satised by the electric and magnetic elds are
(1) the tangential components of E must be zero;
(2) the normal component of H must be zero.
This latter condition is a consequence of the Maxwell equation
div(
B) = 0
which requires the normal component of
B to be continuous through an
interface, coupled with the requirement that both the electric and magnetic
elds are zero inside a perfect conductor: recall from Chapter(10) that in the
limit of innite conductivity the skin depth of a metal goes to zero. Notice
that the above two boundary conditions are satised by the plane
wave. The plane wave solutions of Maxwells equations
E
x
= E
0
exp (i[kz t]) ,
H
y
= H
0
exp (i[kz t]) ,
307
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 308
Figure 11.1: A plane wave propagating between two perfectly conducting
planes. E
x
= E
0
exp (i[kz t]), H
y
= (E
0
/Z
0
) exp (i[kz t]).
Figure 11.2: A stripline. E
x
= E
0
, V = E
0
d. H
y
= E
0
/Z
0
, I=wJ
s
=w(E
0
/Z
0
).
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 309
can be used to describe the propagation of electromagnetic energy between
two conducting planes. Energy is transported at the speed of light just as
it is for a plane wave in free space. Notice that if it is attempted to close
in the radiation with conducting planes at y= b the boundary conditions
E
x
= 0 and H
y
= 0 cannot be satised on the planes y= b. Waves can
be transmitted through such hollow pipes but the radiation bounces from
wall to wall in a complex pattern that will be studied later. It will be shown
that waves cannot be transmitted through a hollow pipe if the frequency is
too low; there exists a lower frequency cuto. However, a pair of parallel
conducting planes unbounded in one transverse direction can transmit waves
at all frequencies. In practice innite planes are inconvenient, so one uses
either striplines or coaxial cables, see gs.(11.2) and (11.3).
11.2 Striplines.
See g.(11.2). The electric eld has only an xcomponent, if edge eects are
neglected, and in the rst approximation this component is independent of
position across the width of the strip, i.e. E
x
is independent of y. Similarly,
the magnetic eld has only a ycomponent and this is independent of x and
y. From the Maxwell equation
curl(
E) =
B
t
=
0
H
t
one has
E
x
z
=
0
H
y
t
. (11.1)
From the Maxwell equation
curl(
H) =
D
t
=
0
E
t
one nds
H
y
z
=
0
E
x
t
. (11.2)
Equations (11.1) and (11.2) can be combined to obtain
_
2
E
x
z
2
_
=
0
_
2
H
y
zt
_
=
0
0
_
2
E
x
t
2
_
, (11.3)
_
2
H
y
z
2
_
=
0
_
2
E
x
zt
_
=
0
0
_
2
H
y
t
2
_
.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 310
The rst of equations (11.3) can be satised by any function of the form
E
x
(z, t) = F(z ct) + G(z + ct) , (11.4)
where c = 1/
0
is the speed of light. This statement can be checked by
carrying out the dierentiations of eqns.(11.3):
E
x
z
=
F
z
+
G
z
,
E
x
t
= c
F
z
+ c
G
z
and
2
E
x
z
2
=
2
F
z
2
+
2
G
z
2
,
2
E
x
t
2
= c
2
2
F
z
2
+ c
2
2
G
z
2
.
Therefore indeed one nds that
2
E
x
z
2
=
1
c
2
2
E
x
t
2
=
0
2
E
x
t
2
,
for any arbitrary functions F,G! This means that pulses having any time
variation can be transmitted down the line with no distortion. In the real
world the pulses do become distorted as a consequence of frequency depen
dent losses in the line, but for the time being we have only to do with ideal
systems that are composed of perfect conductors and lossless dielectrics and
such ideal systems transmit pulses without attenuation and with no distor
tion. The electric eld E
x
= F(z ct) corresponds to a pulse propagating
along the stripline in the positive zdirection with the speed of light c. The
magnetic eld associated with this electric eld pulse can be obtained from
eqn.(11.1) or (11.2):
H
y
z
=
0
E
x
t
=
0
c
F
z
,
therefore
H
y
=
0
c F(z ct) =
1
Z
0
F(z ct) .
In other words, H
y
= E
x
/Z
0
, where Z
0
= 1/(c
0
)=377 Ohms, the impedance
of free space.
The electric eld E
x
= G(z + ct) corresponds to a pulse propagating
in the negative zdirection with the speed of light c. The corresponding
magnetic eld pulse is given by
H
y
z
=
0
E
x
t
=
0
c
G
z
,
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 311
Figure 11.3: Crosssection through a coaxial cable. The electric eld has
a radial component, E
r
, and the magnetic eld has only the component H
H) =
J
f
+
D
t
for a small loop that spans the metal surface, as shown in g.(11.4). In
the limit as the area of the loop, dA, shrinks to zero the term
D/t gives
nothing so that
__
Area
dS curl(
H) u
n
=
_
C
H
dL = J
z
dL ,
where J
z
is the surface current density and u
n
is a unit vector perpendicular
to dA. Therefore
H
0
dL = J
z
dL
so that
J
z
= H
0
.
This current density ows along +z in the bottom conductor. The total
current carried by the bottom conductor is just proportional to the width of
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 313
the active region on the stripline:
I = J
z
w = H
0
w Amps.
The potential dierence between the two conductors is
V = E
0
d V olts ,
and the bottom plane is positive with respect to the upper plane for the elds
shown in the gure.
The characteristic impedance of the line, Z
0
= V/I Ohms, is given by
Z
0
=
E
0
d
H
0
w
=
d
w
_
0
/
0
, (11.5)
because for a forward propagating wave
H
0
=
0
c E
0
=
_
0
/
0
E
0
.
The conductors in a practical stripline are usually separated by a non
magnetic and nonconducting dielectric material characterized by a magnetic
permeability
0
and a dielectric constant . The above equations are still ap
plicable to such a stripline providing that dielectric losses can be neglected:
one has only to replace
0
by .
In terms of potential dierence and current, the picture that emerges is
the one illustrated in g.(11.5). A voltage pulse of arbitrary shape propagates
along the line with a velocity v that is determined by the properties of the
dielectric spacer (here assumed to be lossless). For a nonmagnetic spacer
material having a dielectric constant this velocity is given by
v =
1
0
. (11.6)
The voltage pulse is accompanied by a current pulse of the same shape as
the voltage pulse. The scaling factor between current and voltage is the
characteristic impedance of the line. The characteristic impedance depends
upon the stripline geometry:for the plane stripline of g.(11.4) it is given
by
Z
0
=
d
w
_
=
d
w
1
v
. (11.7)
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 314
Figure 11.5: Voltage and current pulses on a transmission line.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 315
For a forward moving pulse
V = +Z
0
I , (11.8)
and for a backward moving pulse
V = Z
0
I , (11.9)
where V is the potential dierence in Volts and I is the current on the trans
mission line in Amps.
Maxwells equations, (11.3), can be rewritten in terms of the potential
dierence, V, and the current on the line, I. Since E
x
is proportional to V
the rst of equations(11.3) becomes
2
V
z
2
=
1
v
2
2
V
t
2
. (11.10)
Similarly, since H
y
is proportional to the current I, the second of equations(11.3)
becomes
2
I
z
2
=
1
v
2
2
I
t
2
. (11.11)
These telegraph line equations were derived by Lord Kelvin in 1855 (this was
before Maxwells equations had been discovered) by treating the transmission
line as a repeating series of inductances shunted by capacitors. See Electro
magnetic Theory by J.A.Stratton, McGrawHill, New York, 1941, section
9.20, g.(103); for a lossless line R=0 and G=.
11.3 Coaxial Cables.
Cylindrical coordinates are appropriate for the problem of a coaxial cable,
g.(11.3). The relevant Maxwells equations become
curl(
E) =
0
H
t
,
and
curl(
H) =
E
t
,
where is a real number for a lossless line. Look for solutions of these
equations in which, by analogy with a stripline curved around on itself, the
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 316
electric eld has only a radial component, E
r
, that is independent of angle,
and the magnetic eld has only an angularly independent component H
:
E
r
z
=
0
H
t
, (11.12)
H
z
=
E
r
t
.
In addition, take E
z
= 0 because the tangential components of the electric
eld must be zero at the perfectly conducting walls of the coaxial cable. But
if E
z
= 0 it follows from Maxwells equations that
curl(
H)
z
= 0 =
1
r
r
(rH
) .
This implies that
H
=
a(z, t)
r
, (11.13)
where a(z,t) is a function of time and of position along the cable. Similarly,
from div(
E) = 0 one has
1
r
r
(rE
r
) = 0 ,
and this is satised by
E
r
=
b(z, t)
r
. (11.14)
By combining the Maxwell eqns.(11.12) the electric and magnetic elds,
eqns.(11.13) and (11.14), must satisfy
2
E
r
z
2
=
0
2
H
zt
=
0
2
E
r
t
2
, (11.15)
2
H
z
2
=
2
E
r
zt
=
0
2
H
t
2
.
These have the same form as the stripline equations (11.3). It follows from
these equations,and from the requirements (11.13) and (11.14), that the gen
eral solution for the electric eld can be written
E
r
(z, t) =
F(z vt)
r
+
G(z + vt)
r
, (11.16)
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 317
where F(u) and G(u) are arbitrary functions of their arguments, and where
v =
1
0
.
The corresponding general solution for the magnetic eld is
H
(z, t) = v
_
F(z vt)
r
G(z + vt)
r
_
. (11.17)
The above electric and magnetic elds satisfy the wave equations (11.15),
they satisfy eqns.(11.12), and they have the form required by eqns.(11.13
and 11.14).
Instead of the electric eld strength, the state of the electric eld in the
cable can be specied by the potential dierence between the inner and outer
conductors:
V =
R
2
_
R
1
E
r
dr = F(z vt)
R
2
_
R
1
dr
r
= F(z vt) ln
_
R
2
R
1
_
for a forward propagating wave. Note that the inner conductor is positive
with respect to the outer conductor. The corresponding current on the inner
conductor is given by
I = J
z
(2R
1
) = H
(R
1
) (2R
1
) = v (2R
1
)
F(z vt)
R
1
,
so that
I = 2v F(z vt) .
The current ows ows towards +z for the current on the inner conductor;
the current ows towards minus z on the outer conductor. That is, on the
outer conductor
I = 2R
2
H
(R
2
) = 2v F(z vt) .
so that the net current ow through a section of the cable is zero. The
characteristic impedance of the cable is given by
Z
0
=
V
I
=
1
2v
ln
_
R
2
R
1
_
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 318
or
Z
0
=
1
2
_
ln
_
R
2
R
1
_
. (11.18)
The potential dierence, V, is proportional to the electric eld, E
r
, and
the current, I, is proportional to the magnetic eld, H
, therefore from
eqns.(11.15) the voltage and current satisfy the wave equations
2
V
z
2
=
1
v
2
2
V
t
2
, (11.19)
2
I
z
2
=
1
v
2
2
I
t
2
,
where v
2
= 1/(
0
). For a forward propagating pulse having the form
V(z, t) = F(z vt)
the corresponding current pulse is described by
I(z, t) =
1
Z
0
F(z vt) =
V(z, t)
Z
0
, (11.20)
where the characteristic impedance for a coaxial cable is given by eqn.(11.18).
For a backward propagating potential pulse of the form
V(z, t) = G(z + vt)
the corresponding current pulse is described by
I(z, t) =
1
Z
0
V(z, t) =
G(z + vt)
Z
0
. (11.21)
In the above equations F(zvt) and G(z+vt) are arbitrary functions of their
arguments.
11.4 Transmission Lines in General.
Relations similar to eqns.(11.19,11.20, and 11.21) are valid for a transmission
line constructed of arbitrarily shaped conductors. In the general case it
is convenient to describe the properties of a lossless line in terms of the
inductance per unit length, L Henries/m, and the capacitance per unit length,
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 319
Figure 11.6: Schematic diagram of a general transmission line. The line is
characterized by an inductance per unit length, L Henries/m, and a capaci
tance per unit length, C Farads/m.
C Farads/m. One can write the appropriate transmission line equations using
ordinary circuit theory. If the current on the line changes with time there
will be a voltage drop in going from z to z+dz along the line, see g.11.6).
This drop in potential is due to the line inductance. One can write
dV = Ldz
_
I
t
_
.
Thus it follows that
V
z
= L
_
I
t
_
. (11.22)
If the potential dierence between the two conductors on the transmission
line changes with time the current at z+dz will be a little smaller than the
current at z because some current is shunted through the capacitive coupling
between the electrodes. Therefore
dI = Cdz
_
V
t
_
,
or
I
z
= C
_
V
t
_
. (11.23)
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 320
Notice the similarity in form between eqns.(11.22 and 11.23) and eqns.(11.1
and 11.2). The above two equations can be combined to give
2
V
z
2
= L
2
I
tz
= LC
2
V
t
2
(11.24)
2
I
z
2
= C
2
V
tz
= LC
2
I
t
2
Notice that these equations have the same form as do eqns.(11.19). It follows
from this similarity that
LC =
1
v
2
or
v
2
=
1
LC
. (11.25)
The velocity of propagation along the transmission line is independent of
the line geometry and is determined only by the dielectric constant and the
permeability of the medium that carries the electric and magnetic elds that
characterize the propagating disturbance. For a uniform medium
v
2
=
1
.
It follows from this, plus eqn.(11.25), that
LC = , (11.26)
a relation that is not a priori obvious. It also follows from eqns.(11.22 and
11.23) that the characteristic impedance of the line is given by
Z
0
= Lv =
1
Cv
=
_
L
C
. (11.27)
The characteristic impedance does depend upon the geometry of the trans
mission line.
It is perhaps worth emphasizing the physical picture of the manner in
which a pulse of charge is propagated along a transmission line, see g.(11.7).
In g.(11.7) the upper electrode has a positive potential with respect to the
lower electrode in the region where the charge patch is located. The electric
eld is terminated by a patch of charge on each metal electrode surface:
this charge is of one sign on the upper electrode and of opposite sign on
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 321
Figure 11.7: Pulses propagating along a transmission line. (a) A forward
moving pulse. (b) A backward moving pulse.
the other electrode as shown schematically in g.(11.7). The charge patches
move down the line with the velocity v characteristic of the wave velocity in
the medium between the electrodes. At any section of the line the current
on either electrode is zero until the charge patch arrives. Current is the
rate at which charge is transported past a particular point, therefore the
current at some point on the electrode is the product of the velocity and the
charge density per unit length of line. It is clear from g.(11.7(a)), which
depicts a positive voltage pulse moving to the right, that the current in the
upper electrode will be positive, whereas the current pulse carried by the
lower electrode will be negative because negative charge is owing from left
to right. Similarly, if the pulse is moving from right to left the current
ow in the upper conductor will be negative because positive charges are
owing in the negative z direction. At the same time, the current in the
bottom electrode is positive because negative charges are owing from right
to left. For a positive voltage pulse moving from left to right one adopts
the convention that the associated current pulse is positive. For a positive
voltage pulse moving from right to left one adopts the convention that the
associated current pulse is negative.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 322
11.5 A Terminated Line.
Any discontinuity in the properties of a transmission line results in a reected
pulse and a transmitted pulse whose amplitudes are smaller than the original
pulse amplitude. In order to see how this comes about, consider a few simple
cases.
(i) Two pulses of identical shape, but mirror images, propagate towards one
another on an innite line, g.(11.8(a)). The experiment is set up so that the
pulses collide at z=0. Maxwells equations are linear, and we assume that
the dielectric and magnetic response of the material of which the line is made
is also linear. For linear response, the total potential dierence at any point
is just the sum of the potential dierences associated with the two pulses;
similarly, the current at any point on the line is the sum of the currents
in the individual pulses. In particular, at z=0 where the two pulses collide
the current is zero! The pulses pass through each other without interacting.
During the overlap time, the voltage at z=0 will be twice as large as it would
be for a single pulse. The system of two pulses shown in g.(11.8) satises
the boundary conditions at z=0 for an open line, i.e. I=0. It can be deduced
from this that an observer placed to the left of the point z=0 could not
tell the dierence between an experiment in which a single pulse is injected
into a line that is open (i.e. terminated by an open circuit) at z=0 or an
experiment in which two mirror image pulses are injected into an innite line
from opposite directions.
Another way of obtaining this result starts from the general expressions
for the voltage and current on a transmission line,
V(z, t) = F(z vt) + G(z + vt) ,
and
I(z, t) = F(z vt)/Z
0
G(z + vt)/Z
0
.
The current must be zero for all times at an open circuit, i.e. at that point
on the line
I = 0 = (F G) /Z
0
.
It follows from this that at the open circuit F=G for all times, and therefore
the reected pulse at any time, G(z+vt), must be the mirror image of the
incident pulse F(zvt) where the mirror is located at the position of the open
circuit.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 323
Figure 11.8: Pulses on an innite transmission line. (a) Before the collision.
(b) After the collision.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 324
Figure 11.9: Pulses on an innite transmission line. (a) Before the collision.
(b) After the collision.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 325
(ii) Two pulses of identical shape, but one pulse is a mirror image of the other
and is inverted as shown in g.(11.9), are launched towards one another on
an innite line. They collide at z=0. Because the system is a linear one the
pulses simply pass through one another without interacting in any way. In
this case the potential dierence at z=0 always remains equal to zero because
the two voltage pulses cancel one another. On the other hand, the two current
pulses add, so that at z=0 the current becomes twice as large as it would be
for the passage of a single pulse. Thus these two counter propagating pulses
satisfy the boundary conditions at z=0 required for a short circuit, i.e. at
z=0 one has R=V/I=0. We can deduce from this thought experiment that
a pulse is inverted upon reection from the end of a shorted line.
The principle illustrated by these two examples can be extended to cover
the case of a line terminated by an arbitrary resistance R Ohms. Let the
incident pulse have an amplitude V
0
Volts. Let the amplitude of the reected
pulse be V
R
Volts. The corresponding currents are I
0
= V
0
/Z
0
and I
R
=
V
R
/Z
0
; the latter current is negative because the pulse is propagating from
right to left. Suppose that the pulses collide at z=0. At z=0 one has, by
superposition,
V = V
0
+ V
R
and
I = I
0
+ I
R
=
V
0
Z
0
V
R
Z
0
.
But we require R=V/I at the point z=0. Therefore
R = Z
0
_
V
0
+ V
R
V
0
V
R
_
.
This equation can be solved in order to nd the amplitude of the reected
pulse and the reection coecient, = V
R
/V
0
:
=
_
V
R
V
0
_
=
((R/Z
0
) 1)
((R/Z
0
) + 1)
. (11.28)
The two cases explicitly treated above are contained in eqn.(11.28) as limiting
cases: if R then +1, and the voltage pulse is reected without a
change in amplitude and with no change in sign; if R 0 then 1, and
the voltage pulse is reected without a change in amplitude but the pulse is
inverted. On the other hand, if R = Z
0
there is no reected pulse because
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 326
= 0: the pulse is completely absorbed by the terminating resistance. A
line terminated by a resistance equal to the characteristic impedance of the
line looks like an innite line to the generator.
This method for dealing with a discontinuity on the line can be extended
to treat a capacitive or an inductive termination. At a capacitor one requires
Q = CV
or
I =
dQ
dt
= C
dV
dt
.
But I = I
0
+ I
R
and V = V
0
+ V
R
, so that
I
0
+ I
R
=
V
0
Z
0
V
R
Z
0
= C
_
dV
0
dt
+
dV
R
dt
_
.
This relation gives a dierential equation from which V
R
(t) can be calculated
from the known time dependence of the initial pulse V
0
(t):
dV
R
dt
+
_
1
CZ
0
_
V
R
=
dV
0
dt
+
_
1
CZ
0
_
V
0
(t) . (11.29)
As an example, consider an incident rectangular pulse whose time depen
dence is shown in g.(11.10). The derivative of a rectangular pulse consists
of two very sharp impulses; one impulse is associated with the leading edge
at t=0 where dV/dt = V
0
(t), and the other impulse is associated with the
trailing edge at t=T seconds where dV/dt = V
0
(t T). In the time in
terval from t=0 to t=T the reected pulse amplitude at the termination is
given by (from eqn.(11.29))
V
R
(t) = V
0
2V
0
exp (t/) ,
where = CZ
0
. At t=0 the reected voltage pulse has the amplitude V
R
=
V
0
: this makes sense because the initially uncharged capacitor looks like a
short circuit. The capacitor charges at a rate determined by the time constant
= CZ
0
until the voltage across it reaches the value 2V
0
: it then looks like
an open circuit because it can accept no more charge. When the capacitor is
fully charged and becomes equivalent to an open circuit the reected pulse
amplitude becomes equal to the incident pulse amplitude and the potential
drop across the capacitor is V = V
0
+ V
R
= 2V
0
. (It has been assumed that
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 327
Figure 11.10: The reection of a rectangular pulse from the end of a trans
mission line terminated by a capacitor C Farads. (a) The input pulse plus
its derivative. (b) The reected voltage pulse. The input pulse duration is
assumed to be long compared with the decay constant = CZ
0
.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 328
the width of the pulse, T, is much longer than the time constant = CZ
0
).
At the end of the incident pulse, t=T, the capacitor, charged to a potential
dierence of 2V
0
Volts, just discharges into the line with a time constant
= CZ
0
, and therefore
V
R
(t) = 2V
0
exp ([t T]/)
for t T.
Similar arguments can be used to discuss a line terminated by an inductor
whose resistance is much smaller than the characteristic impedance, Z
0
. The
potential drop across an inductor is related to the current passing through it
by the relation
V = L
_
dI
dt
_
. (11.30)
But at z=0 on the cable where the pulses overlap
I = I
0
+ I
R
=
V
0
Z
0
V
R
Z
0
,
and
V = V
0
+ V
R
,
where V
0
(t) is the amplitude of the incident pulse and V
R
(t) is the corre
sponding amplitude of the reected pulse. From the boundary condition
eqn.(11.30) one obtains
V
0
(t) + V
R
(t) =
L
Z
0
_
dV
0
dt
dV
R
dt
_
,
or
dV
R
dt
+
V
R
=
_
dV
0
dt
_
V
0
/ , (11.31)
where = L/Z
0
. The time variation of the incident pulse at z=0 is known
so that the dierential eqn.(11.31) can be solved for the time variation of
the reected pulse using the condition that V
R
(t) is identically zero for times
before the incident pulse arrives at the termination. Consider, as an example,
the rectangular pulse of duration T, shown in g.(11.11), where the length of
the pulse T is much longer than the time constant = L/Z
0
. The derivative
of the incident pulse is zero everywhere except at t=0 where dV
0
/dt = V
0
(t),
and at t=T where dV
0
/dt = V
0
(t T). These impulses produce steps in
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 329
Figure 11.11: Reection of a rectangular pulse from the end of a transmission
line terminated by an inductance L Henries. (a) The input pulse plus its
derivative. (b) The reected voltage pulse, V
R
. It has been assumed that the
length of the input pulse is much greater than the time constant = L/Z
0
.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 330
the reected voltage, V
R
, of +V
0
at t=0 and of V
0
at t=T. The reected
pulse amplitude at t=0 is +V
0
because initially the inductor looks like an
open circuit since there is no current ow. Eventually the current through
the inductor builds up to a steady state value and the voltage drop across the
inductor becomes zero; at this point the inductor looks like a short circuit so
that the reected voltage pulse amplitude is V
R
= V
0
. The time variation
of the reected voltage pulse is
V
R
(t) = 2V
0
exp (t/) V
0
,
for 0 < t T. Immediately after t=T seconds the driving pulse has become
zero, and so the energy stored in the inductor decays into the transmission
line at a rate determined by the inductance and the characteristic impedance,
Z
0
:
V
R
(t) = 2V
0
exp ([t T]/) ,
for t T. The reected pulse has a negative voltage because because the
collapse of the magnetic eld in the inductor coil operates to maintain a
positive current ow. In a reected pulse a positive current ow is associated
with a negative voltage.
The above methods can be extended to treat a transmission line termi
nated by an arbitrary impedance.
11.6 Sinusoidal Signals on a Terminated Line.
Let a transmission line having a characteristic impedance Z
0
be used to
connect a sinusoidal signal generator to a load, Z
L
, as shown in g.(11.12).
In phasor notation the generator voltage may be written
V
G
(t) = V
0
exp [it] ; (11.32)
this corresponds to a real time variation cos t. A positive sign has been used
in the phasor exponential in accord with the usual engineering convention
for the description of alternating current circuits. The potential dierence
at any point along the line will consist of a forward propagating wave plus a
backward propagating wave due to a reection from the load. Recall that the
current and potential waves must be functions of (zvt) and (z+vt) in order to
satisfy Maxwells equations (11.19). The forward propagating voltage wave
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 331
Figure 11.12: A transmission line of length L meters is used to connect a
sinusoidal generator to a load impedance Z
L
Ohms.
must therefore have the form
V
f
(z, t) = a exp
_
i
v
[z vt]
_
= a exp
_
i
z
v
_
exp (it) ,
and the reected wave must have the form
V
r
(z, t) = b exp
_
i
v
[z + vt]
_
= b exp
_
i
z
v
_
exp (it) ,
where a,b are constants that must be determined from the generator potential
and from the boundary conditions at the load, i.e. Z
L
= V/I. It is customary
to write k = /v, where = 2f and where v is the velocity of a pulse on
the cable. The potential dierence at any point along the line is given by
V(z, t) = (a exp (ikz) + b exp (+ikz)) exp (+it) , (11.33)
and the current is given by
I(z, t) =
__
a
Z
0
_
exp (ikz)
_
b
Z
0
_
exp (+ikz)
_
exp (+it) . (11.34)
The expression (11.34) for the current follows from eqn.(11.33) for the voltage
combined with the transmission line characteristic impedances for forward
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 332
and backward propagating waves, eqns.(11.8) and (11.9). At the generator,
assumed to be located at z=0, one has
V
0
= a + b .
At the load, assumed to be at z=L, one has
V/I = Z
L
,
or
_
a exp (ikL) + b exp (+ikL)
a exp (ikL) b exp (+ikL)
_
=
_
Z
L
Z
0
_
.
The above two equations can be solved to give
a =
_
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
V
0
__
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
+
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
_
exp (2ikL)
_ (11.35)
b =
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
_
V
0
exp (2ikL)
__
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
+
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
_
exp (2ikL)
_ .
The impedance as seen by the generator can be obtained from the voltage
and the current at z=0:
Z
G
=
V(z = 0)
I(z = 0)
=
V
0
[a b]
Z
0
,
or
Z
G
Z
0
=
_
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
+
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
_
exp (2ikL)
__
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
_
exp (2ikL)
_ .
Or, introducing the reduced impedance z
G
= Z
L
/Z
0
and the new variable ,
where
=
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
=
_
z
L
1
z
L
+ 1
_
, (11.36)
one nds
z
G
=
_
1 + exp (2ikL)
1 exp (2ikL)
_
=
_
exp (+ikL) + exp (ikL)
exp (+ikL) exp (ikL)
_
. (11.37)
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 333
In the above development it has been assumed that the cable is lossless.
The expression for the load on the generator, eqn.(11.37), is rather com
plicated but it should be clear that the impedance as seen from the generator
may be quite dierent from the load impedance especially if the length of the
cable, L, is comparable to, or larger than, the wavelength of the disturbance
on the cable, , where
k =
2
= /v .
A few concrete examples may help to form a picture of how a cable can
be used to transform a load impedance.
11.6.1 Case(1). A Shorted Cable.
For this case Z
L
= 0 and = 1 from eqn.(11.36) so that
z
G
=
1 exp (2ikL)
1 + exp (2ikL)
= i tan kL .
First of all, notice that the impedance as seen from the generator is not in gen
eral equal to zero: in fact, when the cable length is such that kL=/2, 3/2, 5/2,
etc. the generator appears to be attached to an open circuit! If cable losses
are taken into account (see below), the load on the generator will be nite at
these lengths but large compared with the characteristic impedance providing
that the line is not too long. The condition kL=/2 corresponds to a cable
that is a quarter wavelength long, L=/4. Secondly, if the impedance as seen
from the generator is not zero (i.e. L not a multiple of a halfwavelength) or
innite (L an odd multiple of a quarter wavelength) it appears to be a pure
reactance if the cable is lossless. This makes sense since a lossless cable and
a lossless load cannot absorb any energy from the generator. For example, if
kL=/4, L=/8, the impedance at the generator is Z
G
= +iZ
0
, and therefore
the generator looks into a purely inductive load.
11.6.2 Case(2). An Openended Cable.
For this case Z
L
= and therefore = +1 from eqn.(11.36). The reduced
impedance at the generator terminals is given by
z
G
=
1 + exp (2ikL)
1 exp (2ikL)
= i cot kL .
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 334
The generator load appears to be an open circuit if the length of the cable
is a multiple of a halfwavelength. A cable whose length is an odd multiple
of a quarter wavelength presents a short circuit to the generator. For other
cable lengths the generator would appear to be connected to a capacitor or
an inductor according to whether cot kL was positive or negative.
11.6.3 Case(3). The Cable is Terminated by the Char
acteristic Impedance.
For this case = 0 from eqn.(11.36) and therefore the impedance at the
generator is z
G
= 1, or Z
G
= Z
0
. The load across the generator is
independent of the length of the cable.
11.6.4 Case(4). A Purely Inductive Load.
Let the inductor be such that Z
L
= iL is equal in magnitude to the charac
teristic impedance, Z
0
. Then z
L
= Z
L
/Z
0
and therefore
=
i 1
i + 1
= +i .
The normalized load on the generator, from eqn.(11.37), is
z
G
=
Z
G
Z
0
=
_
1 + sin 2kL +i cos 2kL
1 sin 2kL i cos 2kL
_
.
In the limit as kL /4 (L /8) the generator appears to be attached
to an open circuit. However, for a quarter wavelength line, kL = /2, the
generator load appears to be due to a pure capacitance such that 1/C = Z
0
.
For kL=3/4, L = 3/8, the generator looks into a short circuit. Finally for
a halfwavelength cable the generator sees a an inductive reactance such that
L = Z
0
. As the cable length is increased further the whole cycle is repeated.
11.6.5 Case(5). A Purely Capacitive Load.
Let the capacitor be such that Z
L
= i/C has the magnitude of the char
acteristic impedance, Z
0
. For this case z
L
= Z
L
/Z
0
= i, and
=
z
L
1
z
L
+ 1
= i .
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 335
The normalized impedance as seen by the generator is given by
z
G
=
Z
G
Z
0
=
_
1 sin 2kL i cos 2kL
1 + sin 2kL +i cos 2kL
_
.
This case is very similar to that of the cable terminated by an inductor.
For kL=/4, L=/8, the generator is short circuited because z
G
= 0. For a
quarter wavelength line, kL=/2, the generator looks into a pure inductance,
z
G
= +i. For kL=3/4, L=3/8, one nds that z
G
so that the generator
appears to be looking into an open circuit. Finally, for a halfwavelength line,
kL=, the same eect is obtained as if the load were connected directly across
the generator. The whole cycle is repeated as the cable length is increased.
11.6.6 Summary.
The following conclusions can be drawn from the above examples:
(1) A cable acts like an impedance transformer.
(2) A lossless cable whose length is an integral number of halfwavelengths
long eectively places the load directly across the generator terminals, i.e.
Z
G
= Z
L
.
(3) A lossless cable whose length is an odd multiple of a quarter wavelength
acts like an impedance inverter. For this case exp (2ikL) = 1 so that from
eqn.(11.37)
z
G
=
1
1 +
1/z
L
.
The formula for the impedance at the generator terminals in terms of
the load impedance and the length of the cable that connects the load to the
generator, eqn.(11.37), is very complicated. Graphical methods have been de
veloped for determining the load on the generator given the load impedance,
Z
L
, and the characteristics of the transmission line. A very common method
is based on the use of a Smith chart: it is described in detail in the book
Microwave Measurements by E.L.Ginzton, McGrawHill, New York, 1957;
section 4.9. The need for a graphical technique has become very much less
pressing now that digital computers have become readily available.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 336
11.7 The Slotted Line.
A slotted line is a section of a coaxial cable that uses air as a dielectric
medium and in which a narrow slot has been cut along the length of the
outer conductor; the slot is suciently narrow so that its presence does not
appreciably aect the electric eld distribution between the conducting cylin
ders which form the walls of the cable. A thin pin is inserted through the slot
and is used to pick up a signal that is a measure of the electric eld strength
in the coaxial cable. This pin is mounted on a carriage whose position along
the slotted line can be accurately measured. A picture and a sketch of a
slotted line can be found in Ginztons book (see his gs.(5.11) and (5.12)).
The signal picked up by the probe pin is usually rectied by means of a high
frequency diode and it is the resulting dc signal that is measured. The dc
signal provides a measure of the amplitude of the potential dierence at any
point along the slotted line. If the signal picked up is very small, less than
1 mV say, the dc signal provides a measure of the time averaged square
of the potential dierence between the outer and inner conductors; in many
instances the signal picked up is greater than 10 mV, and in such cases the
high frequency diodes commonly used for such measurements produce a dc
signal that is proportional to the root mean square of the potential dier
ence between the outer and inner conductors. If the slotted line is used to
connect a generator operating at a xed frequency with a load that is dier
ent from the characteristic impedance of the line, the rectied probe signal
will be found to exhibit a sinusoidal variation between a maximum signal
and a minimum signal as the probe is moved along the line. The ratio of
the maximum signal to the minimum signal as the probe is moved along the
slotted line provides a measure of the ratio of the forward wave amplitude
to the reected wave amplitude, i.e. the amplitudes a and b of eqn.(11.33)
that describes the position dependence of the voltage along the cable.
From eqn.(11.33)
V(z, t) = a exp (ikz)
_
1 +
b
a
exp (2ikz)
_
exp (it) ,
where, from eqns.(11.35)
_
b
a
_
=
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
exp (2ikL) .
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 337
But by denition, eqn.(11.36),
=  exp (i) =
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
,
or, in terms of the normalized impedance
z
L
=
Z
L
Z
0
one has
=
_
z
L
1
z
L
+ 1
_
=  exp (i) . (11.38)
The ratio (b/a) can be written
_
b
a
_
=  exp (i[2kL ]) ,
from which one obtains
V(z, t) = a exp (ikz) (1+   exp (i[2k(z L) +])) exp (it) ,
and
V
(z, t) = a
) ,
or
< V
2
>=
 a 
2
2
_
1+  
2
+2   cos (2k[z L] +)
_
. (11.39)
The maximum value of < V
2
>, or of
< V
2
>, occurs at those positions
z such that (2k[z L] + ) = 2n where n is an integer. These maxima
are spaced a halfwavelength apart; the variation of the pickup signal as
the probe is moved along the slotted line provides a direct measure of the
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 338
wavelength of the radiation. The maximum value of the root mean square
potential dierence is
_
< V
2
>
_
max
=
 a 
2
(1+  ) .
The minimum value of the pickup signal occurs at those positions such that
(2k[z L]+) = m where m is an odd integer: these minima are also spaced
one halfwavelength apart. At a minimum the root mean square voltage is
_
< V
2
>
_
min
=
 a 
2
(1  ) .
The ratio of these two voltages is called the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
and is usually designated by VSWR:
VSWR =
1+  
1  
. (11.40)
This expression can be inverted to give
 =
_
VSWR 1
VSWR + 1
_
. (11.41)
The Voltage Standing Wave Ratio, which can be easily measured by means
of a slotted line, provides information about the load impedance through the
absolute value of the parameter = (z
L
1)/(z
L
+1). In order to determine
the phase of the load impedance it is also necessary to measure the phase of
the parameter : from the denition of
z
L
=
Z
L
Z
0
=
_
1 +
1
_
. (11.42)
Thus a knowledge of the amplitude and phase of serves to determine the
amplitude and phase of the load impedance, Z
L
. The phase of can be
obtained from the position of the voltage maximum or minimum on the
slotted line; it is preferable to use the position of the minimum because the
position of a minimum signal can be measured much more accurately than
the position of a maximum signal.
The structure of the relationship between the complex number and
the complex load impedance, z
L
= Z
L
/Z
0
, is such that for a load impedance
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 339
having an inductive component the phase angle must lie between 0 and
radians, whereas for a load impedance having a capacitive component the
phase angle must lie between 0 and radians. As an example consider a
purely inductive load such that z
L
= +i. For this case
=
1 +i
1 +i
.
The numerator of may be written
N =
_
1 +
2
exp (i[ ]) ,
where tan = . The denominator of may be written
D =
_
1 +
2
exp (i) ,
where, as above, tan = . Thus for this example
= exp (i[ 2]) ,
where for 0 , and for very large 0. This case is a special
one but using complex algebra it can be shown that must lie between 0 and
radians for any load having an inductive component. Consider the position
of a minimum in the slotted line voltage corresponding to an inductive load.
From eqn.(11.39) one of the minima occurs at position z when
2k(z L) + = ,
or since k = 2/, the minimum occurs at
z = L +
( )
4
.
The position of this particular minimum ranges from z=L for = to
z = L + (/4) for = 0. Clearly one cannot measure the position of this
minimum because it lies outside the slotted line (z>L). However, the pat
tern described by eqn.(11.39) repeats itself every half wavelength along the
slotted line. Therefore one has only to measure the position of the voltage
minimum relative to a position, z
2
, located exactly one half wavelength from
the end of the slotted line. This position, z
2
, can be found simply by locating
the position of the appropriate minimum signal when the load impedance is
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 340
replaced by a short circuit. The condition for the position of a minimum
voltage with the load in place can then be written
2k(z z
2
) + =
and therefore
=
4
(z z
2
) , (11.43)
where z > z
2
for a load having an inductive component.
For a load having a capacitive component consider the minimum corre
sponding to
2k(z L) + = .
This minimum in the standing wave voltage occurs at
z = L
( +)
4
.
Since lies between 0 and radians for this case the position of the min
imum varies from z = L /4 to z=L. In other words the position of the
minimum is shifted towards the generator. This minimum is accessible on
the slotted line but it is more convenient to measure the position of that
particular minimum that is located near z
2
, the position that is a half wave
length removed from the end of the slotted line. The condition that describes
the position of the minimum that lies within /4 of z
2
is given by
2k(z z
2
) + = ,
and therefore
= +
4
(z
2
z) , (11.44)
where for an impedance having a capacitive component z
2
> z.
Recapitulation.
In order to determine an unknown impedance using a slotted line one
must obtain the amplitude of the parameter from the voltage standing
wave ratio, eqn.(11.41), as well as the phase of from the position of a
voltage minimum on the slotted line. The phase of , , can be determined
from the position of the minimum, z, relative to a position, z
2
, located exactly
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 341
/2 from the end of the slotted line. The position of z
2
is determined by the
position of the appropriate minimum when the slotted line is terminated with
a short circuit. With the slotted line terminated by the unknown impedance
one looks for a voltage minimum located within /4 of the shorted position
z
2
. If the position of this minimum is displaced from z
2
towards the load
then that impedance has an inductive component and the phase angle is to
be calculated using eqn.(11.43). If the position of the minimum is displaced
from z
2
towards the generator then the load has a capacitive component and
the phase angle is to be calculated using eqn.(11.44).
11.8 Transmission Line with Losses.
The voltage and current on a lossless transmission line must satisfy the fol
lowing equations:
2
V
z
2
=
0
2
V
t
2
, (11.45)
2
I
z
2
=
0
2
I
t
2
.
These are a direct consequence of Maxwells equations. Strictly speaking,
they are only correct providing that , the dielectric constant, is truly a
constant and therefore independent of frequency. Even the best of dielectric
insulating materials exhibit some losses that are frequency dependent: in
many cases the imaginary part of the dielectric constant is proportional to
the frequency. For a time dependence exp (it) the above two equations,
(11.45), become
2
V
z
2
=
0
2
V , (11.46)
2
I
z
2
=
0
2
I ,
where may have real and imaginary parts, both of which will depend upon
the frequency. Solutions of eqns.(11.46) that are harmonic in space, i.e. V
and I are proportional to exp (ikz), must be described by a wavevector k
that satises the condition
k
2
=
0
2
.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 342
In the presence of dielectric losses will in general be a complex quantity,
and therefore so also must the wavevector be complex :
k =
0
,
so that
k = (k
1
ik
2
) . (11.47)
The general solutions of the wave equations (11.46) for the voltage and
current on the transmission line in the presence of a lossy dielectric can be
written
V(z, t) = [a exp (k
2
z) exp (ik
1
z) + b exp (k
2
z) exp (ik
1
z)] (11.48)
exp (it) ,
I(z, t) =
1
Z
0
[a exp (k
2
z) exp (ik
1
z) b exp (k
2
z) exp (ik
1
z)] exp (it) ,
where (k
2
/k
1
) 1 for a high quality cable, and k
1
, k
2
are the real and
imaginary parts of the wavevector. Notice that k
2
must be positive in order
that the amplitude of the forward propagating wave decays with distance.
In actual fact, part of the energy loss as a wave propagates down a
transmission line is due to Ohmic losses in the skindepth of the conductors:
i.e. the metal electrodes do possess a nite conductivity and therefore there
are energy losses due to the shielding currents that ow in them. It can be
easily shown, using the methods of Chapter(10), that the rate of energy loss
in each conductor per unit area of surface is given by
< S
n
>=
1
2
_
0
2
0
 H
0

2
Watts/m
2
.
< S
n
> is the time averaged Poynting vector component corresponding to
energy ow into the conductor surface,
0
is the dc conductivity of the metal
wall, H
0
is the magnetic eld strength at the conductor surface, and = 2f
is the circular frequency. This energy loss must be added to the energy loss
in the dielectric material. The conductor losses can be taken into account by
increasing the imaginary part of the wavevector, k
2
, in eqns.(11.48). One
can write
V(z, t) = [a exp (z) exp (ik
1
z) + b exp (z) exp (+ik
1
z)] (11.49)
exp (it)
I(z, t) =
1
Z
0
[a exp (z) exp (ik
1
z) b exp (z) exp (+ik
1
z)] exp (it)
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 343
where is an empirical parameter whose frequency dependence can be mea
sured for a particular cable. The constants a,b in (11.49) must be adjusted
to satisfy the boundary condition at the position of the load; i.e. at the load
Z
L
= V/I. For a cable having a characteristic impedance Z
0
that connects a
generator at z=0 with a load at z=L this condition requires
Z
L
Z
0
=
_
a exp (L) exp (ik
1
L) + b exp (L) exp (ik
1
L)
a exp (L) exp (ik
1
L) b exp (L) exp (ik
1
L)
_
,
from which
b
a
=
_
Z
L
Z
0
1
Z
L
Z
0
+ 1
_
exp (2L) exp (2ik
1
L) .
Using the previous notation z
L
= Z
L
/Z
0
, and z
G
= Z
G
/Z
0
, and
=
z
L
1
z
L
+ 1
=  exp (i) ,
one nds
z
G
=
_
1 + exp (2L) exp (2ik
1
L)
1 exp (2L) exp (2ik
1
L)
_
. (11.50)
Equation (11.50) shows that the impedance seen by the generator approaches
the characteristic impedance of the cable if the load is connected to the
generator through a cable that is long compared with the attenuation length
(1/).
Characteristics for a few representative coaxial cables are listed in Table(11.1),
and their attenuation lengths at a number of frequencies are listed in Table(11.2).
The length of cable for which the amplitude of a voltage pulse is attenuated
to (1/e)= 0.368 of its original amplitude is given by (1/). For example, this
attenuation length is 9.8 meters for RG8 cable at 5 GHz.
The attenuation parameter, , for the cables listed in Table(11.2) are
observed to be approximately proportional to
, and this suggests that
most of the losses in these cables is due to eddy currents in the conductors.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 344
Cable Outer Diam. Characteristic Velocity Capacitance
in inches Impedance,Ohms m/sec Farads/m
RG8 0.405 52 1.98 10
8
96.8 10
12
RG58U 0.195 53 1.98 10
8
93.5 10
12
RG59U 0.242 75 1.98 10
8
68.9 10
12
RG62U 0.242 93 2.52 10
8
44.3 10
12
RG174U 0.100 50 1.98 10
8
98.4 10
12
Table 11.1: Characteristics of some commonly used commercial coaxial ca
bles. The dielectric material between the conductors is polyethylene. The
data was taken from the 1985/86 catalogue of RAE Industrial Electronics
Ltd., Vancouver, BC.
CHAPTER 11. TRANSMISSION LINES. 345
Cable 1.0 10.0 50.0 100 200 400 1000 3000 5000
RG8 5.67 2.08 4.91 7.18 1.02 1.55 0.030 0.060 0.102
10
4
10
3
10
3
10
3
10
2
10
2
RG58U 1.25 4.72 1.19 1.74 2.61 3.97 6.61 0.142 0.227
10
3
10
3
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
2
RG59U 1.25 4.16 9.07 1.28 1.85 2.64 4.53 0.100 0.196
10
3
10
3
10
3
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
2
RG62U 9.4 3.21 7.18 1.02 1.44 2.00 3.29 0.070 0.113
10
4
10
3
10
3
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
2
RG174U 8.69 1.47 2.49 3.36 4.53 6.61 1.13 0.242 0.374
10
3
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
2
10
1
Table 11.2: Frequency dependence of the attenuation parameter for some
selected coaxial cables. V(z) = V
0
exp (z). Frequencies in MHz. The
data is taken from the 1985/86 catalogue of RAE Industrial Electronics Ltd.,
Vancouver, BC.
Chapter 12
Waveguides.
A study of the propagation of electromagnetic waves through rect
angular and circular hollow conducting pipes.
12.1 Simple Transverse Electric Modes.
Consider two innite plane waves of circular frequency oscillating in phase,
and such that their propagation vectors lie in the xz plane and make the
angles with the zaxis: one wave has a positive xcomponent of wave
vector, the other has a negative xcomponent of wavevector, as illustrated
in g.(12.1). Explicit expressions for the electric and magnetic eld compo
nents of these waves for the case in which the electric eld in each wave has
the same amplitude and is polarized along the ydirection are as follows:
Wave Number (1)
E
y1
= E
0
exp (ixk sin ) exp (i[zk cos t]) ,
H
x1
=
E
0
Z
cos exp (ixk sin ) exp (i[zk cos t]) ,
H
z1
=
E
0
Z
sin exp (ixk sin ) exp (i[zk cos t]) .
Wave Number (2)
E
y2
= E
0
exp (ixk sin ) exp (i[zk cos t]) ,
346
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 347
H
x2
=
E
0
Z
cos exp (ixk sin ) exp (i[zk cos t]) ,
H
z2
=
E
0
Z
sin exp (ixk sin ) exp (i[zk cos t]) .
In writing these equations it has been assumed that the waves are prop
agating in a medium characterized by a real dielectric constant =
r
0
,
and a magnetic permeability
0
. The wavevector is k =
r
(/c), and the
wave impedance is Z =
_
0
/ = Z
0
/
r
Ohms, where Z
0
= 377 Ohms.
The above elds satisfy Maxwells equations. One can now introduce two
perfectly conducting innite planes that lie parallel with the xz plane and
which are separated by an arbitrary spacing, b. The plane waves of g.(12.1)
still satisfy Maxwells equations between the conducting surfaces: they also
satisfy the required boundary conditions on the electric and magnetic elds.
In the rst place, there is only one electric eld component, E
y
, and it is
normal to the conducting planes, consequently the tangential component of
2
,
3
2
, etc.
_
. (12.4)
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 348
Figure 12.1: Two plane waves having the same frequency, oscillating in phase,
and propagating in the xz plane at an angle with respect to the zaxis.
This means that the wave dened by eqns.(12.1),(12.2), and (12.3) can prop
agate along the hollow rectangular pipe bounded by perfectly conducting
planes spaced b apart along the ydirection, and spaced a apart along the
xdirection where a= m/(k sin ), and where m is an odd integer, and yet
satisfy the boundary conditions imposed by the presence of the perfectly con
ducting surfaces. The distribution of the electric and magnetic elds across
the section of the waveguide formed by the intersection of the four conduct
ing planes is shown in g.(12.2) for the mode corresponding to k sin = /a.
The width of the waveguide along the xdirection, a, determines the
propagation angle for waves that satisfy the boundary condition E
y
= 0 on
x=a/2:
k sin = m
a
=
r
_
c
_
sin .
The component of the propagation vector parallel with the waveguide axis,
along z, is given by
k
g
= k cos =
r
_
c
_
cos .
The sum of the squares of these two components must be equal to the square
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 349
Figure 12.2: The lowest frequency transverse electric mode (a TE mode)
for a rectangular waveguide whose crosssectional dimensions are a and b,
where a is greater than b.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 350
of the wavevector k, where k =
r
/c:
k
2
= k
2
g
+ k
2
sin
2
=
r
_
c
_
2
,
from which
k
2
g
+ m
2
_
a
_
2
=
r
_
c
_
2
, (12.5)
where m is an odd integer.
The most important waveguide mode is that for which m=1, the mode
illustrated in g.(12.2). In most applications the waveguide is lled with air
for which
r
= 1. For this m=1 mode, and assuming that
r
=1.0, the elds
are given by
E
y
= A cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) , (12.6)
H
x
=
A
Z
0
_
ck
g
_
cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) ,
H
z
= i
A
Z
0
_
c
a
_
sin
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) ,
where Z
0
= c
0
=
_
0
/
0
. The mode of eqns.(12.6), g.(12.2), is called
a transverse electric mode, or a TE mode, because the electric eld has no
component along the guide axis, i.e. no component along the direction of
propagation of the waveguide mode. Notice that the ratio E
y
/H
x
= Z
G
is
independent of position inside the waveguide; in particular, it is indepen
dent of position across the waveguide crosssection. The magnetic eld H
x
is
equivalent to a surface current density J
s
y
= H
x
Amps/m (fromcurl(
H) =
J
f
),
and E
y
has the units of Volts/m. The wave impedance Z
G
= E
y
/H
x
therefore
has the units of Ohms: it plays a role for waveguide problems that is similar
to the role played by the characteristic impedance for transmission line prob
lems. The analogy between transmission lines and waveguides is discussed
in a very clear manner in the article The Elements of Wave Propagation us
ing the Impedance Concept by H.G.Booker, Electrical Engineering Journal,
volume 94, pages 171202, 1947.
The Poynting vector,
S =
E
x
) =
1
2
 A 
2
Z
0
_
ck
g
_
cos
2
_
x
a
_
. (12.7)
It is useful to integrate the timeaveraged value of the Poynting vector over
the crosssectional area of the waveguide in order to obtain the rate at which
energy is carried past a particular section of the guide. A simple integration
gives
b
a/2
_
a/2
< S
z
> dx =
ab
4
 A 
2
Z
0
_
ck
g
_
Watts . (12.8)
The timeaveraged energy density associated with a waveguide mode is
given by
< W >=
1
2
Real
_
2
+
2
_
,
or
< W >=
1
4
Real
_
E
y
E
y
+
0
H
x
H
x
+
0
H
z
H
z
_
. (12.9)
For the fundamental TE
10
mode, eqns.(12.6), one obtains
< W > =
0
4
 A 
2
cos
2
_
x
a
_
+ (12.10)
+
0
4
 A 
2
Z
2
0
_
_
ck
g
_
2
cos
2
_
x
a
_
+
_
c
a
_
2
sin
2
_
x
a
_
_
.
Integrate this energy density across a section of the guide in order to obtain
the average energy per unit length of the waveguide:
b
a/2
_
a/2
< W > dx =
ab
8
 A 
2
_
0
+
0
Z
2
0
_
_
ck
g
_
2
+
_
c
a
_
2
__
(12.11)
=
ab
4
0
 A 
2
Joules/m ,
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 352
where we have used
0
/Z
2
0
=
0
, and for a waveguide lled with air
_
ck
g
_
2
+
_
c
a
_
2
=
r
= 1.0 .
The velocity with which energy is transported down the guide is called
the group velocity, v
g
. The group velocity must have a value such that its
product with the energy density per unit length of guide, eqn.(12.11), gives
the rate at which energy is transported past a waveguide section, eqn.(12.8):
i.e.
v
g
ab
0
4
 A 
2
=
ab
4
 A 
2
Z
0
_
ck
g
_
.
Thus
v
g
= c
_
ck
g
_
m/sec. (12.12)
It is easy to verify by direct dierentiation of eqn.(12.5) that this velocity is
also given by the relation
v
g
=
k
g
. (12.13)
Equation (12.13) is valid for an arbitrary relative dielectric constant: from
(12.5)
v
g
=
c
r
_
ck
g
_
. (12.14)
The phase velocity, v
phase
, on the other hand is obtained from the condition
k
g
z t = constant .
That is z must increase at the rate
v
phase
=
dz
dt
=
k
g
in order to remain on a crest as the wave propagates along the guide. As the
guide wavevector, k
g
, approaches zero the phase velocity may become very
large much larger than the velocity of light in vacuum. This occurs because
the phase velocity measures the rate of propagation down the guide of two
intersecting wave fronts as these waves bounce back and forth across the
guide ( see g.(12.3)). This intersection velocity clearly becomes innitely
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 353
Figure 12.3: The phase velocity along z is the velocity with which the in
tersection between two wavefronts propagates along the waveguide. This
velocity, v
phase
= /k
g
, becomes very large as /2.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 354
large in the limit as the wavefronts become parallel with the guide axis, i.e. in
the limit as the guide wavenumber, k
g
, goes to zero. The velocity of energy
transport down the guide, the group velocity, goes to zero as approaches
/2, the condition corresponding to waves that simply bounce forth and back
along the xdirection between the perfectly conducting planes at x = a/2.
The group velocity, the velocity with which information can be transmitted
down the guide, is always less than the velocity of light in vacuum.
The frequency at which the group velocity goes to zero can be calculated
from eqn.(12.5) by setting k
g
= 0, since the group velocity is proportional to
k
g
from (12.14):
m
=
c
a
r
.
The waveguide is a high pass lter that will transmit energy for frequencies
larger than the cuto frequency
m
. For
r
= 1 and a=1 cm, the cuto
frequency is
m
= 9.42 10
10
radians/sec. corresponding to a frequency of
f=15 GHz.
It should be clear from the above construction that eqns.(12.6) represents
the solution of Maxwells equations for the TE
10
mode that carries energy in
the positive zdirection. The TE
10
mode that carries energy in the negative
zdirection is described by
E
y
= B cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z +t]) , (12.15)
H
x
=
B
Z
0
_
ck
g
_
cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z +t]) ,
H
z
= i
B
Z
0
_
c
a
_
sin
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z +t]) ,
where B is an arbitrary amplitude (NOT the magnetic eld!).
In order to answer the question of what happens if the frequency is less
than the cuto frequency,
m
, it is best to start from Maxwells equations.
Consider the case for which there is only a ycomponent of electric eld.
From
curl(
E) =
B
t
= i
0
H ,
for a time dependence exp (it), and for the permeability of free space,
one obtains
i
0
H
x
=
E
y
z
, (12.16)
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 355
and
i
0
H
z
=
E
y
x
. (12.17)
From
curl(
H) =
D
t
= i
E
one obtains
H
x
z
H
z
x
= i E
y
.
The above equations can be combined to give a single second order equation
for E
y
:
2
E
y
x
2
+
2
E
y
z
2
=
r
_
c
_
2
E
y
.
For an electric eld having the form
E
y
= A cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t])
it follows that
_
a
_
2
+ k
2
g
=
r
_
c
_
2
,
or
k
2
g
=
r
_
c
_
2
a
_
2
.
For a frequency less than the cuto frequency corresponding to
m
=
c/a
r
the square of the wavevector k
g
becomes negative and therefore
its square root becomes pure imaginary. A pure imaginary wavevector
k
g
= i ,
where is a real number, corresponds to a disturbance that decays away
exponentially along the guide either to the right or to the left. For example,
k
g
= +i gives a disturbance of the form
E
y
= A cos
_
x
a
_
exp (z) exp (it) , (12.18)
with magnetic eld components (from eqn.(12.16) and eqn.(12.17))
H
x
= i
1
Z
0
_
c
_
A cos
_
x
a
_
exp (z) exp (it) , (12.19)
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 356
and
H
z
= i
1
Z
0
_
c
a
_
A sin
_
x
a
_
exp (z) exp (it) , (12.20)
Using these components, it is easy to show that the timeaveraged zcomponent
of the Poynting vector, S
z
= E
y
H
x
, is exactly equal to zero. The average
energy density stored in the elds is not zero:
< W
E
>=
4
 A 
2
cos
2
_
x
a
_
exp (2z) , (12.21)
and
< W
B
> =
0
4
 A 
2
Z
2
0
exp (2z) (12.22)
_
_
c
_
2
cos
2
_
x
a
_
+
_
c
a
_
2
sin
2
_
x
a
_
_
.
These expressions correspond to the energy density stored in the electric
eld, (12.21), and to the energy density stored in the magnetic eld, (12.22).
If a source of energy oscillating at a frequency less than the cuto frequency
is introduced into a waveguide at some point, the resulting electromagnetic
elds will remain localized around the source, and the eective load on the
source will be purely reactive for a waveguide whose walls are perfectly
conducting. In the case of a real guide whose walls have some nite resistivity,
the load on a source oscillating at a frequency which is less than the cuto
frequency will appear to be partly resistive but mainly reactive.
12.2 Higher Order Modes.
The waveguide modes discussed above are very simple ones because they pre
sumed that there was no spatial variation of the elds along the ydirection.
There exist waveguide solutions of Maxwells equations that involve spatial
variations along all three axes: these higher order modes correspond to the
coordinated propagation of plane waves whose wavevectors make an oblique
angle with the guide axis so that they are repeatedly reected from all four
walls. These modes divide naturally into two classes:
(a) Transverse Electric (TE) Modes;
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 357
(b)Transverse Magnetic (TM) Modes.
A transverse electric mode is one in which there is no component of the
electric eld parallel to the direction of propagation. A transverse magnetic
mode is one in which there is no component of the magnetic eld parallel to
the direction of propagation. For both classes of modes one seeks solutions
of Maxwells equations that correspond to waves travelling down the wave
guide; i.e. all of the eld components are required to be proportional to the
phasor
exp (i[k
g
z t]) .
Furthermore, it is convenient at this point to change the description of the
waveguide coordinate system so that the origin is located at one corner of
the hollow rectangular pipe as shown in g.(12.4): in the new system the
walls of the guide are formed by the intersection of the planes x=0,a and
y=0,b. For a time variation of the form exp (it) Maxwells equations
become
curl(
E) = i
0
H , (12.23)
curl(
H) = i
E .
The divergence of any curl is zero, and therefore the electric and the magnetic
elds satisfy the conditions
div(
E) = 0 , (12.24)
div(
H) = 0 .
Note that the equations for
E and
H are very similar. This symmetry between
the equations for
E and
H can be exploited to generate a second set of
solutions to Maxwells equations from a primary set of elds that satisfy
Maxwells equations. This works as follows: suppose that one has found the
elds
E
1
and
H
1
that satisfy eqns.(12.23). Now consider a second set of elds
E
2
= Z
H
1
, (12.25)
H
2
=
E
1
/Z ,
where Z =
_
0
/ is the wave impedance for a medium characterized by a
permeability
0
and a dielectric constant . Substitute these new elds into
eqns.(12.23) to obtain
curl(
E
2
) = i
0
H
2
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 358
Figure 12.4: A rectangular waveguide formed by conducting walls at x=0,
x=a, y=0, and y=b. The lossless material inside the guide is characterized
by a real dielectric constant , and a permeability
0
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 359
Upon the substitution (12.25) this becomes
curl(
H
1
) =
i
0
Z
2
E
1
= i
E
1
,
and this by hypothesis satises Maxwells eqns.(12.23). Similarly, from (12.23)
one has
curl(
H
2
) = i
E
2
.
Upon substitution of eqns.(12.25) one nds
curl(
E
1
) = i
0
H
1
,
so that the new elds,
E
2
and
H
2
satisfy both of eqns.(12.23). Clearly
eqns.(12.24) are satised since
E
2
and
H
2
are proportional to
E
1
and
H
1
.
It follows that the prescription of eqn.(12.25) can be used to generate a sec
ond, dierent, set of solutions for Maxwells equations from a primary set of
solutions. This procedure can often be used to avoid a great deal of compu
tational tedium.
12.2.1 TM Modes.
In order to proceed with the rectangular waveguide problem it is convenient
to use the vector potential
A, and the scalar potential, V, where
H = curl(
A) , (12.26)
E = grad(V)
0
A
t
.
The choice
A
z
= A(x, y) exp (i[k
g
z t]) , (12.27)
plus A
x
= A
y
= 0 will guarantee that the zcomponent of the magnetic eld,
H, is zero: in other words, this choice of vector potential will generate only
TM modes, and
H
x
=
A
z
y
,
H
y
=
A
z
x
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 360
For a time dependence exp (it), and using (12.26) in Maxwells equations
(12.23), one nds
curlcurl(
A) =
r
_
c
_
2
A +i grad(V) .
But in cartesian coordinates
curlcurl(
A) =
2
A +graddiv(
A) ,
so that
A +
r
_
c
_
2
A = grad
_
div(
A) i V
_
.
As explained in Chapter(7), one can set
i V = div(
A) ,
so that for this problem where there are no driving charges or currents one
nds
A +
r
_
c
_
2
A = 0 .
In particular, if
A has only a zcomponent one nds
2
A
z
+
r
_
c
_
2
A
z
= 0 , (12.28)
and
i V =
A
z
z
.
We require solutions that propagate along z: ie solutions that are propor
tional to exp (ik
g
z). Thus write
A
z
(x, y, z, t) = A(x, y) exp (i[k
g
z t]) ,
for which A(x, y) must satisfy
2
A
x
2
+
2
A
Y
2
k
2
g
A +
r
_
c
_
2
A = 0 . (12.29)
This equation is solved by products of sines and cosines:
A(x, y) = constant (sin (px) or cos (px)) (sin (qy) or cos (qy)) ,
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 361
where
p
2
+ q
2
+ k
2
g
=
r
_
c
_
2
. (12.30)
The particular combination of sines and cosines required must be chosen
so that
H satises the boundary condition that the normal component of
c
_
2
. (12.33)
Notice that A
z
=0 at the walls of the waveguide. E
z
is proportional to A
z
so that if A
z
=0 on the walls of the guide then the tangential component E
z
will also vanish on the walls of the waveguide as is required by the boundary
conditions on the tangential components of E.
The electric eld components can be most easily calculated from the
second of eqns.(12.23),
curl(
H) = i
E .
E
x
=
i
_
H
y
z
_
,
E
y
=
+i
_
H
x
z
_
,
E
z
=
i
_
H
y
x
H
x
y
_
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 362
The resulting electric eld components are (dropping the factor exp (i[k
g
z t])):
E
x
=
_
m
a
_
_
k
g
_
A
0
cos
_
mx
a
_
sin
_
ny
b
_
, (12.34)
E
y
=
_
n
b
_
_
k
g
_
A
0
sin
_
mx
a
_
cos
_
ny
b
_
,
E
z
=
_
i
_ _
_
m
a
_
2
+
_
n
b
_
2
_
A
0
sin
_
mx
a
_
sin
_
ny
b
_
.
Notice that these electric eld components satisfy the requirement that the
tangential components of E must vanish at the walls of the waveguide. The
eld components eqns.(12.32) and (12.34) correspond to the TM
mn
mode.
For a propagating wave the value of k
2
g
calculated from (12.33) must be
positive. This introduces a cuto frequency,
m
, such that k
g
=0. This
cuto frequency is given by
r
_
m
c
_
2
=
_
m
a
_
2
+
_
n
b
_
2
. (12.35)
For given interior dimensions of the waveguide there is a lower limit to the
frequency for which a particular mode may be propagated along the wave
guide. For example, a popular Xband waveguide has interior dimensions a=
2.286 cm and b= 1.016 cm. For this guide the TM
11
mode can be propagated
only for frequencies greater than 16.15 GHz if
r
= 1. There are no TM modes
corresponding to m=0 or n=0 since the elds are zero if m=0 or if n=0
because A(x,y)=0 from eqn.(12.31). Thus the lowest TM frequency that can
be propagated down the above guide is 16.15 GHz.
Nonpropagating TM modes do exist for frequencies less than the cut
o frequency. If <
m
then k
g
calculated from (12.30) is negative. This
means that k
g
is a purely imaginary number, k
g
= i say. The phasor
exp (i[k
g
z t]) becomes exp (z) exp (it) corresponding to a distur
bance that decays to a small amplitude over a distance z (1/).
12.2.2 TE Modes.
There exists another group of modes for which E
z
= 0; these are the TE
modes. Using the symmetry relations eqns.(12.25) and the magnetic elds
(12.32) one might guess that the TE mode electric elds ought to be given
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 363
by (the factor exp (i[k
g
z t]) is suppressed)
E
x
= Z
_
n
b
_
A
0
sin
_
mx
a
_
cos
_
ny
b
_
,
E
y
= Z
_
m
a
_
A
0
cos
_
mx
a
_
sin
_
ny
b
_
.
These electric elds satisfy Maxwells equations but they do not satisfy the
boundary condition that the tangential components of
E must vanish at the
waveguide walls: ie. E
x
=0 at y=0,b and E
y
=0 at x=0,a (see g.(12.4)).
However, the following equations for the electric eld components do satisfy
the required boundary conditions:
E
x
= E
1
cos
_
mx
a
_
sin
_
ny
b
_
,
E
y
= E
2
sin
_
mx
a
_
cos
_
ny
b
_
,
E
z
= 0 .
These eld components vanish on the waveguide walls. The electric eld
must also satisfy the Maxwell equation div(
0
E
y
z
(12.37)
=
k
g
0
_
m
a
_
E
0
sin
_
mx
a
_
cos
_
ny
b
_
,
H
y
=
i
0
E
x
z
=
k
g
0
_
n
b
_
E
0
cos
_
mx
a
_
sin
_
ny
b
_
,
H
z
=
i
0
_
E
y
x
E
x
y
_
=
i
0
E
0
_
_
m
a
_
2
+
_
n
b
_
2
_
cos
_
mx
a
_
cos
_
ny
b
_
.
Eqns.(12.36) and (12.37) satisfy Maxwells equations and also the boundary
conditions that the tangential components of
E and the normal components of
0
A sin
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) ,
H
z
=
i
0
_
a
_
A cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) ,
where A is a constant and
k
2
g
=
r
_
c
_
2
a
_
2
. (12.39)
The cuto frequency for this mode, corresponding to k
g
=0, is given by
r
_
c
_
2
=
_
a
_
2
.
For the popular Xband waveguide used above for illustrative purposes one
has a=2.286 cm and b=1.016 cm. For this guide, and
r
= 1, the cuto
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 365
m n TE
mn
(GHz) TM
mn
(GHz)
1 0 6.557 No TM Mode
0 1 14.753 No TM Mode
1 1 16.145 16.145
2 0 13.114 No TM Mode
2 1 19.740 19.740
0 2 29.507 No TM Mode
1 2 30.227 30.227
2 2 32.290 32.290
3 0 19.671 No TM Mode
3 1 24.589 24.589
3 2 35.463 35.463
3 3 48.435 48.435
Table 12.1: Cuto frequencies for the lowest transverse electric (TE) modes
and the lowest transverse magnetic (TM) modes in Xband waveguides (RG
52/U or WR90 brass guides). The internal dimensions of Xband waveguides
are a= 0.900 inches = 2.286 cm, and b= 0.400 inches = 1.016 cm. The ex
ternal dimensions of the guide are 1.00 x 0.50 inches. The cuto frequencies
were calculated for
r
= 1 using
_
mn
c
_
2
=
_
m
a
_
2
+
_
n
b
_
2
.
frequency for the TE
10
mode is 6.56 GHz. Cuto frequencies for various
modes in this Xband waveguide are listed in Table(12.1). Notice that only
one mode, the TE
10
mode, can be propagated along this waveguide for
frequencies between 6.6 and 13.1 GHz.
12.3 Waveguide Discontinuities.
Any discontinuity in the dielectric constant, in the permeability, or any dis
continuity in the dimensions of a waveguide will result in reected waves. For
simplicity, we will discuss the case in which the waveguide will support the
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 366
Figure 12.5: A TE
10
wave incident on a conducting diaphragm placed across
the waveguide.
Figure 12.6: A TE
10
wave incident on a conducting diaphragm placed across
the waveguide. The magnetic elds on each side of the diaphragm are related
by the condition curl(
H) = J
s
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 367
propagation of only the TE
10
mode. A forward propagating TE
10
mode that
encounters an obstacle in the waveguide will, in general, be partially reected
and partially transmitted. This can be illustrated for a particularly simple
obstacle; let a very thin sheet of material of thickness d and characterized by
a conductivity be placed across the guide as illustrated in g.(12.5). The
thickness of the sheet, d, is assumed to be very thin compared with the skin
depth =
_
2/(
0
) , see Chpt.(10), Section(10.4). The thickness d is also
assumed to be very small compared with the wavelength
g
= 2/k
g
. The
tangential component of the electric eld in this case, E
y
, must be continuous
across the diaphragm
E
T
= E
0
+ E
R
. (12.40)
The electric eld at the conducting diaphragm generates a current density
along y whose magnitude is J
y
= E
T
. When integrated across the lm
thickness d this current density produces an equivalent surface current sheet
having the strength
J
s
= d E
T
Amps/m.
This current sheet causes a discontinuity in the tangential component of
H
from Amp`eres law; i.e. the magnetic eld components, H
x
, on either side of
the lm are related by
__
Loop
curl(
H)
dS =
_
C
H
dL = total current through the Loop. (12.41)
The loop in question is illustrated in g.(12.6). Condition (12.41) results in
the equation
H
0
H
R
H
T
= J
s
= d E
T
,
or using the waveguide impedance, Z
G
=
0
/k
g
,
(E
0
E
R
E
T
)
Z
G
= d E
T
,
or
E
0
E
R
= [1 + Z
G
d] E
T
. (12.42)
Equations (12.40) and (12.42) can be solved to obtain the reected and trans
mitted wave amplitudes:
R =
E
R
E
0
=
Z
G
d
(2 + Z
G
d)
, (12.43)
T =
E
T
E
0
=
2
(2 + Z
G
d)
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 368
Figure 12.7: A transmission line, characteristic impedance Z
0
Ohms, shunted
by a resistance of R Ohms. The incident wave amplitude is V
0
Volts; the
reected wave amplitude is V
R
Volts; the transmitted wave amplitude is V
T
Volts. The reection coecient is R = V
R
/V
0
= (Z
0
/R)/ [2 + (Z
0
/R)].
The transmission coecient is T = V
T
/V
0
= 2/ [2 + (Z
0
/R)].
These reection and transmission coecients are the same as would be
calculated for the problem of a resistor, R=1/d, placed across a transmission
line whose characteristic impedance is Z
G
, g.(12.7). The close analogy be
tween waveguide problems and transmission line problems has been stressed
in the article by H.G.Booker,The Elements of Wave Propagation using the
Impedance Concept, Electrical Engineering Journal, Volume 94,pages 171
198, 1947. The analogy holds for more general impedances. For an incident
TE
10
mode a thin wire placed across the waveguide parallel with the electric
eld has the same reection and transmission coecients as an inductive re
actance placed across a transmission line, g.(12.8). Similarly, the thin metal
diaphragms illustrated in g.(12.9) give rise to reection and transmission co
ecients for the waveguide that are the same as would be produced by the
circuits on the right hand side of g.(12.9) if they were to be placed across a
transmission line.
A thin metal diaphragm containing a hole such as that shown in g.(12.9c)
can be used to produce a resonant cavity, g.(12.10). The resonant struc
ture is formed by the section of waveguide that is contained between the
diaphragm and a waveguide short circuit; the waveguide short simply con
sists of a metal plate that completely closes o the guide. The hole in the
diaphragm need not be rectangular as shown in g.(12.9): it is often con
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 369
Figure 12.8: A transmission line, characteristic impedance Z
0
Ohms, shunted
by an inductive impedance of Z
L
Ohms. The incident wave amplitude
is V
0
Volts; the reected wave amplitude is V
R
Volts; the transmitted
wave amplitude is V
T
Volts. The reection coecient is R = V
R
/V
0
=
i(Z
0
/L)/ [2 (iZ
0
/L)]. The transmission coecient is T = V
T
/V
0
=
2/ [2 (iZ
0
/L)].
venient to use a round hole. At a frequency such that the length of the
cavity, L, is very nearly equal to an integral number of halfwavelengths the
reection from the diaphragm becomes smaller than its value for neighbour
ing frequencies. The reectivity exhibits a dip when plotted as a function of
frequency, g.(12.11). At resonance a standing wave is set up in the cavity
that has nodes at the diaphragm and at the shorted end. Energy is fed into
the cavity through the coupling hole, and the elds inside the cavity become
so large that the energy dissipated in the cavity walls is equal to the energy
carried into the cavity through the coupling hole. The Q, or quality factor,
for the cavity is dened to be
Q = 2
_
Energy Stored
Energy Loss per Cycle
_
. (12.44)
The quality factor for a microwave cavity commonly exceeds 1000 and is
often found to be as large as 10,000. The electric and magnetic elds in
a properly coupled microwave cavity range in amplitude between 30 and
100 times as large as the amplitudes of the incident wave that feeds the
cavity. At resonance the cavity appears to be a pure resistance. The value
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 370
Figure 12.9: Thin, perfectly conducting metal diaphragms placed across a
waveguide and their equivalent shunt circuits placed across a transmission
line. Shaded areas are metal, unshaded areas are unobstructed.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 371
Figure 12.10: A microwave cavity resonator. Resonance occurs when L =
n
g
/2 where
g
= 2/k
g
and n is an integer.
Figure 12.11: The absolute value of the reection coecient as a function of
frequency for a microwave signal having an amplitude of E
0
Volts/m incident
on a microwave cavity. The reected wave amplitude is E
R
Volts/m. The
quality factor of the cavity is given by Q=f
0
/f where f is the frequency
interval between the frequencies for which the change in reectivity is 0.7 of
the maximum change.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 372
of that resistance depends upon the size of the coupling aperture. For a
particular orice size, a size that depends upon the cavity losses and which
must be determined by trial and error, the cavity absorbs all of the energy
that is incident upon it; the cavity forms a matched load. Under matched
conditions the reectivity of the cavity is very sensitive to changes in the
cavity losses, and this conguration is often used to measure the magnetic
eld dependence of the absorption of microwave energy by electron spins
(electron spin resonance absorption or ESR).
The elds in the microwave cavity form standing waves at resonance. For
a TE
10
mode
E
y
= E
0
sin
_
x
a
_
sin (k
g
z) exp (it) , (12.45)
H
x
= +i
_
k
g
0
_
E
0
sin
_
x
a
_
cos (k
g
z) exp (it) ,
H
z
= i
_
0
a
_
E
0
cos
_
x
a
_
sin (k
g
z) exp (it) ,
The zero for z in g.(12.10) is located at the diaphragm. The length of the
cavity must be chosen so that k
g
L = m, where m is an integer, so that the
electric eld vanishes on the cavity end walls. Notice that the electric and
magnetic elds are 90 out of phase. This means that the energy stored in the
cavity swings forth and back between energy stored in the electric eld and
energy stored in the magnetic eld: the total energy is independent of the
time. For this cavity resonator, and for m odd, the electric eld is large in the
central region, i.e. at x=a/2, z=L/2, and in this region the magnetic elds
are small. Conversely, the magnetic elds are large at the cavity walls where
the electric eld is small. The energy losses due to eddy currents owing in
the cavity walls can be estimated using the considerations described in the
next section.
12.4 Energy Losses in the Waveguide Walls.
When a metal is exposed to a timevarying magnetic eld eddy currents are
induced which ow so as to shield the interior of the metal from the magnetic
eld. Let the strength of the magnetic eld at the metal surface be H
0
, and
let the eld be oriented along the ydirection. The magnetic eld decays
towards the interior of the metal, Chapter(10), section(10.4), according to
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 373
the formula
H
y
() = H
0
exp (i[k t]) ,
where measures distance into the metal along the normal to the surface;
the metal surface is assumed to lie in the yz plane. The wavevector, k, is
given by
k =
_
0
2
(1 +i) .
The electric eld that generates the shielding currents in the metal is orthog
onal to the magnetic eld and parallel with the metal surface:
E
z
() =
_
ik
_
H
0
exp (i[k t]) .
The Poynting vector at the metal surface is directed into the metal; its time
average is given by
< S
>=
 H
0

2
2
_
0
2
Watts/m
2
. (12.46)
This energy is converted into heat in the metal wall. This Joule heat must,
of course, be supplied by the microwaves propagating along the guide, and
results in a gradual decrease in signal strength. The resistivity of brass is
typically = 810
8
Ohmmeters corresponding to = 1/ = 1.2510
7
per
Ohmm at room temperature. The rate of energy loss to a brass waveguide
wall at room temperature and for a frequency of 10 GHz is
< S
>= 0.028  H
0

2
Watts/m
2
. (12.47)
Since energy is lost to the waveguide walls the average energy moving
down the guide must decrease with distance, and therefore the amplitude of
the wave must decrease. For the TE
10
mode one has (using the coordinate
system of g.(12.4))
H
z
= H
0
cos
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) , (12.48)
H
x
= i
_
k
g
/a
_
H
0
sin
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) ,
E
y
= i
_
0
/a
_
H
0
sin
_
x
a
_
exp (i[k
g
z t]) .
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 374
The average rate at which energy is transported past a waveguide cross
section can be calculated from < S
z
>= (1/2)Real (E
y
H
x
) and this must
be integrated over the area of the guide:
P
z
=
dE
dt
=
_
ab
4
_
0
k
g
(/a)
2
H
2
0
Watts. (12.49)
Let us apply these ideas to calculate the rate at which a microwave signal
propagating in a brass Xband waveguide decays with distance. The energy
loss per second per unit length of guide due to eddy current losses in the
narrow sides of the guide is given by
d < P
1
>
dz
= (2b) H
2
0
(0.028) Watts; (12.50)
these losses are due to the component Hz whose amplitude at the walls is
H
0
. The factor two arises because there are contributions from two walls;
the factor 0.028 comes from eqn.(12.47). The contribution from the energy
losses at the broad sides of the waveguide are more complicated since there
are two magnetic eld components H
x
and H
z
, and both components must
be averaged over the x spatial dependence:
d < P
2
>
dz
= (2a)
_
H
2
0
2
_
_
1 +
_
k
g
/a
_
2
_
(0.028) Watts. (12.51)
Thus the power passing through the guide crosssection must decrease in
the distance dz by an amount that is given by the sum of eqns.(12.50) and
(12.51):
dP = (0.028) H
2
0
_
2b + a
_
1 +
_
k
g
/a
_
2
__
dz . (12.52)
By dierentiating eqn.(12.49) one obtains
dP =
_
ab
2
_ _
0
k
g
(/a)
2
_
H
0
_
dH
0
dz
_
dz . (12.53)
Equating eqns.(12.52) and (12.53) gives an equation for the rate of change
of the wave amplitude, H
0
, with distance
dH
0
dz
= H
0
_
0.056(/a)
2
0
k
g
_
_
2
a
+
1
b
_
1 +
_
k
g
/a
_
2
__
.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 375
This can be rewritten in the form
dH
0
dz
= H
0
, (12.54)
where for Xband waveguide (a=2.29 cm, b=1.02 cm) and for a frequency
of 10 GHz k
g
= 158 m
1
and = 2.67 10
2
per meter. Equation (12.54)
implies that the amplitude of a wave propagating along a waveguide falls o
exponentially
H
0
= A exp (z) ; (12.55)
the amplitude decreases by 1/e after having travelled a distance of z= 1/
meters. This distance is 37.5 meters for Xband waveguide at 10 GHz.
12.5 Circular Waveguides.
The details are dierent, but the modes sustained by a circular waveguide
have much in common with the rectangular waveguide modes. They may,
for example, be classied as transverse electric modes (TE modes) in which
there is no component of electric eld along the guide axis, or as transverse
magnetic modes (TM modes) in which there is no component of the magnetic
eld along the guide axis.
12.5.1 TM Modes.
A vector potential whose transverse components are zero but for which A
z
is
not zero will generate transverse magnetic modes because H
z
is necessarily
zero since curl(
2
A
z
+
r
_
c
_
2
A
z
= 0 . (12.56)
It is convenient to use cylindrical polar cordinates (r,,z) because of the
cylindrical symmetry implied by the shape of a cylindrical waveguide. For
a wave travelling along the zdirection, one can write
A
z
= A(r, ) exp (i[k
g
z t]) .
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 376
From now on the factor exp (i[k
g
z t]) will be understood and not
written out explicitly. Using cylindrical polar coordinates eqn.(12.56)
becomes
1
r
r
_
r
A
r
_
+
1
r
2
2
A
2
+
_
r
_
c
_
2
k
2
g
_
A = 0 .
or setting
k
2
c
=
r
_
c
_
2
k
2
g
, (12.57)
and multiplying through by r
2
r
r
_
r
A
r
_
+
2
A
2
+ k
2
c
r
2
A = 0 . (12.58)
Now let the amplitude A(r,) be written as the product of a function F(r)
that depends only on the radius r and the function cos (m), where m is an
integer. The constant m must be an integer so that A(r,) will be single
valued in angle: ie. A(r,0) must be equal to A(r,2m). The use of the
function cos(m) is arbitrary. We could just as well use sin (m) or a function
of the form f() = a cos (m) + b sin (m), where a,b are constants. All of
these choices have in common that d
2
f/d
2
= m
2
f. The various choices
of a,b simply amount to a choice of the orientation of the waveguide mode
pattern with respect to the axis = 0.
The equation for the radial function, F(r), becomes
r
d
dr
_
r
dF
dr
_
+
_
k
2
c
r
2
m
2
_
F = 0 . (12.59)
This equation for F(r) can be put in the standard form of Bessels equation
by the introduction of a change of variable:
x = k
c
r , (12.60)
then eqn.(12.59) becomes
x
d
dx
_
x
dF
dx
_
+
_
x
2
m
2
_
F = 0 .
The solutions of this equation that remain nite at r=0 are
F(x) = J
m
(x) ,
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 377
where the J
m
(x) are Bessels functions of integer order because m is an in
teger. See Schaums Outline Series, Mathematical Handbook by Murray
R. Spiegel, McGrawHill, New York, 1968, Chapter 24. The required form
of the vector potential is
A(r, ) = A
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) , (12.61)
where A
0
is a constant, and k
c
is given by eqn.(12.57).
The magnetic eld components are obtained from
H = curl(
A):
H
r
=
1
r
_
A
z
_
=
m
r
A
0
J
m
(k
c
r) sin (m) , (12.62)
H
=
_
A
z
r
_
= k
c
A
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) ,
H
z
= 0 ,
(these are all multiplied by the factor exp (i[k
g
z t]), of course). The no
tation
J
m
(x) means the derivative of the Bessel function with respect to the
argument x.
The electric eld components can be calculated from curl(
H) = i
E:
E
r
=
i
_
H
z
_
=
k
g
k
c
A
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) , (12.63)
E
=
i
_
H
r
z
_
=
k
g
mA
0
r
J
m
(k
c
r) sin (m) ,
E
z
=
i
1
r
_
r
(rH
)
H
r
_
=
i
A
0
r
2
_
k
2
c
r
2
J
m
+ k
c
r
J
m
m
2
J
m
_
cos (m) .
The expression for E
z
can be simplied because J
m
(k
c
r) must satisfy the
dierential equation(12.59), therefore
_
k
2
c
r
2
J
m
+ k
c
r
J
m
+ k
2
c
r
2
J
m
m
2
J
m
_
= 0 .
Using this expression E
z
becomes
E
z
= i
k
2
c
A
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) . (12.64)
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 378
The elds of eqns.(12.62) and (12.63) satisfy Maxwells equations. They
must also satisfy the boundary conditions E
=0, E
z
=0, and H
r
=0 at the walls
of the waveguide. Let the inner radius of the waveguide be R meters. The
boundary conditions can be met if J
m
(k
c
R)=0. This condition xes allowable
values for k
c
and therefore xes k
g
through eqn.(12.57)
k
2
g
=
r
_
c
_
2
k
2
c
. (12.65)
Table(12.2) lists the four lowest roots of the equation J
m
(x)=0 for Bessels
functions with m=0,1,2 and 3. These roots determine the wavevector, k
g
.
In particular, they determine the minimum frequency for which energy can
be propagated down the waveguide. The cuto frequencies correspond to
k
g
=0, and are given by
c
=
k
c
r
. (12.66)
To take a concrete example, suppose that R=1cm =0.01m. The lowest
TM mode corresponds to m=0 and to the rst root of the Bessels function
J
0
: this is called the TM
01
mode. For this case
E
r
=
k
g
k
c
A
0
J
0
(k
c
r) , (12.67)
E
= 0 ,
E
z
= i
k
2
c
A
0
J
0
(k
c
r) ,
H
r
= 0 ,
H
= k
c
A
0
J
0
(k
c
r) ,
H
z
= 0 .
Here k
c
= 2.4048/R = 240.48 per meter. This corresponds to a cuto
frequency of 11.48 GHz for
r
=1. The TM
01
mode pattern is shown in
g.(12.12(b)).
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 379
J
m
J
m
m=0 2.4048 3.8317
5.5200 7.0156
8.6537 10.1735
11.7915 13.3237
m=1 3.8317 1.8412
7.0156 5.3314
10.1735 8.5363
13.3237 11.7060
m=2 5.1356 3.0542
8.4172 6.7061
11.6198 9.9695
14.7960 13.1704
m=3 6.3802 4.2012
9.7610 8.0152
13.0152 11.3459
16.2235 14.5858
Table 12.2: The values of x corresponding to the roots of the equations
J
m
(x)=0 and
J
m
(x) =0 for the rst four Bessels functions.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 380
Figure 12.12: Electric and magnetic eld distributions for the TE
01
and TM
01
modes in a circular waveguide. The dashed lines represent the magnetic eld,
the full lines the electric eld.
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 381
12.5.2 TE Modes.
Using the symmetry relations (12.25) one can write down the electric eld
components corresponding to transverse electric modes directly from eqns.(12.62):
E
r
=
mE
0
r
J
m
(k
c
r) sin (m) , (12.68)
E
= k
c
E
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) ,
E
z
= 0 ,
where, as before,
k
2
c
=
r
_
c
_
2
k
2
g
.
The magnetic eld components can be calculated from curl(
E) = i
0
H:
H
r
=
i
0
E
z
=
k
g
k
c
0
E
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) , (12.69)
H
=
i
0
E
r
z
=
k
g
0
mE
0
r
J
m
(k
c
r) sin (m) ,
H
z
=
i
0
r
_
r
(rE
)
E
r
_
=
ik
2
c
0
E
0
J
m
(k
c
r) cos (m) .
In eqns.(12.69) the factor exp (i[k
g
z t]) has been suppressed. The
simple form for H
z
has been obtained using the fact that J
m
(k
c
r) must satisfy
eqn.(12.59), the dierential equation for the radial function F(r). In order to
satisfy the boundary conditions E
=0 and H
r
=0 at the waveguide walls k
c
R
must be set equal to one of the roots of the equation
J
m
(k
c
r) =0, where R is
the inner radius of the waveguide. The lowest four roots of
J
m
(x)=0 have
been listed in Table(12.2) for the rst four Bessels functions. The lowest
cuto frequency occurs for the rst root of
J
1
(x) : this mode is called the
TE
11
mode. The cuto frequency for the TE
11
mode is 8.79 GHz for
r
=1
and R= 1cm. Compare this with the cuto frequency for the TM
01
mode,
11.48 GHz. Thus, over the frequency interval 8.79 to 11.48 GHz an airlled
circular pipe having an inner radius of R=1cm can support only a single
mode, the TE
11
mode. The TE
11
mode pattern is shown in g.(12.13).
The TE
01
mode is of particular interest; the mode pattern is shown in
g.(12.12(a)). This mode is very useful for the construction of highQ cavities
CHAPTER 12. WAVEGUIDES. 382
Figure 12.13: Electric eld lines for the TE
11
mode in a cylindrical Wave
guide. The electric eld lines must be normal to the walls at r=R, where R
is the inner radius of the waveguide. The magnetic eld lines are orthogonal
to the electric eld lines, and H
r
=0 at r=R.
of variable frequency. The length of the cavity can be altered by means of a
sliding piston. No currents need ow across the gap between the piston and
the walls of the cylinder for the TE
01
mode: the current lines on the face of
the piston are similar to the electric eld lines shown in g.(12.12(a)) and are
concentric circles. Even if the piston does not make good electrical contact
with the cavity walls the eld lines in the TE
01
mode remain unperturbed
by any small gap between the piston and the cylinder walls. This mode is
often used to construct microwave frequency meters.
Waveguide modes are discussed in detail in the book Electron Spin
Resonance by Charles P. Poole, 2cd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1983.